beckwith 3425

Instruction Book

M-3425AGenerator Protection

Generator ProtectionM-3425A

Integrated Protection System® for Generators of All Sizes

• Exceeds IEEE C37.102 and Standard 242 requirements for generatorprotection

• Protects generators of any prime mover, grounding and connection type

• Provides all major protective functions for generator protection includingOut-of-Step (78), Split-Phase Differential (50DT) and Under Frequency TimeAccumulation (81A)

• Expanded IPScom® Communications Software provides simple and logicalsetting and programming

• Simple application with Base and Comprehensive protection packages

• Options: Ethernet Connection, Field Ground/Brush Lift-Off Protection (64F/B),Sync Check (25) and 100% Stator Ground Fault Protection by low frequencyinjection (64S)

Unit shown with optional M-3925A Target Module and M-3931HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module.

PROTECTION

–2–

M-3425A Generator Protection Relay

Optional Protective Functions• Sync Check with Phase Angle, ΔV and ΔF

with dead line/dead bus options (25)

• Field Ground (64F) and Brush Lift Off (64B)(Includes M-3921 Field Ground Coupler)

• 100% Stator Ground protection by low fre-quency injection (64S). The following equip-ment is supplied with the 64S option:– 20 Hz signal generator (430-00426)– Band-pass Filter (430-00429)– 20 Hz Measuring CT, 400/5 A (430-00428)

Contact Beckwith Electric for availabilty.

Standard Features• Eight programmable outputs and six program-

mable inputs

• Oscillographic recording with COMTRADE orBECO format

• Time-stamped target storage for 32 events

• Metering of all measured parameters and cal-culated values

• Three communications ports (two RS-232 andone RS-485)

• M-3820D IPScom® Communications Software

• Includes MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols

• Standard 19" rack-mount design (verticalmounting available)

• Removable printed circuit board and powersupply

• 50 and 60 Hz models available

• Both 1A and 5 A rated CT inputs available

• Additional trip inputs for externally connecteddevices

• IRIG-B time synchronization

• Operating Temperature: –20° C to +70° C

• Sequence of Events Log (The display of Se-quence of Events Log will be available in alater release of IPScom.)

• Trip Circuit Monitoring

• Breaker Monitoring

• Multiple Setpoint Groups

Optional Features• Redundant power supply

• M-3925A Target Module

• M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI)Module

• RJ45 Ethernet port utilizing MODBUS overTCP/IP and BECO2200 over TCP/IP proto-cols

• M-3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph AnalysisSoftware

Protective FunctionsBase Package

• Overexcitation (V/Hz) (24)

• Phase Undervoltage (27)

• Directional power sensitive triple-setpoint Re-verse Power, Low Forward Power or Overpowerdetection, one of which can be used for se-quential tripping (32)

• Dual-zone, offset-mho Loss of Field (40)

• Sensitive Negative Sequence Overcurrent pro-tection and alarm (46)

• Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50)

• Inadvertent Energizing (50/27)

• Generator Breaker Failure (50BF)

• Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50N)

• Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N)

• Three-phase Inverse Time Overcurrent(51V) with voltage control and voltage re-straint.

• Phase Overvoltage (59)

• Neutral Overvoltage (59N)

• Multi-purpose Overvoltage (59X)

• VT Fuse-Loss Detection and blocking(60FL)

• Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N)

• Four-step Over/Underfrequency (81)

• Phase Differential Current (87)

• Ground (zero sequence) Differential Current(87GD)

• IPSlogicTM takes the contact input status andfunction status and generates outputs byemploying (OR, AND, and NOT) boolean logicand a timer.

Protective FunctionsComprehensive PackageThe Comprehensive Package includes all Base Packagefunctions, as well as the following:

• Three-zone Phase Distance protection for phasefault backup protection (21). Zone three can beused as Out-of-Step Blocking

• 100% Stator Ground Fault protection using ThirdHarmonic Neutral Undervoltage (27TN) or (59D)Third Harmonic Voltage Differential

• Stator Overload (49) (Positive SequenceOvercurrent)

• Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) can be usedfor split phase differential

• Out-of-Step (78)

• UnderFrequency Accumulation (81A)

• Rate of Change of Frequency (81R)

–3–


PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONSDevice SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Phase Distance (three-zone mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter #1,#2,#3 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)

Offset #1,#2,#3 –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)

Impedance Angle #1,#2,#3 0° to 90° 1° 1°

Load Encroachment Blinder #1,#2,#3Angle 1° to 90° 1° 1°R Reach 0.1 to 100 Ω

Time Delay #1,#2,#3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Out-of-Step Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Overcurrent Supervision 0.1 to 20 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 2%(0.02 to 4 A) 0.01 A 0.02 A or 2%

When out-of-step blocking on Zone 1 or Zone 2 is enabled, Zone 3 will not trip and it will be used to detect theout-of-step condition for blocking Fucntion 21 #1 and/or 21 #2..

Volts / Hz

Definite TimePickup #1, #2 100 to 200% 1% 1%

Time Delay #1, #2 30 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 25 Cycles

Inverse Time

Pickup 100 to 200% 1% 1%Characteristic Curves Inverse Time #1–#4 — —

Time Dial: Curve #1 1 to 100 1Time Dial: Curves #2–#4 0.0 to 9.0 0.1

Reset Rate 1 to 999 Sec. 1 Sec. .02 Sec. or 1%(from threshold of trip)

The percent pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal system frequency settings. Thepickup accuracy stated is only applicable from 10 to 80 Hz, 0 to 180 V, 100 to 150% V/Hz and a nominalvoltage setting of 120 V.

Phase Undervoltage

Pickup #1, #2, #3 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%0.8 V or 0.75%*

Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 0.5%**

* When both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line VT connection is selected.

**When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is O20 cycles or 1%.

†Select the greater of these accuracy values. Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.

21

24

27

–4–


PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS (cont.)Device SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral

Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 14.00 V 0.01 V 0.1 V or 1%

Positive SequenceVoltage Block 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%

Forward Under Power Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%

Reverse Under Power Block–1.00 to –0.01 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%

Lead Under var Block –1.00 to –0.01 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%

Lag Under var Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%

Lead Power Factor Block 0.01 to 1.00 0.01 0.01 PU or 2%

Lag Power Factor Block 0.01 to 1.00 0.01 0.01 PU or 2%

High Band ForwardPower Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%

Low Band ForwardPower Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU 0.01 PU or 2%

Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Directional Power

Pickup #1, #2, #3 –3.000 to +3.000 PU 0.001 PU 0.002 PU or 2%

Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +16 Cycles or 1%

The per-unit pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal CT secondary current settings.This function can be selected as either overpower or underpower in the forward direction (positive setting) orreverse direction (negative setting). Element #3 can be set as real power or reactive power. This functionincludes a programmable target LED that may be disabled.

Loss of Field (dual-zone offset-mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter #1, #2 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)

Offset #1, #2 –50.0 to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(–250.0 to 250.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)


Time Delay withVoltage Control #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Voltage Control 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%(positive sequence)

Directional Element 0° to 20° 1° —

Time delay with voltage control for each zone can be individually enabled.


40

32

27TN

–5–



Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Definite TimePickup 3 to 100% 1% 0.5% of 5 A

( 0.5% of 1 A)

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Inverse TimePickup 3 to 100% 1% 0.5 % of 5 A

( 0.5% of 1 A)

Time Dial Setting 1 to 95 1 3 Cycles or 3%(K= I2

2t)

Definite MaximumTime to Trip 600 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Definite Minimum Time 12 Cycles — fixed

Reset Time (Linear) 1 to 600 Seconds 1 Second —(from threshold of trip)

Pickup is based on the generator nominal current setting.

Stator Overload Protection

Time Constant #1, #2 1.0 to 999.9 minutes 0.1 minutes

Maximum Overload Current 1.00 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%(0.20 to 2.00 A)

Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent

Pickup #1, #2 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.1 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)


When the frequency f is < (fnom –5)Hz) add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy.

Breaker Failure

PickupPhase Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%

(0.02 to 2.00 A) ( 0.02 A or 2%)

Neutral Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%(0.02 to 2.00 A) ( 0.02 A or 2%)


50BF can be initiated from designated M-3425A output contacts or programmable control/status inputs.

Definite Time Overcurrent

Pickup Phase A #1, #2 0.20 A to 240.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.04 A to 48.00 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)

Pickup Phase B #1, #2 (same as above)

Pickup Phase C #1, #2 (same as above)


When 50DT function is used for split-phase differential protection, 50BF, 87, and 87GD functions are notavailable.


50DT

50

50BF

50BF-Ph

50BF-N

46

49

–6–



Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent

Pickup 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%(0.1 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)



Inadvertent Energizing

OvercurrentPickup 0.5 to 15.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%

(0.1 to 3.00 A) ( 0.02 A or 2%)

UndervoltagePickup 5 to 130 V 1 V 0.5 V

Pick-up Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Drop-out Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent


Characteristic Curve Definite Time/Inverse/Very Inverse/Extremely Inverse/IEC Curves

Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 3%*0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01

* For IEC Curves the timing accuracy is 5%.


Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint



Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 3%*0.05 to 1.10 (IEC curves) 0.01

Voltage Control (VC) 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5% or

Voltage Restraint (VR) Linear Restraint — —

* For IEC Curves the timing accuracy is 5%.

Phase Overvoltage

Pickup #1, #2, #3 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%0.8 V or 0.75%*

Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%**

Input Voltage Select Phase or Positive Sequence***

* When both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected.

** When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is +20 cycles or 1%.

*** When positive sequence voltage is selected, the 59 Function uses discrete Fourier transform (DFT) for magnitude calculation irrespective of the RMS/DFT selection and timing accuracy is 1 Cycle or 1%.

59

51V

51N

50N

50/27

50

27


–7–



Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential

Ratio 0.1 to 5.0 0.1


Positive Seq Voltage Block 5 to 180 V 1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%

Line Side Voltage VX or 3V0 (calculated)

The 59D function with VX cannot be enabled if the 25 function is enabled. The line side voltage can be se-lected as the third harmonic of 3V0 (equivalent to VA + VB + VC) or VX.

3V0 selection for line side voltage can only be used with line-ground VT configuration.

Neutral Overvoltage

Pickup #1, #2, #3 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%

Time Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Multi-purpose Overvoltage

Pickup #1, #2 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V or 0.5%


Multi-purpose input that may be used for turn-to-turn stator ground protection, bus ground protection, or as anextra Phase-Phase, or Phase-Ground voltage input.

VT Fuse-Loss Detection

A VT fuse-loss condition is detected by using the positive and negative sequence compo-nents of the voltages and currents. VT fuse-loss output can be initiated from internallygenerated logic, and/or from input contacts.

Alarm Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Three Phase VTFuse Loss Detection Enable/Disable

59N

60FL

59X

59D


–8–



Residual Directional Overcurrent

Definite Time*Pickup 0.5 to 240.0 A 0.1 A 0.1 A or 3%

(0.1 to 48.0 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%

Inverse Time*Pickup 0.25 to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 3%

(0.05 to 2.40 A) ( 0.02 A or 3%)


Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1 3 Cycles or 5%

0.05 to 1.10 (IEC Curves) 0.01

Directional ElementMax Sensitivity Angle (MSA) 0 to 359° 1°

Polarizing Quantity 3Vo (calculated), VN or VX

*Directional control for 67NDT or 67NIT may be disabled.VX polarization cannot be used if 25 function is enabled.3Vo polarization can only be used with line-ground VT configuration.Operating current for 67N can be selected as 3Io (calculated) or IN (Residual CT).

If 87GD is enabled, 67N with IN (Residual CT) operating current will not be available.

Out of Step (mho characteristic)

Circle Diameter 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)

Offset –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(–500.0 to 500.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)

Impedance Angle 0° to 90° 1° 1°

Blinder 0.1 to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω 0.1 Ω or 5%(0.5 to 250.0 Ω) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%)


Trip on mho Exit Enable/Disable

Pole Slip Counter 1 to 20 1

Pole Slip Reset 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Frequency

Pickup #1,#2,#3,#4 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz40.00 to 57.00 Hz*

Time Delay #1–#4 3 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle 2 Cycles or 1%

The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz.

* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models.


81

78

67N

–9–



Frequency AccumulationFrequency AccumulationFrequency AccumulationFrequency AccumulationFrequency Accumulation

Bands #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6High Band #1 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz

40.00 to 57.00 Hz*

Low Band #1–#6 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.02 Hz40.00 to 57.00 Hz*

Delay #1–#6 3 to 360,000 Cycles 1 Cycle 2 Cycles or 1%

When using multiple frequency bands, the lower limit of the previous band becomes the upper limit for the next band,i.e., Low Band #2 is the upper limit for Band #3, and so forth. Frequency bands must be used in sequential order, 1 to6. Band #1 must be enabled to use Bands #2–#6. If any band is disabled, all following bands are disabled.

When frequency is within an enabled band limit, accumulation time starts (there is an internal ten cycle delay prior toaccumulation) this allows the underfrequency blade resonance to be established to avoid unnecessary accumulationof time. When duration is greater than set delay, then alarm asserts and a target log entry is made.

The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53 Hz.Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz.

* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models.

Rate of Change of Frequency

Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec. 0.01 Hz/Sec. 0.05 Hz/Sec. or 5%

Time Delay #1, #2 3 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle + 20 Cycles

Negative SequenceVoltage Inhibit 0 to 99% 1% 0.5%

Phase Differential Current

Pickup #1, #2 0.20 A to 3.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 5%(0.04 to 0.60 A) ( 0.02 A or 5%)

Percent Slope #1, #2 1 to 100% 1% 2%

Time Delay* #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

CT Correction** 0.5 to 2.0 A 0.01 A

*When a time delay of 1 cycle is selected, the response time is less than 1–1/2 cycles.

**The CT Correction factor is multiplied by IA,IB,IC.

Ground (zero sequence) Differential Current



CT Ratio Correction (RC) 0.10 to 7.99 0.01

The 87GD function is provided primarily for low-impedance grounded generator applications. This functionoperates as a directional differential. If 3I0 or In is extremely small (less than 0.2 secondary Amps), the elementbecomes non-directional.

If 67N function with IN (Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD will not be available. Also, if 50DT is usedfor split-phase differential, 87GD function will not be available.


87

87GD

81R

81A

–10–



IPSlogicTM

IPSlogic uses element pickups, element trip commands, control/status input state changes,output contact close signals to develop 6 programmable logic schemes.

Time Delay #1–#6 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Breaker Monitoring

Pickup 0 to 50,000 kA 1 kA 1 kA

Time Delay 0.1 to 4095.5 Cycles 0.1 Cycles 1 Cycle or 1%

Timing Method IT or I2T

Preset Accumulators 0 to 50,000 kA Cycles 1 kA CyclePhase A, B, C

The Breaker Monitor feature calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuringand integrating the current (squared) through the breaker contacts as an arc.

The per-phase values are added to an accumulated total for each phase, and then compared to a user-programmedthreshhold value. When the threshhold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set a programmable output contact.

The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed.

The Breaker Monitoring feature requires an initiating element to begin accumulation.

Trip Circuit Monitoring


The AUX input is provided for monitoring the integrity of the trip circuit. This input can be used for nominal tripcoil voltages of 24 V dc, 48 V dc, 125 V dc and 250 V dc.

Nominal Settings

Nominal Voltage 50.0 to 140.0 V 0.1 V —

Nominal Current 0.50 to 6.00 A 0.01 A —

VT Configuration Line-Line/Line-Ground/Line-Ground to Line-Line*

Delta/Wye UnitTransformer Disable/Delta AB/Delta AC

Seal-In Delay 2 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

*When Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the relay internally calculates the line-line voltages from the line-groundvoltages for all voltage-sensitive functions. This Line-Ground to Line-Line selection should only be used for a VTconnected Line-Ground with a secondary voltage of 69 V (not 120 V).


IPS

BM

TC

–11–


64F

64B

25

25S

25D

64S

OPTIONAL PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONSDevice SetpointNumber Function Ranges Increment Accuracy†

Sync Check

Dead CheckDead Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1 V 0.5 V or ±0.5%

Dead Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1%

Sync CheckPhase Angle Window 0° to 90° 1° 1°

Upper Voltage Limit 60 to 140 V 1 V 0.5 V or ±0.5%

Lower Voltage Limit 40 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or ±0.5%

Delta Voltage Limit 1.0 to 50.0 V 0.1 V 0.5 V or ±0.5%

Delta Frequency Limit 0.001 to 0.500 Hz 0.001 Hz 0.0007 Hz or ±5%

Sync Check Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or ±1%

Various combinations of input supervised hot/dead closing schemes may be selected. The 25 function cannotbe enabled if the 59D function with VX or 67N function with VX is enabled.

Field Ground Protection

Pickup #1, #2 5 to 100 KΩ 1 KΩ 10% or ±1KΩTime Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ( 2

IF +1) Sec.

Injection Frequency (IF) 0.10 to 1.00 Hz 0.01 Hz

Brush Lift-Off Detection (measuring control circuit)Pickup 0 to 5000 mV 1 mV

Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle ( 2IF +1) Sec.

When 64F is purchased, an external Coupler Module (M-3921) is provided for isolation from dc field voltages.

Figure 6, Field Ground Protection Block Diagram, illustrates a typical connection utilizing the M-3921 FieldGround Coupler. Hardware dimensional and mounting information is shown in Figure 7, M-3921 Field GroundCoupler Mounting Dimensions.

100% Stator Ground Protection by low frequency injection

Pickup 2 to 40 mA 1 mA 1 mA or 1%Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%

Undervoltage Inhibit 5 to 30 V 1 V .05 V to 0.5%

External low frequency generator, band pass filter and current transformer are required for this function. 59Dand 27TN function should be disabled when the 64S function is enabled. 59N may be applied when thisfunction is enabled


–12–


DescriptionThe M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is suitable for all generator ratings and prime movers. Typicalconnection diagrams are illustrated in Figure 2, M-3425A One-Line Functional Diagram, and Figure 3, TypicalOne-Line Functional Diagram (configured for split-phase differential).

Configuration OptionsThe M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is available in either a Base or Comprehensive package of protectivefunctions. This provides the user with flexibility in selecting a protective system to best suit the application.Additional Optional Protective Functions may be added at the time of purchase at per-function pricing.

The Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, Target Module, or redundant power supply can be selected at timeof purchase.

When the Field Ground (64F) Premium Protective Function is purchased, an external coupler module (M-3921) isprovided for isolation from the dc field voltages.

When 100% Stator Ground (64S) protection using low-frequency injection is purchased, external equipment(band pass filter, frequency generator, current transformer) is provided. Contact the factory for availabilty of theequipment.

Multiple Setpoint Profiles (Groups)The relay supports four setpoint profiles. This feature allows multiple setpoint profiles to be defined for differentpower system configurations or generator operating modes. Profiles can be switched either manually using theHuman-Machine Interface (HMI), by communications, programmable logic or by control/status inputs.

■■■■■ NOTE: During profile switching, relay operation is disabled for approximately 1 second.

MeteringThe relay provides metering of voltages (phase, neutral and sequence quantities), currents (phase, neutral andsequence quantities), real power, reactive power, power factor and impedance measurements.

Metering accuracies are:

Voltage: 0.5 V or 0.5%, whichever is greater0.8 V or 0.75%, whichever is greater (when both RMS and Line-Ground to Line-Line are

selected)

Current: 5 A rating, 0.1 A or 3%, whichever is greater1 A rating, 0.02 A or 3%, whichever is greater

Power: 0.01 PU or 2%, whichever is greater

Frequency: 0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)

Volts/Hz: 1%

Oscillographic RecorderThe oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, storing up to 472cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The sampling rate is 16 timesthe power system nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The recorder may be triggered using either the designatedcontrol/status inputs, trip outputs, or using serial communications. When untriggered, the recorder continuouslystores waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The datarecords can be stored in either Beckwith Electric format or COMTRADE format.

Target StorageInformation associated with the last 32 trips is stored. The information includes the function(s) operated, thefunctions picked up, input/output status, time stamp, and phase and neutral currents at the time of trip.

Sequence of Events LogThe Sequence of Events Log records predefined relay events. The Sequence of Events Log includes 512 of themost recently recorded relay events. The events and the associated data is available for viewing utilizing theM-3820D IPScom Communications Software. (The setting and display of Sequence of Events Log events will beavailable in a later release of IPScom.)

–13–


CalculationsCurrent and Voltage RMS Values: Uses Discrete Fourier Transform algorithm on sampled voltage and currentsignals to extract fundamental frequency phasors for relay calculations. RMS calculation for the 50, 51N, 59 and27 functions, and the 24 function are obtained using the time domain approach to obtain accuracy over a widefrequency band. When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation for 59 and 27 functions is accurateover a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz). When the DFT option is selected, the magnitude calculation isaccurate near nominal frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz) but will degrade outside the nominal frequency. For 50 and 51Nfunctions the DFT is used when the frequency is 55 Hz to 65 Hz for 60 Hz (nominal) and 45 Hz to 55Hz for 50 Hz(nominal), outside of this range RMS calculation is used.

Power Input OptionsNominal 110/120/230/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 V dc. Operates properly from 85 V ac to265 V ac and from 80 V dc to 312.5 V dc. Withstands 300 V ac or 315 V dc for 1 second. Nominal burden 20 VAat 120 V ac/125 V dc.Nominal 24/48 V dc, operates properly from 18 V dc to 56 V dc, withstands 65 V dc for 1 second. Burden 25 VAat 24 V dc and 30 VA at 48 V dc.An optional redundant power supply is available.

Sensing InputsFive Voltage Inputs: Rated for a nominal voltage of 50 V ac to 140 V ac at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 240 Vcontinuous voltage and 360 V for 10 seconds. Source voltages may be line-to-ground or line-to-line connected.Phase sequence ABC or ACB is software selectable. Voltage transformer burden less than 0.2 VA at 120 V ac.

Seven Current Inputs: Rated nominal current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 3I

Rcontinuous current and 100I

R for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A, or 0.3 VA

at 1 A.

Control/Status InputsThe control/status inputs, INPUT1 through INPUT6, can be programmed to block any relay protective functions,to trigger the oscillograph recorder, to operate one or more outputs through IPSlogicTM or can be an input intoIPSlogic. The control/status inputs should be connected to dry contacts and are internally connected (wetted)with a 24 V dc power supply. To provide breaker status LED indication on the front panel, the INPUT1 control/status input contact must be connected to the 52b breaker status contact.

Output ContactsThe eight programmable output contacts (six form ‘a’ and two form ‘c’), the power supply alarm output contact(form ‘b’), and the self-test alarm output contact (form ‘c’) are all rated per ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 for tripping.Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, carry 8 A, break 6 A at 120 V ac, break 0.5 A at 48 V dc; 0.3 A, 125 V dc; 0.2 A, 250V dc with L/R=40 mSec.Any of the functions can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the eight programmableoutput contacts. Any output contact can also be selected as pulsed or latched. IPSlogic can also be used toactivate an output contact.

IPSlogicThis feature can be programmed utilizing the IPScom® Communications Software. IPSlogic takes the contactinput status and function status, and by employing (OR, AND, and NOT) boolean logic and a timer can activatean output or change setting profiles.

Target/Status Indicators and ControlsThe RELAY OK LED reveals proper cycling of the microcomputer. The BRKR CLOSED LED will turn on when thebreaker is closed (when the 52b contact input is open). The OSC TRIG LED indicates that oscillographic data hasbeen recorded in the unit's memory. The TARGET LED will turn on when any of the relay functions operate.Pressing and releasing the TARGET RESET button resets the target LED if the conditions causing the operationhave been removed. Holding the TARGET RESET button displays the present pickup status of the relayfunctions. The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remain on as long as power is applied to the unit and the power supply isoperating properly. TIME SYNC LED illuminates when valid IRIG-B signal is applied and time synchronizationhas been established.

–14–


CommunicationCommunications ports include rear panel RS-232 and RS-485 ports, a front panel RS-232 port, a rear-panelIRIG-B port and an Ethernet port (optional). The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented,asynchronous communication, providing the following functions when used with the Windows™-compatibleM-3820D IPScom® Communications Software. MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols are supported providing:

• Interrogation and modification of setpoints

• Time-stamped information for the 32 most recent trips

• Real-time metering of all quantities measured

• Downloading of recorded oscillographic data and Sequence of Events Recorder data.

When the optional Ethernet port is purchased it also provides MODBUS over TCP/IP and BECO2200 over TCP/IP protocols.

IRIG-BThe M-3425A Generator Protection Relay can accept either modulated or demodulated IRIG-B time clocksynchronization signal. The IRIG-B time synchronization information is used to correct the hour, minutes,seconds, and milliseconds information.

HMI Module (optional)Local access to the relay is provided through an optional M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module,allowing for easy-to-use, menu-driven access to all functions via six buttons and a 2-line by 24 characteralphanumeric vacuum florescent display. Features of the HMI Module include :

• User-definable access codes allow three levels of security


• Time-stamped information for the 32 most recent trips

• Real-time metering of all quantities measured

Target Module (optional)An optional M-3925A Target Module provides 24 target and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate target LEDs will lightwhen the corresponding function operates. The targets can be reset with the TARGET RESET pushbutton. TheOUTPUT LEDs indicate the status of the programmable output relays.

Tests and StandardsThe relay complies with the following type tests and standards:

Voltage Withstand

Dielectric WithstandIEC 60255-5 3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth

3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to IRIG-B circuit to earth1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between RS-485 to each independent circuit

Impulse VoltageIEC 60255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth

5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit1.2 by 50 μs, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds

Insulation ResistanceIEC 60255-5 > 40 Megaohms

–15–


Electrical Environment

Electrostatic Discharge TestIEC 61000-4-2 Class 4 (8 kV)—point contact discharge

Fast Transient Disturbance TestIEC 61000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)

Surge Withstand CapabilityANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earthC37.90.1- 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit1989 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth

5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earthC37.90.1- 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit 2002 4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied to each independent circuit to earth

4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied between each independent circuit

■ NOTE: The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS-485, IRIG-B, Ethernet communicationport and field ground coupling port) through capacitive coupling clamp.

Radiated SusceptibilityANSI/IEEE 25-1000 Mhz @ 35 V/m (with 64F option, 20 V/m)C37.90.2

Output ContactsANSI/IEEE Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, off for 15 seconds for 2,000 operations. Section 6.7.1, TrippingC37.90.0 Output Performance Requirements

Atmospheric Environment

TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1 Cold, –20° C for 96 hoursIEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat, +70° C for 96 hoursIEC 60068-2-3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 93% RH, for 96 hours

Mechanical Environment

VibrationIEC 60255-21-1 Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g

Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g

ComplianceUL-Listed per 508 – Industrial Control Equipment

CSA-Certified per C22.2 No. 14-95 – Industrial Control Equipment

CE Safety Directive – EN61010-1:2001

–16–


PhysicalSize: 19.00" wide x 5.21" high x 10.20" deep (48.3 cm x 13.2 cm x 25.9 cm)

Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semiflush, three-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to ANSI/EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Vertical or horizontal panel-mount options are available.

Approximate Weight: 17 lbs (7.7 kg)

Approximate Shipping Weight: 25 lbs (11.3 kg)

Patent & WarrantyThe M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is covered by U.S. Patents 5,592,393 and 5,224,011.

The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is covered by a five-year warranty from date of shipment.

Specification subject to change without notice.

External ConnectionsM-3425A external connection points are illustrated in Figure 1, below.

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�� !!��" �� # $ �� %&��' ��

!�!( � � � ( ��

��

�') �') ��

��

��

��( ��

&�� * �� &��' �� + �� '��%

�� , ��

��

��

��

�- ��

��

��

��

��

��'��

�

�

��

(

�

��

� �

( .

��

� �

�

� � �

.

! "�

� �

� �

� ��

��

�� "�"�"�"�!�!�!�! ��

��

��

� ��

�� ! �"��

�� ! �"

�� /�

�

��

,

!

� � 0

� �

��

�! �"��

�

�

� �

� �

��

�

�� !�� " ��

�� ( ��

*

* ��

�� *

��12�(��22222222222222222222222222222222222222222222��&��12�(��

(. . (

�� (��

�� (� �

�

�� ( �� - � ')

��

�� 3

�

�� "� ��- �

�

Figure 1 External Connections

■■■■■ NOTES:

1. See M-3425A Instruction Book Section 2.3, Setpoints and Time Settings, subsection for 64B/F FieldGround Protection.

2. Before making connections to the Trip Circuit Monitoring input, see M-3425A Instruction Book Section5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, for the information regarding setting Trip Circuit Monitoringinput voltage. Connecting a voltage other than the voltage that the unit is configured to may result inmis-operation or permanent damage to the unit.

3. 88888 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be connected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10with 11 common) because these contact inputs are internally wetted. Application of externalvoltage on these inputs may result in damage to the units.

4. 88888 WARNING: The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground anytime external connections have been made to the unit.

–17–


50DT

Utility System

52Unit

52Gen

50BFPh

87

492132 504078 60FL 51V 50/27

27

81R 81 27 59 24

64F 64B

M-3921+

-

CT

VT

M-3425A

87GD 50N50

BFN 51N

R

64S27TN

27

32R

High-impedance Grounding with ThirdHarmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection

Low-impedance Grounding with Ground Differentialand Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection

These functions are available inthe Comprehensive Package. Asubset of these functions are alsoavailable in a Base Package.

This function is available as aoptional protective function.

This function provides control forthe function to which it points.

M-3425A TypicalConnection Diagram

25

59D

VT (Note 1)

Targets(Optional)

Integral HMI(Optional)

Metering

Waveform Capture

IRIG-B

Front RS232Communication

Multiple SettingGroups

Programmable I/O

Self Diagnostics

Dual Power Supply(Optional)

Rear Ethernet Port (Optional)

Rear RS-485Communication

BreakerMonitoring

Trip CircuitMonitoring

67N67N Polarization(Software Select)

81A

50N50BFN 51N

46

59X

59N

3VO (Calculated)VX

VN

3IO

IN

67N Operating Current(Software Select)

VT (Note 1)

(Note 4)

(Note 3)

CT (Residual)Note 5

59D Line SideVoltage

(Software Select)

VX3VO (Calculated)

CT (Neutral)Notes 2 & 5

CTM

(Metering)

M

(Metering)

Rear RS232Communication

Event Log

NOTES:

1. When 25 function is enabled, 59D with VX and 67N with V

X are not available, and vice versa.

2. When 67N function with IN (Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD is not available, and vice

versa.

3. The 50BFN, 50N, and 51N may utilize either the neutral current or the residual current.

4. When VT source is used as a turn-turn fault protection device (See M-3425A Instruction Book,Chapter 2, Application, for additional 59X applications.)

5. The current input IN can be either from neutral current or residual current.

6. The 50BFN, 50N, 51N, 59D, 67N (with IN or V

N) and 87GD functions are unavailable when the 64S

function has been purchased. See the M-3425A Instruction Book for connection details.

Figure 2 One-Line Functional Diagram

–18–


Utility System

52Unit

52Gen

81R 81 59 27 24

M-3921+

-

VT

CT

M-3425A

50N 51N

R

CT

27

32R


Low-impedance Grounding withOvercurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection




M-3425A TypicalConnection Diagram(Configured for Split-Phase Differential)

25

59D

50DT

67N

Targets(Optional)


Metering

Waveform Capture

IRIG-B



Programmable I/O

Self Diagnostics


Rear EthernetPort (Optional)


BreakerMonitoring


27TN

81A

46492132 504078 60FL 51V 50/27

2764F 64B

59X

64S 59N

CT (Residual)Note 5

VT (Note 1)

VT (Note 1)

67N Polarization(Software Select)

3VO (Calculated)

VX

VN

(Note 2)

CT (Note 3)

(Note 4)


(Software Select)

VX 3VO (Calculated)

CT (Neutral)Note 5

M

(Metering)

M

(Metering)


Event Log

NOTES:

1. When 25 function is enabled, 59D with VX and 67N with V


2. When used as a turn-turn fault protection device.

3. CTs are connected as split-phase differential current.

4. 67N operating current can only be selected to IN(Residual) for this configuration.

5. The current input (IN) can be either from neutral current or residual current.




Figure 3 Typical One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for split-phase diffential)

–19–


��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !�"��#�$$�$

��%�&�'(�$��$��)��*+(�$��(��*(��'(�(�$�

,-�.!!-/&-&�� .� �0�-/�,-��1�2�/. ��-&�� /&�,&�,��3�!.�/

,(��4�(5

��6��. �7�68

Figure 4 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions

■ NOTE: Panels for vertical mounting are available. When mounted vertically, the target module will be locatedat the top and all front-panel text will be horizontally aligned. Consult Beckwith Electric Co. for details.

–20–


.9�� 4(��*� �!�"��#�$$�$

��%�&�'(�$��$��)��*+(�$��(��*(��'(�(�$�

�!�!�4��5

��4�!��"5

��4��!�5 ��!�

4��5

�"�4��5 �!��

4��"!5�0#6/7

��"4��5

��4��5

�!��4��5

��

��24��528��!24��5��2��8

,(��4�(5

,-�.!!-/&-&�� .� �0�-/�,-��1�2�/. ��-&�� /&�,&�,��3�!.�/

Figure 5 Vertical Mounting Dimensions

–21–


M-3921 Field Ground Coupler

:,. -� 2./�,-��1!;��

:,.�-��.,

<�( ��=��"��&(�(*��

�>"��(5�?(=(�(��

��@�� !(�$"�('(��

��:��*($$��@

�.�:�2/=/- 0.,3

7!;��8

=��"��A!�*#��(�<��'(

�#�B�=��"��C�"$#

-6*��D$�('

=(��,��

C�"$#($

Figure 6 Field Ground Protection Block Diagram

NOTES:1. The above circuit measures insulation resistance (R

f) between rotor field winding and ground (64F).

2. Relay injects 15 V squarewave (Vout

) and measures return signal (Vf) to calculate R

f.

3. The injection frequency can be set (0.1 to 1.0 Hz) based on the rotor capacitance, in order to improveaccuracy.

4. The signal rise time is analyzed to determine if shaft brushes are lifting or open (64B).

5. May also be applied on generators with brushless excitation with a grounding brush and pilot groundfault detection brush.

Function SpecificationField/Exciter Supply Voltage Rating (Terminal (3) to (2)):

• 60 to 600 V dc, continuous

• 1000 V dc, 1 minute

Operating Temperature: –20° to +70°, Centigrade

Patent & WarrantyThe M-3921 Field Ground Coupler is covered by a five-year warranty from date of shipment.

Tests and StandardsM-3921 Field Ground Coupler complies with the following tests and standards:

Voltage Withstand

Isolation4 kV ac for 1 minute, all terminals to case

–22–


Impulse VoltageIEC 60255–5, 5,000 V pk, 1.2 by 50 μs, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at 5 second

intervals per minute

Electrical InterferenceElectrostatic Discharge TestIEC 61000-4-2 Class 4 (8 kV)—point contact discharge

Fast Transient Disturbance TestsIEC 61000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)

Surge Withstand CapabilityANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earthC37.90.1- 2,500 V pk-pk applied between each independent circuit1989 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth

5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit

■ NOTE: See also M-3425A Surge Withstand Capability test standards, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2-2002.

Radiated SusceptibilityANSI/IEEE 25-1000 Mhz @ 20 V/m (20 V/m only if 64F option is selected.)C37.90.2

Atmospheric EnvironmentIEC 60068–2–1 Cold, –20° C for 96 hoursIEC 60068–2–2 Dry Heat, +70° C for 96 hoursIEC 60068–2–3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 93% RH, for 96 hours

Enclosure ProtectionNEMA 1, IEC IPC-65

–23–


.18 DIA [0.46] 4 HOLES

MOUNTING PATTERNWITHOUT TABS

Field GroundCoupler4.72 [11.99]

7.87 [19.99] 2.96 REF [7.52]

3.54 [9.0]

�NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.

7.40[18.79]

9.06 [23.01]

3.54 [9.0]

.18 DIA [0.46] 4 X

��

��%&��'

�/9:2;<2��

M-3921

Figure 7 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler Mounting Dimensions

800-3425A-SP-00 12/03

© 2001 Beckwith Electric Co.Printed in U.S.A. (#01-67) (04.25.03)

��

��

��

�

��

��

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.

PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121E-MAIL [email protected] PAGE www.beckwithelectric.com

WARNINGDANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or seriousinjury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internalvoltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-nal terminals.

DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE

– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and youmust never touch it.

PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONSThe following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application, test or repair of thisequipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Qualifiedpersonnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for thecustomer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation

manual for important information before proceeding.

Always Ground the Equipment

To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servic-ing equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate groundsecurely by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.

Do NOT operate in an explosive environmentDo not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do sowould risk a possible fire or explosion.

Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power isapplied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerousvoltages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnectpower and discharge circuits before working on the unit.

Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance proceduresThe equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury ordeath. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure thatall personnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicingalone.

Do not modify equipmentDo not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a BeckwithElectric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to followreplacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.

PRODUCT CAUTIONSBefore attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiarwith the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If acomponent is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safetyfeatures are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in theParts List of the Instruction Book.

Avoid static chargeThis unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Careshould be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.

Use caution when measuring resistancesAny attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwisenoted in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.

i

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

M-3425A Generator ProtectionInstruction Book

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Instruction Book Contents ................................................................. 1–1

1.2 M-3425A Generator Protection Relay ................................................ 1–2

1.3 Accessories ........................................................................................ 1–3

Chapter 2 Application

2.1 Configuration ...................................................................................... 2–1Profiles ................................................................................................ 2–2Functions ............................................................................................ 2–2Special Considerations ........................................................................ 2–2Relay System Setup .......................................................................... 2–3

2.2 System Diagrams ............................................................................... 2–5

2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings ........................................................... 2–1121 Phase Distance ........................................................................... 2–1224 Overexcitation Volts/Hz .............................................................. 2–1625 Sync Check ................................................................................. 2–1927 Phase Undervoltage .................................................................... 2–2327TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral .................................. 2–2432 Directional Power ........................................................................ 2–2840 Loss of Field ............................................................................... 2–3346 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ................................................. 2–3749 Stator Overload Protection ......................................................... 2–3950/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent,Phase & Neutral Circuits ........ 2–4250BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashover................. 2–4450DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential) ........ 2–4750/27 Inadvertant Energizing ........................................................... 2–4851N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ............................................ 2–5051V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent withVoltage Control/Restraint ................................................................. 2–5159 Phase Overvoltage...................................................................... 2–5359D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential ......................................... 2–5459N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ...................... 2–5659X Multipurpose Overvoltage (Turn-to-Turn Stator Faultor Bus Ground Protection) ............................................................... 2–5760FL VT Fuse Loss ......................................................................... 2–5964B/F Field Ground Protection ........................................................ 2–6264F Field Ground Protection ............................................................ 2–6264B Brush Lift-Off Detection ........................................................... 2–6464S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low FrequencySignal Injection ................................................................................. 2–65

ii

M-3425A Instruction Book

Chapter 2 Application (cont'd)

67N Residual Directional Overcurrent ............................................. 2–6878 Out of Step .................................................................................. 2–7081 Frequency .................................................................................... 2–7381A Frequency Accumulators ............................................................2–7581R Rate of Change of Frequency ......................................................2–7787 Phase Differential ..........................................................................2–7887GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential .........................................2–80Breaker Monitoring..............................................................................2–81Trip Circuit Monitoring .........................................................................2–82IPSlogic ..............................................................................................2–83

Chapter 3 Operation

3.1 Front Panel Controls ............................................................................ 3–1Alphanumeric Display .......................................................................... 3–1Screen Blanking .................................................................................. 3–1Arrow Pushbuttons .............................................................................. 3–1Exit Pushbutton ................................................................................... 3–1Enter Pushbutton ................................................................................. 3–1Target & Status Indicators and Controls .............................................. 3–1Power Supply #1 (#2) LED ................................................................... 3–2Relay OK LED ..................................................................................... 3–2Oscillograph Recorded LED ................................................................. 3–2Breaker Closed LED ............................................................................ 3–2Target Indicators and Target Reset ..................................................... 3–2Time Sync LED ................................................................................... 3–2Diagnostic LED .................................................................................... 3–2Accessing Screens ............................................................................. 3–2Default Message Screens .................................................................. 3–2

3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ........................................................ 3–5

3.3 Setup Unit Data ................................................................................... 3–5Setup Unit Data Entry .......................................................................... 3–5Setup Unit Features That Do Not Require Data Entry .......................... 3–6

3.4 Setup System Data ............................................................................. 3–6Configure Relay Data ........................................................................... 3–7Setpoints and Time Settings ............................................................... 3–7Oscillograph Recorder Data ................................................................. 3–8Communications Settings .................................................................... 3–8

3.5 Status/Metering ................................................................................... 3–9

3.6 Target History .....................................................................................3–10

iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 4 Remote Operation

4.1 Remote Operation............................................................................... 4–1Serial Ports (RS-232) ......................................................................... 4–1Serial Port (RS-485) ............................................................................. 4–1Optional Ethernet Port ......................................................................... 4–1Direct Connection ................................................................................ 4–2Setting up the M-3425A Generator ProtectionRelay for Communication ..................................................................... 4–3Serial Communication Settings............................................................ 4–3Ethernet Communication Settings ....................................................... 4–3DHCP Protocol .................................................................................... 4–3Ethernet Protocols ............................................................................... 4–3Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................. 4–4HMI Ethernet Port Setup ..................................................................... 4–4IPSutil™ Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP ............................................ 4–5IPSutil Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP .......................................... 4–5Installing the Modems ........................................................................ 4–7

4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom®) ........................................................ 4–8

4.3 Operation ............................................................................................ 4–8Activating Communications................................................................ 4–8Overview ............................................................................................. 4–9File Menu ............................................................................................ 4–9Comm Menu ....................................................................................... 4–9Relay Menu ....................................................................................... 4–10Window Menu/Help Menu ................................................................. 4–18

4.4 Checkout Status/Metering ................................................................ 4–20

4.5 Cautions ............................................................................................ 4–25

4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts .......................................................................... 4–26

4.7 IPSutil Communications Software ......................................................4–27M-3890 IPSutil ...................................................................................4–27Installation and Setup .........................................................................4–27Installation ..........................................................................................4–28System Setup ....................................................................................4–28Overview.............................................................................................4–28Comm Menu .......................................................................................4–28Relay Comm Command ......................................................................4–28Ethernet Command .............................................................................4–28Clock Command .................................................................................4–28Security Menu ....................................................................................4–29Miscellaneous Menu ...........................................................................4–29Help Menu ..........................................................................................4–30

Chapter 5 Installation

5.1 General Information ............................................................................ 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions ...................................................... 5–1

5.3 External Connections ......................................................................... 5–6

5.4 Commissioning Checkout ................................................................ 5–12

5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers .............................................. 5–17

iv


Chapter 6 Testing

6.1 Equipment/Test Setup ........................................................................ 6–2

6.2 Functional Test Procedures ............................................................... 6–6Power On Self Tests ......................................................................... 6–721 Phase Distance .............................................................................. 6–824 Volts per Hertz, Definite Time......................................................... 6–924 Volts per Hertz, Inverse Time ........................................................6–1025D Dead Check ................................................................................6–1225S Sync Check ................................................................................6–1427 Phase Undervoltage.......................................................................6–1627TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral .......................................6–1732 Directional Power, 3-Phase............................................................6–2140 Loss of Field ..................................................................................6–2446 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time ..............................6–2646 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time ..............................6–2749 Stator Overload Protection ......................................................... 6–2850 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent .............................................. 6–3050BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure .......................................................... 6–3150/27 Inadvertant Energizing ........................................................... 6–3350DT Definite Time Overcurrent for Split-Phase Differential ......... 6–3450N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent ......................................... 6–3551N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent .......................................... 6–3651V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent withVoltage Control/Restraint ................................................................. 6–3759 RMS Overvoltage, 3-Phase ........................................................ 6–3959D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential ......................................... 6–4059N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ...................... 6–4159X Multipurpose Overvoltage............................................................6–4260FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ............................................................6–4364F Field Ground Protection ...............................................................6–4464B Brush Lift Off Detection...............................................................6–4664S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Injection ...............................6–4767N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time ..........................6–4967N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time ..........................6–5178 Out of Step ....................................................................................6–5381 Frequency ......................................................................................6–5581A Frequency Accumulator ..............................................................6–5681R Rate of Change of Frequency ......................................................6–5787 Phase Differential ..........................................................................6–5987GD Ground Differential ...................................................................6–61BM Breaker Monitoring .......................................................................6–63Trip Circuit Monitoring .........................................................................6–65IPSlogic™ ..........................................................................................6–66

v

Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Testing (cont'd)

6.3 Diagnostic Test Procedures ...............................................................6–67Overview.............................................................................................6–67Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode .........................................................6–67Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–9) ..............................................6–68Output Relay Test (Power Supply Relay 10) ......................................6–69Input Test (Control/Status) .................................................................6–69Status LED Test .................................................................................6–70Target LED Test .................................................................................6–71Expanded Input/Output Test...............................................................6–71Button Test.........................................................................................6–71Display Test .......................................................................................6–72COM1/COM2 Loopback Test ..............................................................6–72COM3 Test (2-wire) ............................................................................6–73Clock ON/OFF ....................................................................................6–74Relay OK LED Flash/Illuminated ........................................................6–75Auto Calibration ..................................................................................6–75Factory Use Only ...............................................................................6–75

6.4 Auto Calibration ..................................................................................6–76Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibration .......................................6–76Third Harmonic Calibration .................................................................6–7764S 100% Stator Ground by Low Frequency Injection Calibration ......6–77Field Ground Calibration .....................................................................6–78

Appendices

Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms .........................................A–1

Appendix B: Communications............................................................B–1

Appendix C: Self-Test Error Codes ...................................................C–1

Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves ....................................................D–1

vi


Figures Page

Chapter 11-1 M-3925A Target Module ..................................................................... 1–3

1-2 M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module............................. 1–4

Chapter 22-1 One-Line Functional Diagram ........................................................... 2–5

2-2 Alternative One-Line Functional Diagram(configured for split-phase differential) .............................................. 2–6

2-3 Three-Line Connection Diagram ......................................................... 2–7

2-4 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram............... 2–8

2-5 Function 59X Turn-to-Turn Fault Protection Three-LineConnection Diagram ........................................................................... 2–9

2-6 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-LineConnection Diagram ......................................................................... 2–10

2-7 Phase Distance (21) Coverage ........................................................ 2–13

2-8 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup ........... 2–14

2-9 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges ............................................ 2–15

2-10 Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24) ......................... 2–17

2-11 Volts-per-Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges .............................................. 2–18

2-12 Sync Check Logic Diagrams ........................................................... 2–21

2-13 Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges .................................................. 2–22

2-14 Phase Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges ..................................... 2–23

2-15 Third-Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics ... 2–25

2-16 27TN Blocking Regions .................................................................... 2–26

2-17 Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Circuit (27TN)Setpoint Ranges ............................................................................... 2–27

2-18 Tripping on Reverse Power Flow(Over Power with Negative Pickup) ................................................. 2–29

2-19 Tripping on Low Foward Power(Under Power with Positive Pickup) ................................................ 2–30

2-20 Tripping on Overpower (Over Power with Positive Pickup) ........... 2–30

2-21 Tripping on Over Reactive Power with Element #3(Over Power, Positive Pickup and Directional Power SensingSet to Reactive) ............................................................................... 2–31

2-22 Directional Power, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges .......................... 2–32

2-23 Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach 1 ....................................... 2–35

2-24 Loss of Field (40) Protective Approach 2 ....................................... 2–35

vii

Table of Contents

Figures Page

Chapter 2 (cont'd)2-25 Loss of Field (40) Setpoint Ranges ................................................ 2–36

2-26 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves .................. 2–38

2-27 Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges .................. 2–38

2-28 49 Function Overload Curves .......................................................... 2–40

2-29 Stator Thermal Protection (49) Setpoint Ranges ............................ 2–41

2-30 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) Setpoint Ranges ........................... 2–42

2-31 Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50N) Setpoint Ranges ........... 2–43

2-32 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram ........................................................ 2–45

2-33 Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges ........................................ 2–46

2-34 Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges ....................... 2–47

2-35 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram ............................. 2–49

2-36 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges ............................ 2–49

2-37 Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N) Setpoint Ranges ............. 2–50

2-38 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic ......................................... 2–52

2-39 Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/VoltageRestraint (51VC/VR) Setpoint Ranges ............................................ 2–52

2-40 Phase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges ....................................... 2–53

2-41 Third Harmonic Overvoltage Scheme for GeneratorGround-Fault Protection ................................................................... 2–55

2-42 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (59D) Setpoint Ranges .......... 2–55

2-43 Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (59N)Setpoint Ranges ............................................................................... 2–56

2-44 Turn-to-Turn Stator Winding Fault Protection ................................. 2–57

2-45 Multipurpose Overvoltage (59X) Setpoint Ranges .......................... 2–58

2-46 Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic .................................................... 2–60

2-47 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges ................................................. 2–61

2-48 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler .......................................................... 2–62

2-49 Field Ground Protection (64B/F) Setpoint Ranges ......................... 2–63

2-50 64S Function Component Connection Diagram .............................. 2–66

2-51 64S Function Time Delay Pickup Current Correlation .................... 2–66

2-52 100% Stator Ground Protection (64S) Setpoint Ranges ................ 2–67

2-53 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Setpoint Ranges ............... 2–69

2-54 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics ................................................... 2–71

viii


Figures (cont'd) Page

Chapter 2 (cont'd)2-55 Out-of-Step Protection Settings ....................................................... 2–71

2-56 Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges ................................................... 2–72

2-57 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics ............................ 2–74

2-58 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges ..................................................... 2–74

2-59 Frequency Accumulator (81A) Setpoint Ranges ............................. 2–76

2-60 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges ................... 2–77

2-61 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics............................ 2–79

2-62 Phase Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges ......................................... 2–79

2-63 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges .................................. 2–80

2-64 Breaker Monitor (BM) Setpoint Ranges........................................... 2–81

2-65 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input ............................................................ 2–82

2-66 Trip Circuit Monitor (TC) Setpoint Ranges ...................................... 2–82

2-67 IPSlogic™ Function Setup ............................................................... 2–84

2-68 IPSlogic Function Programming .........................................................2–85

2-69 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout ................................2–86

2-70 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup ..................................2–86

Chapter 33-1 M-3425A Front Panel ......................................................................... 3–3

3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow ............................................................. 3–3

3-3 Main Menu Flow ................................................................................. 3–4

Chapter 44-1 Multiple System Addressing Using

Communications Line Splitter ........................................................... 4–2

4-2 IPScom® Menu Selections ................................................................ 4–6

4-3 IPScom Program Icon........................................................................ 4–8

4-4 New Device Profile Dialog Box .......................................................... 4–9

4-5 Communication Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–10

4-6 Setup System Dialog Box ............................................................... 4–11

4-7 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box ............................................................. 4–12

4-8 Typical Setpoint Dialog Box ............................................................ 4–12

4-9 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box (Partial) ......................................... 4–13

4-10 Configure Dialog Box (Partial) ......................................................... 4–14

ix

Table of Contents


Chapter 4 (cont'd)4-11 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–15

4-12 Target Dialog Box............................................................................. 4–16

4-13 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ........................................................... 4–17

4-14 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog ............................................... 4–17

4-15 Profile Switching Method Dialog ...................................................... 4–17

4-16 Select Active Profile ........................................................................ 4–18

4-17 Copy Active Profile .......................................................................... 4–18

4-18 About IPScom® Dialog Box ............................................................. 4–19

4-19 Primary Status Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–20

4-20 Secondary Status Dialog Box.......................................................... 4–20

4-21 Accumulator Status Screen ............................................................. 4–21

4–22 Phase Distance Dialog Box ............................................................. 4–21

4-23 Loss of Field Dialog Box ................................................................. 4–22

4-24 Out of Step Dialog Box ................................................................... 4–22

4-25 Phasor Dialog Box ........................................................................... 4–23

4-26 Sync Scope Screen ......................................................................... 4–23

4-27 Function Status Screen ................................................................... 4–24

4-28 IPSutil™ Main Menu Flow ............................................................... 4–27

4-29 Warning Message ............................................................................. 4–28

4-30 IPSutility Reset Relay Message ..................................................... 4–28

4-31 Monitor Status Screen ..................................................................... 4–29

4-32 Calibration Dialog Box ...................................................................... 4–29

4-33 Communication Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–30

4-34 Relay Comm Port Settings .............................................................. 4–30

4-35 Ethernet Settings .............................................................................. 4–30

4-36 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box .............................................................. 4–30

4-37 Change Communication Access Code Dialog Box ......................... 4–31

4-38 Change User Access Code Dialog Box .......................................... 4–31

4-39 Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................4–31

x



Chapter 55-1 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions – Horizontal Chassis ..................... 5–2

5-2 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions – Vertical Chassis ........................ 5–3

5-3 (H2) Mounting Dimensions ................................................................. 5–4

5-4 (H3) Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet ................................ 5–5

5-5 External Connections ......................................................................... 5–7

5-6 Three-Line Connection Diagram ......................................................... 5–8

5-7 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram............... 5–9

5-8 Function 59X Turn-to-Turn Fault Protection Three-LineConnection Diagram ......................................................................... 5–10

5-9 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground), Three-LineConnection Diagram ......................................................................... 5–11

5-10 M-3425A Circuit Board ..................................................................... 5–19

Chapter 66-1 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1 ......................................................... 6–3

6-2 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2 ......................................................... 6–3

6-3 Current Inputs: Configuration C1 .......................................................... 6–4

6-4 Current Inputs: Configuration C2 .......................................................... 6–4

6-5 Current Configuration C3 ...................................................................... 6–5

6-6 64S Test Configuration ........................................................................ 6–5

6-7 Field Ground Coupler ..........................................................................6–45

6-8 Status LED Panel ...............................................................................6–70

6-9 M-3925A Target Module Panel.............................................................6–71

6-10 M-3931 Human/Machine Interface (HMI) Module ................................6–71

6-11 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug ..............................................................6–72

6-12 RS-485 2-Wire Testing ........................................................................6–74

6-13 Current Input Configuration .................................................................6–79

6-14 Voltage Input Configuration ................................................................6–79

Appendix AA-1 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module ...........................................A–4

A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form .............................A–5

A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form ..............................................A–8

A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form ...................................................... A–20

xi

Table of Contents


Appendix BB-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423................................................................B–2

B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network ..............................................................B–3

B-3 RS-485 Network ................................................................................... B–4

B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal .............................B–4

Appendix DD-1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square) .... D–2

D-2 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Family Curve #2 ...................................D–3

D-3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #3 ................................D–4

D-4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #4 ................................D–5

D-5 Definite Time Overcurrent Curve .......................................................D–8

D-6 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve .......................................................D–9

D-7 Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ............................................ D–10

D-8 Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve .................................... D–11

D-9 IEC Curve #1 – Inverse .................................................................. D–12

D-10 IEC Curve #2 – Very Inverse ......................................................... D–13

D-11 IEC Curve #3 – Extremely Inverse ................................................ D–14

D-12 IEC Curve #4 – Long Time Inverse ............................................... D–15

Tables Page

Chapter 11-1 M-3425A Device Functions ................................................................ 1–2

Chapter 22-1 Input Activated Profile ....................................................................... 2–3

2-2 Impedance Calculation ..................................................................... 2–15

2-3 Voltage Control Time Settings ......................................................... 2–34

2-4 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs ................................ 2–52

2-5 Typical Frequency Settings ............................................................. 2–63

2-6 Typical Brush Lift-Off Settings ........................................................ 2–64

Tables Page

Chapter 33-1 Recorder Partitions .............................................................................. 3–8

Chapter 44-1 Dead-Sync Time .................................................................................. 4–3

4-2 Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts .............................................4–26

Chapter 55-1 Jumpers ............................................................................................ 5–17

5-2 Dip Switch SW-1 .............................................................................. 5–18

5-3 Trip Circuit Monitor Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration .... 5–18

Chapter 66-1 Output Contacts ............................................................................... 6–68

6-2 Input Contacts .................................................................................. 6–69

Appendix AA-1 Relay Configuration Table .................................................................A–2

Appendix BB-1 Communication Port Signals .............................................................B–2

Appendix CC-1 Self-Test Error Codes ........................................................................C–1

C-2 IPScom® Error Messages .................................................................C–2

Appendix D

D-1A M-3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves ...D–6

800-3425A-IB-00 12/03©1998 Beckwith Electric Co.Printed in U.S.A. (9.21.01)

Introduction – 1

1–1

1.1 Instruction Book Contents

This instruction book includes six chapters and fourAppendices.

Chapter 1: IntroductionChapter One summarizes relay capabilities,introduces the instruction book contents, anddescribes accessories.

Chapter 2: ApplicationChapter Two is designed for the person or groupresponsible for the application of the M-3425AGenerator Protection Relay. It includes functionaland connection diagrams for a typical application ofthe relay; and describes the configuration processfor the unit (choosing active functions), outputcontact assignment and input blocking designation.It also illustrates the definition of system quantitiesand equipment characteristics required by theprotective relay, and describes the individual functionsettings.

Chapter 3: OperationChapter Three is designed for the person(s)responsible for the operation, direct setting, andconfiguration of the relay. Chapter Three providesinformation regarding the operation and interpretationof the unit's front panel controls and indicators,including operation of the optional M-3931, HumanMachine Interface (HMI) and M-3925A TargetModules. It further describes the procedures forentering all required data to the relay. Included inthis chapter is a description of the processnecessary for review of setpoints and timing,monitoring function status and metering quantities,viewing the target history, and setup of theoscillograph recorder.

Chapter 4: Remote OperationChapter 4 is designed for the person or groupresponsible for the remote operation and setting ofthe relay using the M-3820D IPScom®

Communications Software or other means.

Chapter 5: InstallationThe person or group responsible for the installationof the relay will find herein all mechanical informationrequired for physical installation, equipment ratings,and all external connections in this chapter. Forreference, the Three-Line Connection Diagram isrepeated from Chapter 2, Application. Further, acommissioning checkout procedure is outlined usingthe HMI option to check the external CT and VTconnections. Additional tests which may be desirableat the time of installation are described in Chapter6, Testing.

Chapter 6: TestingThis chapter provides step-by-step test proceduresfor each function, as well as diagnostic mode andautocalibration procedures for HMI-equipped units.

Appendix A: Configuration Record FormsThis Appendix supplies a set of forms to record anddocument the settings required for the properoperation of the relay.

Appendix B: CommunicationsThis Appendix describes port signals, protocols,and various topologies, and equipment required forremote communication.

11111 IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroduction

1.1 Instruction Book Contents ......................................................... 1–1

1.2 M-3425A Generator Protection Relay ........................................ 1–2

1.3 Accessories ................................................................................ 1–3


1–2

Appendix C: Self-Test Error CodesThis Appendix lists all the error codes and theirdefinitions.

Appendix D: Inverse Time CurvesThis Appendix contains a graph of the four familiesof Inverse Time Curves for V/Hz applications, theInverse Time Overcurrent Curves, and the IECcurves.

1.2 M-3425A GeneratorProtection Relay

The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is amicroprocessor-based unit that uses digital signalprocessing technology to provide up to thirty-fourprotective relaying functions for generator protection.The relay can protect a generator from internalwinding faults, system faults, and other abnormalconditions.

The available internal functions of the relay arelisted in Table 1-1. The nomenclature follows thestandards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2-1991, StandardElectric Power Systems Device Function Numbers.

Six control/status inputs can be programmed toblock any relay function and/or to trigger theoscillograph recorder. Any of the functions or thecontrol/status inputs can be individually programmedto activate any one or more of the eightprogrammable outputs, each with a contact.

With the optional M-3931 HMI Module, all functionscan be set or examined using a local, menu-driven,2 line by 24 character alphanumeric display. Themodule allows local metering of various quantities,including phase, neutral, and sequence voltagesand currents, real and reactive power, power factor,and positive sequence impedance measurements.

The relay stores time-tagged target information forthe thirty-two most recent trips. For units equippedwith the optional M-3925A Target Module, LEDs areused to provide a detailed visual indication offunction operation for the most recent event.

The unit retains up to 472 cycles of oscillographwaveform data. This data can be downloaded andanalyzed using the M-3801D IPSplot® PLUSOscillograph Analysis Software.

The unit is powered from a wide input range switchmode power supply. An optional redundant powersupply is available.

The relay includes self-test, auto calibration, anddiagnostic capabilities, in addition to IRIG-B time-sync capability for accurate time-tagging of events.

NOITCNUF NOITPIRCSED

snoitcnuFevitcetorP

12 ohmenoz-eerht(ecnatsiDesahP

)citsiretcarahc

42 )emiTetinifeD&esrevnI(zH/stloV

72 egatlovrednUesahP

NT72 lartueN,egatlovrednUcinomraHdrihT

23 rewoPlanoitceriD

04 ohm-tesffoenoz-laud(dleiFfossoL

)citsiretcarahc

64 tnerrucrevOecneuqeSevitageN

94 evitisoP(noitcetorPdaolrevOrotatS

)tnerrucrevOecneuqeS

05 tnerrucrevOesahPsuoenatnatsnI

FB05 eruliaFrekaerB

TD05 tnerrucrevOemiTetinifeD

N05 tnerrucrevOlartueNsuoenatnatsnI

72/05 gnizigrenEtnatrevdanI

N15 tnerrucrevOlartueNemiTesrevnI

V15 egatloVhtiw,tnerrucrevOemiTesrevnI

tniartseRrolortnoC

95 egatlovrevOesahP

D95 laitnereffiDegatloVcinomraH-drihT

N95 egatlovrevOlartueN

X95 egatlovrevOesoprup-itluM

LF06 noitceteDssoL-esuFTV

N76 tnerrucrevOlanoitceriDlaudiseR

87 )citsiretcarahcohm(petSfotuO

18 ycneuqerF

A18 noitalumuccAycneuqerF

R18 ycneuqerFfoegnahCfoetaR

78 tnerruClaitnereffiDesahP

DG78 laitnereffiD)ecneuqesorez(dnuorG

SPI cigolSPI

MB rotinoMrekaerB

CT gnirotinoMtiucriCpirT

snoitcnuFevitcetorPlanoitpO

52 kcehCcnyS

B46/F46 /noitcetorPdnuorGdleiF

noitceteDffO-tfiLhsurB

S46 ybnoitcetorPdnuorGrotatS%001

noitcejnI

Table 1-1 M-3425A Device Functions

Introduction – 1

1–3

Communication PortsThere are three physical communication portsprovided on the M-3425A. If the optional RJ45Ethernet port is purchased, then the relay includesfour physical communication ports:

• COM1, located on the relay front panel, isa standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configuredport. COM1 is used to locally set andinterrogate the relay using a portablecomputer.

• COM2, located on the rear of the relay, isa standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configuredport. When the optional RJ45 EthernetPort is enabled, COM2 port is disabled.

The RJ45 Ethernet port uses a 10Base-Ttype connection that accepts an RJ45connector using CAT5 twisted pair cable.The Ethernet port supports MODBUS overTCP/IP, BECO2200 over TCP/IP. The IPaddress can be obtained automaticallywhen using the DHCP protocol if enabled,or a static IP address can be manuallyentered, using the HMI.

• COM3, located on the rear terminal blockof the relay, is an RS-485 communicationsport.

The relay may be remotely set and interrogatedutilizing either a hard-wired RS-232 serial connectionor modem (COM2 when activated as RS-232, orCOM3), or when purchased, the ethernet connection(RJ45 activated).

M-3820D IPScom® Communications SoftwareIPScom is shipped standard with every relay. Thissoftware runs on a PC-compatible computer operatingunder Microsoft Windows® 95 or later. When properlyconnected using either a direct serial connection,modem or ethernet network connection. IPScomcan provide the following functions:

• Setpoint interrogation and modification

• Line status real-time monitoring

• Recorded oscillograph data downloading

1.3 Accessories

M-3925A Target ModuleThe optional target module, shown below, includes 24individually labelled TARGET LEDs to indicateoperation of the functions on the front panel. Eightindividually labelled OUTPUT LEDs will be lit as longas the corresponding output contact is picked up.

��

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2!

��2�

�� -'=

�! �'��2�� " �'��2�� !��-�"�-�� 2 ��"�-�"�2��- ��2��

�� 2��&��

�� '��2��

� ��2��2��

!� ��2��2��

�� %��2��

�-�!��2��

�� 2��2��

�'��2��

�'��2��

��2�-� ��-��

��2�'��2��

��2�� "

�� 2��32��

��2 ��-��'2��-�

��3��+ ��-��-��

�'��2��2�� !

��2��-��2�-��! �-�!�

��2��2��

��2��

Figure 1-1 M-3925A Target Module

M-3933/M-0423 Serial Communication CablesThe M-3933 cable is a 10-foot RS-232 cable for usebetween the relay’s rear panel (COM2) port and amodem. This cable has a DB25 (25-pin) connector(modem) and a DB9 (9-pin) at the relay end.

The M-0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS-232cable for direct connection between a PC and therelay’s front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2port. This cable has a DB9 (9-pin) connector ateach end.


1–4

M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) ModuleThe optional HMI module provides the means tointerrogate the relay and to input settings, accessdata, etc. directly from the front of the relay. Itsoperation is described in detail in Section 3.1, FrontPanel Controls.

��

��

�

�

�

�

Figure 1-2 M-3931 Human-MachineInterface (HMI) Module

M-3801D IPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph AnalysisSoftware PackageThe IPSplot PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Softwareruns in conjunction with the IPScom®

Communications Software on any IBMPC-compatible computer, enabling the plotting,printing, and analysis of waveform data downloadedfrom the M-3425A Generator Protection Relay.

Application – 2

2–1

22222 ApplicationApplicationApplicationApplicationApplication

2.1 Configuration ............................................................................... 2–1

2.2 System Diagrams ....................................................................... 2–5

2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings ................................................... 2–11

2.1 Configuration

Configuration of the relay consists of enabling thefunctions for use in a particular application,designating the output contacts each function willoperate, and which control/status inputs will blockthe function. The choices include eight programmableoutput contacts (OUT1–OUT8) and six control/statusinputs (IN1–IN6), plus a block choice for fuse losslogic operation (see Section 2.3, Setpoint and TimeSettings, 60FL Fuse Loss subsection for details).

The blocking control/status inputs and output contactassignments must be chosen before entering thesettings for the individual functions. Both may berecorded on the Relay Configuration Table inAppendix A, Configuration Record Forms.

Chapter Two is designed for the person or groupresponsible for the application of the M-3425AGenerator Protection Relay. It includes functionaland connection diagrams for a typical application ofthe relay; and describes the configuration processfor the unit (enabling functions), output contactassignment and input blocking designation. It alsoillustrates the definition of system quantities andequipment characteristics required by the protectiverelay, and describes the individual function settings.

Menu screens in the following examples are as theywould appear on units equipped with the M-3931Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module. The samesetting may be entered remotely using M-3820DIPScom® Communications Software (see Chapter4, Remote Operation).


2–2

Control/status input IN1 is preassigned to be the52b breaker status contact. If a multiple breakerscheme is used, the control/status input IN1 mustbe the series combination of the “52b” breakercontacts. Additional user-chosen control/statusinputs may initiate actions such as breaker failure,initiate external fuse loss detection, or trigger theoscillograph recorder.

The relay allows the user to designate up to sixlogic functions which perform similarly to internalrelay functions, using IPSlogicTM. These externalfunctions may be enabled or disabled, and outputcontacts and blocking control/status inputs arechosen the same as for the internal functions. Theexternal functions are described in further detail inSection 2.3, Setpoint and Time Settings, IPSlogicsubsection.

27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE

27#1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1

27#1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 O1

■ NOTE: Uppercase text indicates selection.

This menu designation is required for each relay function. Afterenabling the function, the user is presented with the two followingscreens:

This submenu item assigns the blocking designations (up to six,plus fuse-loss logic) for the enabled function. “OR” logic is used ifmore than one input is selected.

This submenu item assigns the output contacts (up to eight) for theparticular relay function. If no output contacts are assigned, thefunction will not generate any output or targets even though thefunction is enabled.

ProfilesUp to four setpoint profiles may be used. Eachprofile contains a complete set of functionconfiguration and settings. One of the four profilesmay be designated as the Active Profile, which willcontain the settings that the relay will actively use.

The Active Profile may be designated eithermanually, using the HMI interface, or by contactinput (input activated profiles enabled), or by remotecommunication.

A Copy Profile feature is available. This featurecopies an image of the Active Profile to any one ofthe other three profiles. This feature can speed upthe configuration process. Consider, for example, asituation where a breaker will be removed fromservice. Two profiles will be used: an “In Service”profile (Profile 1), and an “Out of Service” profile(Profile 2).

Profile 2 will be identical to the “In Service” profile,with the exception of the overcurrent settings.

Profile 1 is set to be the Active Profile, and allsetpoints entered. An image of Profile 1 will then becopied to Profile 2 with the Copy Active Profilecommand. Profile 2 is then selected as the ActiveProfile, and the overcurrent setpoints modified.

■ NOTE: During profile switching, relay operationis disabled for approximately 1 second.

FunctionsConfiguration of the relay consists of enabling thefunctions for use in a particular application,designating the output contacts each function willoperate, and which control/status inputs will blockthe function. The choices include eight programmableoutput contacts (OUT1–OUT8) and six control/statusinputs (IN1–IN6), plus a block choice for fuse losslogic operation (see Section 2.3, Setpoint and TimeSettings, 60FL Fuse Loss subsection for details.)

Control/status inputs may also initiate actions, suchas Breaker Failure Initiate, Trigger OscillographRecorder, Switch Setpoint Profile, or initiate anIPSlogic function. The control/status inputs andoutput contacts need to be chosen before configuringthe individual functions. Both can be recorded onthe Relay Configuration Table in Appendix A, Forms.

Special ConsiderationsControl/status input IN1 is preassigned to be the52b breaker contact. IN5 and IN6 may be used toselect setpoint profiles.

Outputs 1–6 are form “a” contacts (normally open),and outputs 7 and 8 are form “c” contacts (centertapped “a” and “b” normally closed) contacts. Outputcontacts 1–4 contain special circuitry for high-speedoperation and pick up 4 ms faster than outputs 5–8.Function 87 outputs are recommended to be directedto OUT1 through OUT4 contacts.

Application – 2

2–3

INPUT ACTIVATED PROFILESdisable enable

ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILE________

COPY ACTIVE PROFILETO_PROFILE_1

NOMINAL VOLTAGE________ Volts

NOMINAL CURRENT________ Amps

VT CONFIGURATIONline-line line-ground

line-gnd_to_line-line

DELTA-Y TRANSFORMdis delta_ab delta_ac

PHASE ROTATIONa-c-b a-b-c

Relay System SetupThe system setup consists of defining all pertinentinformation regarding the system quantities. Setupscreens shown here may be accessed through theSYSTEM SETUP menu. Regardless of the functionsthat are enabled or disabled, all System Setup

values are required to be input. Several functionsrequire proper setting of these values for correctoperation. The Nominal Voltage and Nominal Currentsettings are needed for proper normalization of perunit quantities. CT and VT ratios are used only inmonitoring and displaying system primary quantities.

When Input Activated Profiles is disabled, the Active Profile can beselected using HMI or remote communication. When enabled, theActive Profile is selected by the state of Input 5 and 6 (see Table 2-1).

This screen sets the active setpoint profile.

This screen initiates a copy of the Active Profile to any one of theother profiles.

The secondary VT voltage when primary voltage is equal to therated generator voltage. Vnominal=( V gen rated VT ratio) for L-L,L-G to L-L. Vnominal=(Vgen rated (S3VTratio)) for L-G

The secondary CT current of the phase CT’s with rated generatorcurrent. I nom = (VA Vgen rated(S3) )(CT ratio)

Indicates VT connection. (See Figure 2-3, Three-Line ConnectionDiagram.) When line-ground voltages are used, functions 24, 27,and 59 may operate for line-ground faults. If this is not desired, theline-gnd-to-line-line selection should be used to prevent operationof these functions for line-ground faults.When line-gnd-to-line-lineis selected, the relay internally calculates line-line voltages fromline-ground voltages for all voltage-sensitive functions. This line-gnd-to-line-line selection should be used only for a VT line-to-groundnominal secondary voltage of 69V (not for 120 V). For this selection,the nominal voltage setting entered should be line-line nominal voltage,which is S3 times line-ground nominal voltage, and pickup setpointcalculation should be made using line-to-line voltage.

When the generator is connected through a Delta-Y (delta ab or deltaac) unit transformer, the relay will internally consider the 30° phaseshift for 51V and 21 functions.

This screen allows the user to select the phase rotation of the M-3425Ato match the generator.

5tupnI 6tupnI noitceleS

nepO nepO 1eliforP

desolC nepO 2eliforP

nepO desolC 3eliforP

desolC desolC 4eliforP

Table 2-1 Input Activated Profile


2–4

59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECTrms dft

50DT SPLIT-PHASE DIFFdisable enable

PULSE RELAYo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

LATCHED OUTPUTSo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1________ Cycles

ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/closeI6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

V.T. PHASE RATIO________ : 1

V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO________ :1

V.T. VX RATIO________ :1

C.T. PHASE RATIO________ : 1

C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO________ : 1

This screen allows the selection of RMS or DFT for the 59 and 27functions. The magnitude can be selected as the RMS of the totalwaveform (including harmonics) or the RMS of the 60/50 Hz fundamentalcomponent of the waveform using the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT).When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurateover a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz) and the accuracy of the timedelay is +20 cycles. When the DFT option is selected, the magnitudecalculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz and the timer accuracy is 1cycle. When a wider frequency response is needed, select RMS. Forgenerator protection applications, it is recommended to use the RMSselection. RMS is the default when shipped from the factory. For 59function when positive sequence voltage is selected, the calculation usesDFT irrespective of DFT/RMS selection.

If the 50DT function is to be used for split-phase differential protection,this selection should be enabled. If the 50DT function is to be used as adefinite time overcurrent function, or if 50DT is not enabled, this selectionshould be disabled.

If pulse relay operation is selected, output will dropout after the seal-indelay expires, even if the condition which caused the relay to pick up isstill out of band. When selected, latching outputs are not available.

If any of the outputs are selected as latched, then after tripping, thisoutput will stay activated, even when the tripping condition is removed.The Latched Output can be reset using the TARGET RESET pushbutton.When selected, Pulse Relay is not available.

Minimum time the output contact will remain picked up to ensure properseal-in, regardless of the subsequent state of the initiating function. Indi-vidual Seal-In settings are available for all outputs.

This designates the “active” state for the individual status input. Program-ming uppercase (see I6) causes the “active” or “operated” condition to beinitiated by the external contact opening. Otherwise, external contact clo-sure will activate the input.

Ratio of the phase VTs.

Ratio of the neutral VT.

Ratio of auxiliary VT.

Ratio of phase CTs.

Ratio of neutral CT.

Application – 2

2–5

2.2 System Diagrams

50DT

Utility System

52Unit

52Gen

50BFPh

87

492132 504078 60FL 51V 50/27

27

81R 81 27 59 24

64F 64B

M-3921+

-

CT

VT

M-3425A

87GD 50N50

BFN 51N

R

64S27TN

27

32R


Low-impedance Grounding with Ground Differentialand Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection




M-3425A TypicalConnection Diagram

25

59D

VT (Note 1)

Targets(Optional)


Metering

Waveform Capture

IRIG-B



Programmable I/O

Self Diagnostics


Rear Ethernet Port (Optional)


BreakerMonitoring


67N67N Polarization(Software Select)

81A

50N50BFN 51N

46

59X

59N

3VO (Calculated)VX

VN

3IO

IN

67N Operating Current(Software Select)

VT (Note 1)

(Note 4)

(Note 3)

CT (Residual)Note 5


(Software Select)

VX3VO (Calculated)

CT (Neutral)Notes 2 & 5

CTM

(Metering)

M

(Metering)


Event Log

■ NOTES:1. When 25 function is enabled, 59D with V

X and 67N with V


2. When 67N function with IN (Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD is not available, and vice

versa.

3. The 50BFN, 50N, and 51N may utilize either the neutral current or the residual current.


5. The current input IN can be either from neutral current or residual current.




Figure 2-1 One-Line Functional Diagram


2–6

Utility System

52Unit

52Gen

81R 81 59 27 24

M-3921+

-

VT

CT

M-3425A

50N 51N

R

CT

27

32R


Low-impedance Grounding withOvercurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection




M-3425A TypicalConnection Diagram(Configured for Split-Phase Differential)

25

59D

50DT

67N

Targets(Optional)


Metering

Waveform Capture

IRIG-B



Programmable I/O

Self Diagnostics


Rear EthernetPort (Optional)


BreakerMonitoring


27TN

81A

46492132 504078 60FL 51V 50/27

2764F 64B

59X

64S 59N

CT (Residual)Note 5

VT (Note 1)

VT (Note 1)

67N Polarization(Software Select)

3VO (Calculated)

VX

VN

(Note 2)

CT (Note 3)

(Note 4)


(Software Select)

VX 3VO (Calculated)

CT (Neutral)Note 5

M

(Metering)

M

(Metering)


Event Log

■ NOTES:

1. When 25 function is enabled, 59, 59D with VX and 67N with V



3. CTs are connected as split-phase differential current.

4. 67N operating current can only be selected to IN(Residual) for this configuration.

5. The current input (IN) can be either from neutral current or residual current.




Figure 2-2 Alternative One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for split-phase differential)

Application – 2

2–7

52Gen

A B C

Generator

58 59

56 57

54 55

OtherRelays

R45 44

M-3425A

M-3425A

WARNING: ONLY dry contact inputs must beconnected because these contact inputs areinternally wetted. Application of externalvoltage on these inputs may result indamage to the units.NOTE: M-3425A current terminal polarity marks( . ) indicate "entering" current direction whenprimary current is "from" the generator to thesystem. If CT connections differ from thoseshown, adjust input terminals.

M-3921Field Ground

Coupler Module

10

11

52b

M-3425A

43 41 3942 40 38

M-3425A

Two Vt Open-DeltaConnection

43 41 3942 40 38

M-3425A

Three VT Wye-WyeConnection

434139 424038

M-3425A

Three VT Wye-WyeAlternate Connection

A

B

C

A

B

C

55 54

57 56

59 58

M-3425A

55 54

57 56

59 58

M-3425AOtherRelays

OtherRelays

a b c

a b c a b c

OR OR

High Impedance Grounding

52 53

M-3425A

R Low Impedance Grounding

OR

50 51

48 49

46 47

M-3425AOtherRelays

1

1

1

A B C

Example of Control/Output Connections

M-3425A

PowerSupply

52G

+

-

TRIPALARM

SELF-TEST

FAILUREALARM

POWEROK

STATUSALARM

VTFUSELOSS

EXTERNALINPUTS

ALARMOUTPUTS

CONTROLOUTPUTS

TRIPOUTPUT

BREAKERFAILUREINITIATE

52Ga

5

3 336

OSCILLOGRAPHRECORDER

INITIATE

60FL52b

2

60 6261 63 11 10

4

+

-

DC: 24V 48V

ORDC: 110V 125V 220V 250VAC: 110V 120V 230V 240V

16

15

12

13

4

5

6

Alarm output can be grouped to a single alarmat the discretion of user.Available control output to service other relaysfor VT Fuse Loss can be designated.Input contact number is designated by user.

2

3

1 Wire to split phase differential CTs foruse with 50DT split phase function.Required generator breaker status input(52b). Contact is closed when generatorbreaker is open. Use unit breakercontact if no generator breaker present.Output contact pairs designated byuser.

Figure 2-3 Three-Line Connection Diagram


2–8

52Gen

A B C

Generator

10

11

52b

M-3425A

VX

43

41

39

42

40

38

M-3425A


A B C

V1

OR

VX

64

65

M-3425A

64

65

M-3425A

VX

Two VT Open-DeltaConnection

43

41

39

42

40

38

M-3425A

OR

A B C

Used when GeneratorSide VTs are connected

Line-Ground.

Used when Generator Side VTsare connected Line-Line

Figure 2-4 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram

Application – 2

2–9

52Gen

A B C

Generator

10

11

52b

M-3425A

a b c

52 53

M-3425A


65

64

M-3425A

A B C

Line to NeutralVoltage Rated

Cable

R

R45 44

M-3425A


OR

■ NOTE: When 59X is connected for turn-to-turn fault protection, 25 function is not available.

Figure 2-5 Function 59X Turn to Turn Fault Protection Three-Line Connection Diagram


2–10

52Gen

A B C

Generator

10

11

52b

M-3425A

a b c

52 53

M-3425A


A

B

C

I N input can be connectedeither at Neutral or as Residual.

I N input can be connectedeither at Neutral or as Residual.

OR

R45 44

M-3425A


65 64

M-3425A

R

59XBus Ground

65

64

M-3425A

A B C

R

67N, 59DConnection

53

52

M-3425A

67NConnection

Residual CT

Bus Section

■ NOTE: When 59X is connected for bus ground protection, 25 function is not available.

Figure 2-6 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-Line Connection Diagram

Application – 2

2–11

2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings

The individual protective functions, along with their magnitude and timing settings are described in thefollowing pages. Settings for disabled functions do not apply. Some menu and setting screens do not appearfor functions that are disabled or not purchased. Menu screens in the following examples are as they wouldappear on units equipped with the M-3931 HMI Module. The same setting may be entered using M-3820DIPScom® Communications Software.

21 Phase Distance (three-zone mho characteristic) ........................................2–12

24 Overexcitation Volts/Hz..............................................................................2–16

25 Sync Check ................................................................................................2–19

27 Phase Undervoltage ................................................................................. 2–23

27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral ....................................................2–24

32 Directional Power ...................................................................................... 2–28

40 Loss of Field (dual-zone offset-mho characteristic) .................................. 2–33

46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ............................................................... 2–37

49 Stator Overload Protection .........................................................................2–39

50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase and Neutral Circuits ......................2–42

50BF Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashover ...................................................2–44

50DT Definite Time Overcurrent ......................................................................2–47

50/27 Inadvertent Energizing ...........................................................................2–48

51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ............................................................2–50

51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrentwith Voltage Control/Restraint .........................................................................2–51

59 Phase Overvoltage ................................................................................... 2–53

59D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential ..........................................................2–54

59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence ...................................... 2–56

59X Multipurpose Overvoltage(stator turn-to-turn fault or bus ground protection) ............................................2–57

60FL VT Fuse Loss .........................................................................................2–59

64B/F Field Ground Protection ........................................................................2–62

64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Injection ............................................2–65

67N Residual Directional Overcurrent ..............................................................2–67

78 Out of Step .................................................................................................2–70

81 Frequency ................................................................................................ 2–73

81A Frequency Accumulator ...........................................................................2–75

81R Rate of Change of Frequency ...................................................................2–77

87 Phase Differential .......................................................................................2–78

87GD Ground (zero sequence) Differential .................................................... 2–80

Breaker Monitoring ..........................................................................................2–81

Trip Circuit Monitoring ......................................................................................2–82

IPSlogic ......................................................................................................... 2–83


2–12

21 Phase DistanceThe Phase Distance function (21) is designed forsystem phase fault backup protection and isimplemented as a three-zone mho characteristic.

Three separate distance elements are used to detectAB, BC, and CA fault types. The ranges andincrements are shown in Figure 2-9. The diameter,offset, system impedance angle (relay characteristicangle), and definite time delay need to be selectedfor each zone for coordination with the systemrelaying in the specific application.

Zone 1 and Zone 2 are used for backup protectionfor unit transformer and transmission faults. Zone 3in conjunction with Zone 2 can be used to detect anOut of Step condition and it can be programmed toblock Function 21 #1 and/or 21 #2.

If Zone 1 is not set to see the transmission system,Zone 1 blocking is not recommended for out-of-step conditions.

When Zone 3 is used for Out-of-step blocking, theout of step delay is used for the detection of thetransit time of the swing between Zone 3 and Zone2 impedances.

The load encroachment blinder function can be setwith a reach and an angle as shown in Figure 2-8.When enabled, this feature will block the 21 Functionfrom misoperating during high load conditions.

21 #1 DIAMETER________ Ohms

21 #1 OFFSET________ Ohms

21 #1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees

21#1 LOAD ENCROACHMENTdisable ENABLE

21 #1 LOAD ENCR ANGLE________ Degrees

21 #1 LOAD ENCR R REACH________ Ohms

When the generator is connected to the systemthrough a delta/wye transformer, proper voltagesand currents (equivalent to the high side of thetransformer) must be used in order for the relay tosee correct impedances for system faults. Byenabling the Delta-Y Transform feature (see Section2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup), the relaycan internally consider the 30° phase shift (30° leaddelta-ab or 30° lag delta-ac) through the delta/wyetransformer, saving auxiliary VTs. Impedancecalculations for various VT connections are shownin Table 2-2. All impedance settings are secondaryrelay quantities and can be derived from the followingformula:Z

SEC = Z

PRI x (R

C ÷ R

V)

where ZSEC

= secondary reflected impedance, ZPRI

= primary impedance, RC = current transformer

ratio, and RV = voltage transformer ratio.

The minimum current sensitivity depends on theprogrammed reach (diameter and offset). If thecurrent is below the minimum sensitivity current,the impedance calculated will saturate, and not beaccurate. This will not cause any relay misoperation.

An overcurrent supervision feature can be enabled,which will block the 21 function when all threephase currents are below the pickup value.

Typically the first zone of protection is set to an impedance valueenough in excess of the first external protective section (typicallythe unit transformer) to assure operation for faults within thatprotective zone. (See Figure 2-7, Phase Distance (21) Coverage.)

A negative or positive offset can be specified to offset the mhocircle from the origin. This offset is usually set at zero. (See Figure2-8, Phase Distance (21) Function Applied For System Backup.)

The impedance angle should be set as closely as possible to theactual impedance angle of the zone being protected.

When enabled the 21 Function is blocked when the impedance fallswithin the zone but above the R Reach and below the Load En-croachment angle during normal load.

■ NOTE: The 21 #2 and #3 zone settings can be set for an additionalexternal section of protection on the system (typicallytransmission Zone 1 distance relays) plus adequateoverreach. #2 and #3 screens are identical to those in #1.Element #3 also includes out-of-step time delay when out-of-step blocking is enabled for Zone #1 and/or Zone #2.

Application – 2

2–13

21 #1 OC SUPERVISIONdisable enable

21 #1 OC SUPERVISION________ Amps

21 #1 OUT OF STEP BLOCKdisable enable

21 #1 DELAY________ Cycles

�

��

��

:��(*�(��,��@(�E��(��

�

�

�

�

� ��

:��(*�(��,��@(�E��(��

:��(*�(��,��@(�E��(��

��

�6>

��

Figure 2-7 Phase Distance (21) Coverage

■ NOTE: The reach settings of the distance elements (21) should not include generator impedance sincethe distance measurement starts at the VT location. However, since the neutral side CTs areused for this function, backup protection for generator Phase-to-Phase faults is also provided

When enabled the 21 Function is blocked on the detection of an outof step condition.

When enabled, the overcurrent supervision blocks the 21 Functionwhen all three phase currents are below the pickup.

The time delays are set to coordinate with the primary protection ofthose overreached zones and, when applicable, with the breakerfailure schemes associated with those protective zones.


2–14

��

�

��

�

�

�

��

�

��*�(��(�(��

��(�

��(

E� ��

E� ��

E� ��

��*�

��*�

R1 Zone 1 Load Encroachment Blinder R Reach

R2 Zone 2 Load Encroachment Blinder R Reach

δ1 Zone 1 Load Encroachment Blinder Angle

δ2 Zone 2 Load Encroachment Blinder Angle

Θ Impedance Angle Setting

Figure 2-8 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup

Application – 2

2–15

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��(

��*(�

��:��

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*�(��(�(��

��(��

��(��*(��@�(�

��*�%��@�(�

&%��

'�&&%&��

&�

��

�&&%&��

�&&%&��

(&�

(&�

��*��,�,(�*��

�(��)�

��(�*��(��*�

&%��

��)*�(

&%��

�&&��

��!&��)*�(�

�&��

��(��*��+�( ��(��*��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*�(��(�(��

��(��

��(��*(��@�(�

��*�%��@�(�

&%��

'�&&%&��

&�

��

�&&%&��

�&&%&��

(&�

(&�

��*��,�,(�*��

�(��)�

��(�*��(��*�

&%��

��)*�(

&%��

�&&��

��!&��)*�(�

�&��

��(��*��+�( ��(��*��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*�(��(�(��

��(��

��(��*(��@�(�

��*�%��@�(�

&%��

'�&&%&��

&�

��

�&&%&��

�&&%&��

(&�

(&�

��*��,�,(�*��

�(��)�

��(�*��(��*�

&%��

��)*�(

&%��

�&&��

��!&��)*�(�

�&��

��(��(��)�

��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

��+�(

��)*�( ��!&��)*�(�

Figure 2-9 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Table 2-2 Impedance Calculation


2–16

24 Overexcitation Volts/HzThe Volts-Per-Hertz function (24) providesoverexcitation protection for the generator and unit-connected transformers. This function incorporatestwo definite time elements which can be used torealize traditional two-step overexcitation protection.In addition, the relay includes an inverse timeelement that provides superior protection by closelyapproximating the combined generator/unittransformer overexcitation curve. Industry standardinverse time curves may be selected along with alinear reset rate which may be programmed tomatch specific machine cooling characteristics.The percent pickup is based on the Nominal Voltagesetting and the nominal frequency. The V/Hz functionprovides reliable measurements of V/Hz up to 200%for a frequency range of 2–80 Hz. The ranges andincrements are presented in Figure 2-11.

Setting this relay function involves determining thedesired protection levels and operating times. Thefirst step is to plot the combined generator andassociated unit transformer overexcitation capabilitylimits. This data is typically available from themanufacturer and should be plotted on the samevoltage base. Depending on the resultingcharacteristic, one of the four families of inversetime curves (as shown in Appendix D, InverseTime Curves) can be matched to provide theprotection. The two definite time elements can beused to further shape the protection curve or providean alarm.

24DT #1 PICKUP________ %

24DT #1 DELAY________ Cycles

24DT #2 PICKUP________ %


24IT PICKUP________ %

24IT CURVEcrv#1 crv#2 crv#3 crv#4

24IT TIME DIAL________

24IT RESET RATE________ Seconds

Definite time setpoint #1 establishes the V/Hz level above which theprotection operating time will be fixed at the definite time delay #1.

Delay time #1 establishes the operation time of the protection for allV/Hz values above the level set by definite time setpoint #1.

Definite time setpoint #2 could be programmed to alarm, alerting theoperator to take proper control action to possibly avoid tripping.

Time to operation at any V/Hz value exceeding Definite time setting#2.

The pickup value is the V/Hz value at which the chosen inversecurve begins protective operation. Typical value is 105%.

Allows the user to designate the appropriate curve family for thisprotection application. These curves are shown in Appendix D, InverseTime Curves.

The appropriate curve in the family is designated by the associated“K” value of the curve.

The value entered here should be the time needed for the unit tocool to normal operating temperature if the V/Hz excursion timewas just under the trip time.

Application – 2

2–17

Figure 2-10 illustrates a composite graph of generatorand transformer limits, a chosen inverse time curveand pickup, and a definite time pickup and delay.

■ NOTE: When the inverse time element isenabled, the definite time element #1must be enabled which will providedefinite time minimum time settingfor the inverse time curve.

The following steps must be followed when settingthe inverse time element and definite time element#1:

1. The pickup of the inverse time elementmust be less than the pickup of thedefinite time element #1

2. The operating time of the inverse timeelement at the definite time element #1pickup should be greater than the definitetime element #1 time delay setting(A2>A1 in Figure 2-10).

3. When the inverse time element isenabled, definite time element #1 shouldnot be used for alarm and only definitetime element #2 can be used.

After any V/Hz excursion, cooling time must alsobe taken into account. If the unit should again besubjected to high V/Hz before it has cooled tonormal operating levels, damage could be causedbefore the V/Hz trip point is reached. For thisreason, a linear reset characteristic, adjustable totake into account the cooling rate of the unit, isprovided. If a subsequent V/Hz excursion occursbefore the reset characteristic has timed out, thetime delay will pick up from the equivalent point (asa %) on the curve. The Reset Rate setting enteredshould be time needed for the unit to cool to normaloperating temperature if the V/Hz excursion timewas just under the trip point.

:(�*(��@(�*��A��

�&& �&" ��& ��" ��& ��" ��& ��" �#& �#" �"&

&%&�

&%�

�

�&

�&&

�&&&

��

(��

�!��

(�

��(��(��(�:�*��

�(�(��(

��(��(��(�(��(

��(��(��>��(��(3�J�"

��+��(��:��(*��(

�(��(��(�:�*��

�(��(��(��(��)��

��

��(��(��(��(��)��(��(��(�:�*��I��

Figure 2-10 Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24)


2–18

:�*��

�(��)�

�(%��(�I�

:�*��

�(��)�

�&&K

�&��)*�(�

�&&K

��!&��)*�(�

�(%��(�I�

��%��(:�*��

��(��

,(�(��,��(�

�&&K �&&K

��(� I� I� I� I#

�

��(*

�&&

(((��(*�

��(

��*(�

��#��'�*��A�E

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�&&K

�&��)*�(�

�&&K

��!&��)*�(�

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

Figure 2-11 Volts-per-Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–19

25 Sync Check■ NOTE: The 25 function cannot be enabled under

any one of the following conditions:• 67N (Residual Directional Overcurrent)

is enabled and the polarizing quantityhas been set to V

X.

• 59D is enabled and the line side voltageis set to V

X.

• 59X is connected for turn-to-turn faultprotection or bus ground protection.

The Synchronism (Sync) Check function (25) isused to ensure that the voltage magnitude, phaseangle and frequency of the generator (V1) and theutility system (V

X) are within acceptable limits before

the generator is synchronized with the system.Generator voltage (V1) can be selected as A, B, orC (line-to-ground and line-ground to line-line) or AB,BC, or CA (line-to-line).

The sync check function includes phase angle,delta frequency, and delta voltage checks.

Phase Angle CheckThe phase angle is considered acceptable whenthe selected sync phase voltage (V1) and systemvoltage (V

X) are within the Upper Volt Limit and

Lower Volt Limit window and the measured phaseangle is within the phase angle window.

Phase angle window is defined as twice the PhaseAngle Limit setting. For example, if the PhaseAngle Limit is set at 10 degrees, a phase anglewindow of 20 degrees exists between –10 degreesand +10 degrees. The logic diagram of the phaseangle check is shown in Figure 2-12.

Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency CheckDelta Voltage and Delta Frequency elements maybe individually enabled or disabled, as desired. TheDelta Voltage check will compare the absolutedifference between the selected sync phase voltage(V1) and the measured system voltage (V

X) with

the Delta Voltage Limit setting. Likewise, the DeltaFrequency measures the frequency differencebetween V1 and V

X voltage signals. The Phase

Angle Check, Delta Voltage and Delta FrequencyCheck all combine through an appropriate timerwith the output directed to the programmed 25Soutput contact. A logic diagram representing thislogic is presented in Figure 2-12.

Dead Line/Dead Bus CheckThe Dead Volt Limit defines the Hot/Dead voltagelevel used in Deadline/Dead Bus closing schemes.When the measured V

X voltage is equal to or below

the Dead Volt Limit, VX is considered dead. When

the measured VX is above the Dead Volt Limit, V

Xis considered hot. The opposite side of the breakeruses the positive sequence voltage measurement(V1) for 3-phase consideration in determining hot/dead detection. Different combinations of hot line/dead bus closings may be selected, depending onhow the buses are referenced. A logic diagram ofthe Deadline/Dead Bus scheme is presented inFigure 2-12.

The Dead V1, Dead VX, and Dead V1 & V

X enable

are software switches used to enable the deadline/dead bus logic. Further conditioning can beperformed on the dead detection logic by selectingone or more input contacts (Dead Input Enable) tocontrol the enabled dead detection element. Forexample, if INPUT2 (I2) is selected under theDead Input Enable screen, and both the Dead V1and Dead V

X elements are enabled, the dead check

timer will start when INPUT2 is activated, andeither V1 dead/V

X hot or V1 hot/V

X dead. This

allows for external control of the desired deadclosing scheme. Dead Input Enable selections arecommon to all dead detection elements. If noinputs are selected under the Dead Input Enablescreen, and any dead element is enabled, thedead check timer will start immediately when thedead condition exists.

The 25S and 25D can be programmed to be sent totwo different contacts, if desired.


2–20

25S PHASE LIMIT________ Degrees

25S UPPER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25S LOWER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25S SYNC CHECK DELAY________ Cycles

25S DELTA VOLTdisable ENABLE

25S DELTA VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25S DELTA FREQdisable ENABLE

25S DELTA FREQ LIMIT________ Hz

25S SYNC-CHECK PHASEa b c

25D DEAD VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25D DEAD V1 HOT VXdisable ENABLE

25D DEAD VX HOT V1disable ENABLE

25D DEAD V1 & VXDISABLE enable

25D DEAD INPUT ENABLEi6 i5 i4 I3 i2 i1

25D DEAD DELAY________ Cycles

If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable:

Phase angle setting.

Upper voltage limit for voltage acceptance.

Lower voltage limit for voltage acceptance.

Sync check time delay.

Delta voltage element.

Delta voltage setting.

Delta frequency element.

Delta frequency setting.

Selects the phase voltage on the generator side for Sync Check func-tions (A, B, or C for line-to-ground and line-ground to line-line, and AB,BC, CA for line-to-line)

Voltage less than this setting is defined as “DEAD”; above this settingas “HOT”.

Enables Dead V1/Hot VX setting.

Enables Hot V1/Dead VX setting.

Enables Dead V1/Dead VX closing.

Externally controlled dead closing.

Dead delay timer setting.

Application – 2

2–21

Phase Angle Check Logic

Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Logic

Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Input Initiate Logic

Dead Input Enable

AND

ORAND

ANDAND

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

OR

AND

AND AND

AND

AND

|V1 - V X| < Delta V Limit

Delta V Is Enabled

Delta F Is Enabled

V1 Lower Voltage Limit>

V1 Upper Voltage Limit<

VX Lower Voltage Limit>

VX Upper Voltage Limit<

Phase Angle Phase Limit<

|F1 - F X | < Delta F Limit

Phase Angle OK

AND

AND

|V1- VX| < Delta V Limit

Delta V Is Enabled

Delta F Is Enabled

|F 1 - FX | < Delta F Limit

With Delta V OR Delta F Enabled

With Delta V AND Delta F Enabled

V1pos Dead Limit<

Dead V1 Hot V X Enabled

VX > Dead Limit

Dead V X Hot V1 Enabled

V1pos Dead Limit<

VX < Dead Limit

VX < Dead Limit

Dead V1 V X Enabled

V1pos Dead Limit<

VX > Dead LimitDead V1 Hot V X Enabled

V1pos Dead Limit>

V1pos Dead Limit>

VX < Dead Limit AND

Dead VX Hot V1 Enabled

Selected INPUT Is Activated

AND

User Software Setting

Measured Variable

Delta V and Delta F Check Logic

Delta V and Delta F Check Logic

Only one Delta V and Delta F Check Scheme may be active at a time.

Only one Delta V and Delta F Check Scheme may be active at a time.

Sync Check TimerOutput Seal-in Timer

25SOutputContact

OR

Dead Check TimerOutput Seal-in Timer

25DOutputContact

Figure 2-12 Sync Check Logic Diagrams


2–22

:��(��@�(��,�

��(��*��@(��

��,(��*��@(��

�)�*��(*��(��)�

F��, � �G�)��(��(�(*�(��H

��"��'�� 3

��(

��*(�

&�

!&�*

#&�*

��)*�(

(&�

�#&�*

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

�"�

�(��*��@(�

��+�( ��+�(

�(��$�(>�(�*)� &%&&�� &%"&&��

��+�( ��+�(

�%&�* "&%&�*

�(��*��*L ��*��(��*L �(��*��(��*L

�"��)�*��(*��:��(

:��(�� :��(�� :��(��

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

$� ! " # � � ��(��+�(

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

�"��(��*��@(�� &�* !&�*

�(��(��(��)� ��)*�( ��!&��)*�(�

Figure 2-13 Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–23

27 Phase UndervoltageThe Phase Undervoltage function (27) may be usedto detect any condition causing long- or short-termundervoltage. This is a true three-phase function inthat each phase has an independent timing element.The ranges and increments are presented in Figure2-14.

Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27Magnitude Select setting. (See Section 2.1,Configuration, Relay System Setup.) When the RMScalculation is selected, the magnitude calculation isaccurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz)and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. IfDFT calculation is selected, the magnitudecalculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and thetimer accuracy is 1 cycle.

27 #1 PICKUP________ Volts


27 #2 and 27 #3 Screens are identical to 27 #1.

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�� '�:�� ,*��

:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(

��*(�

Figure 2-14 Phase Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges


2–24

Relay volts are equal to the primary neutral voltage divided by thegrounding transformer ratio. Generally set for approximately 50%of the minimum third harmonic voltage observed during various loadingconditions.

27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral

For ground faults near the stator neutral, the ThirdHarmonic (180/150 Hz) Neutral undervoltagefunction (27TN) provides stator ground-faultprotection for high-impedance-grounded generatorapplications (See Figure 2-15). When used inconjunction with the fundamental neutralovervoltage (60/50Hz) function (59N), 100% statorground-fault protection can be provided. This isillustrated in Figure 2-15.

The 27TN function can be supervised by thepositive-sequence undervoltage element.Undervoltage supervision can prevent tripping whenthe generator field is not energized or the unit isnot yet synchronized.

In some generators, the third harmonic voltagecan be very low, especially during light loadconditions. It is also observed in some generatorinstallations that the third harmonic voltage isconsiderably reduced for a specific range of poweroutput (band). To prevent mis-operation duringthese conditions, the 27TN function can beprogrammed to be supervised (blocked) by lowforward power, low reverse power, low Vars (leadand lag), low power factor (lead/lag), and whenthe forward power is inside a band.

In the majority of the cases, these blockingfunctions will be disabled, except for those operatingcases where the third harmonic neutral voltagemagnitude is less than 0.5 V. The settings forthe blocking functions should be set based onfield measurements. Blocking regions areillustrated in Figure 2-16.

The 27TN setting depends on the actual third-harmonic neutral voltage level seen during normaloperation of the generator. The setting shouldbe about 50% of the minimum third-harmonicvoltage observed during various loading conditions.This can be most conveniently measured duringcommissioning of the relay. Since the relaymeasures the third harmonic voltage levels andwill display those values directly, no additionalequipment is required. The undervoltage inhibitsetting should be about 80% to 90% of the nominalvoltage. The ranges and increments are presentedin Figure 2-17.

27TN #1 PICKUP________ Volts

27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK________ Volts

27TN #1 FWD POWER BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK________ PU

27TH #1 REV POWER BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 REV POWER BLK________ PU

27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK________ PU

27TN #2 Screens are identical to 27TN #1.

Application – 2

2–25

27TN #1 BAND FWD PWR BLKdisable enable

27TN#1 LO B FWD PWR BLK________ PU

27TN#1 HI B FWD PWR BLK________ PU

27TN #1 DELAY________ Cycles

&'�&K

:��(*��(��+)�

(��(�(��

(�

��*

��

@(

&K "&K$��:��

�K��,��@��(��(��(��(��@(�(��

�&&K

(��(�(��

$��(��!&A"&��(��@(��@�@��

��*��&A�"&��(��@(��@�@��

:�('��*��@(��(�(�

"K�'��&K

� ��(��:�('��(��(��@(��(�(�

"( ��(��)��*��)�"*�

��

��

Figure 2-15 Third Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics

27TN #1 LAG VAR BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK________ PU

27TN #1 LEAD PF BLKdisable enable

27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK________ LEAD

27TN #1 LAG PF BLKdisable enable

27TN #1 LAG PF BLK________ LAG


2–26

-P +P

Lag var Block

Lead var Block

ReversePowerBlock

ForwardPowerBlock

Low Band ForwardPower Block

High BandForward

Power Block

Block Block

+Q

-QFigure 2-16 27TN Blocking Regions

Application – 2

2–27

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�� '��,��,!� �� ,*��G� ��,��

��(

��*(�

:�*��

:��%��(>%�*��@(��*��

$��,��:�,(��*��

,(�(��(�:�,(��*��

�(��*��

��@��*��

�(��:�,(��$�*��*��

��@�:�,(��$�*��*��

��$��,��:�,(��*��

��$��,��:�,(��*��

�(��)�

&%��*

"�*

&%&��:�

'�%&&�:�

'�%&&�:�

&%&��:�

&%&��(��

&%&��@

&%&��:�

&%&��:�

��)*�(

�#%&&�*

��&�*

�%&&�:�

'&%&��:�

'&%&��:�

�%&&�:�

�%&&��(��

�%&&��@

�%&&�:�

�%&&�:�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��:�� ! " # � � �

F

:�*��

:��%��(>%�*��@(��*��

$��,��:�,(��*��

,(�(��(�:�,(��*��

�(��*��

��@��*��

�(��:�,(��$�*��*��

��@�:�,(��$�*��*��

��$��,��:�,(��*��

��$��,��:�,(��*��

�(��)�

&%��*

"�*

&%&��:�

'�%&&�:�

'�%&&�:�

&%&��:�

&%&��(��

&%&��@

&%&��:�

&%&��:�

��)*�(

�#%&&�*

��&�*

�%&&�:�

&%&��:�

'&%&��:�

�%&&�:�

�%&&��(��

�%&&��@

�%&&�:�

�%&&�:�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

��:�� ! " # � � �

F

Figure 2-17 Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Circuit (27TN) Setpoint Ranges


2–28

32 Directional PowerThe Directional Power function (32) can provideprotection against both generator motoring andoverload. It provides three power setpoints, eachwith a magnitude setting and a time delay. TheForward Power direction (power flow to system) isautomatically chosen when the pickup setting ispositive and the Reverse Power direction (powerflow to generator) is automatically chosen when thepickup setting is negative. The range, as shown isfrom –3.000 PU to 3.000 PU where 1.0 PU is equalto the generator MVA rating. Normalized PU powerflow measurements are based on Nominal Voltageand Nominal Current setting, as shown in Section2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup.

Protection from Generator MotoringProtection against motoring is provided by selectinga negative pickup with Over/Under power set toOver. The relay will operate when the measuredreal power is greater (more negative) than the pickupsetting in the reverse direction.

In some steam generator applications it is desirableto trip the generator when the forward power is lessthan a small value. This is due to the fact that thetrapped steam will cause the generator to supply asmall amount of power even though the steam

valves are closed. In this case the Over/Underpower setting is set to Under and a positive pickupsetting is chosen. The relay will trip when themeasured forward power is less than the pickupvalue. The function should be blocked when thegenerator breaker is open (using contact inputblocking) otherwise the function will trip and preventthe generator from being brought online.

Protection from Generator OverloadProtection from generator overload is provided byselecting a positive pickup setting with Over/UnderPower setting set to Over. The relay will operatewhen the measured real power is greater than thepickup setting.

Protection from Excessive Reactive PowerThe directional power element #3 can be set tooperate on either real power or reactive power.When protection from excessive reactive power isrequired the element #3 can be set to operate onreactive power. The relay will operate when themeasured reactive power exceeds the pickupsetting.

Figures 2-18 through 2-21 show reverse power, lowforward power, over power, and over reactive powerapplications.

32 #1 PICKUP________ PU


32 #1 TARGET LEDdisable enable

32#1 UNDER/OVER POWERunder over

32 #2 PICKUP________ PU


The reverse power pickup setting should be based on the type ofprime mover and the losses when the generator is motoring.

Reverse power relays should always be applied with a time delay inorder to prevent mis-operation during power swing conditions. Typicaltime delay settings are 20 to 30 seconds.

Target LED for the 32 Function elements can be individually enableor disabled.

When Low Forward Power protection is desired, set this to Underwith a positive pickup setting. The relay will trip when the real powermeasurement is less than or equal to the pickup setpoint.

If used, positive direction power settings can be used for overloadprotection, providing either alarm or tripping or both, when powerequals or exceeds the setting. The pickup and time delay settingsshould be based on the capability limit of the generator.

A second reverse power setting can be used for sequential trippingof the generator in which case the associated time delay will be inthe range of 2 to 3 seconds.

Application – 2

2–29



32 #3 PICKUP________ PU




32 #3 DIR POWER SENSINGreal reactive

Directional Power Sensing for Element #3 can be se-lected as Real or Reactive.

,�:

:�

,(�(��(:�,(��$��,

:�*��

�%&�:�'�%&�:�

$��,��:�,(��$��,

Figure 2-18 Tripping on Reverse Power Flow (Over Power with Negative Pickup)


2–30

,�:

:�

,(�(��(:�,(��$��,

:�*��

�%&�:�'�%&�:�

$��,��:�,(��$��,

Figure 2-19 Tripping on Low Forward Power (Under Power with Positive Pickup)

,�:

:�

,(�(��(:�,(��$��,

:�*��

�%&�:�'�%&�:�

$��,��:�,(��$��,

Figure 2-20 Tripping on Overpower (Over Power with Positive Pickup)

Application – 2

2–31

,�:

:�

,(�(��(:�,(��$��,

:�*��

�%&�:�'�%&�:�

$��,��:�,(��$��,

,(�*��(�:�,(��)��(�

,(�*��(�:�,(��(�(��

Figure 2-21 Tripping on Over Reactive Power with Element #3 (Over Power, Positive Pickup andDirectional Power Sensing Set to Reactive)


2–32

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��'��,�� :��,

:�*��

�(��)�

'�%&&&�:�

��)*�(

�%&&&�:�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

'�%&&&�:�

��)*�(

�%&&&�:�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

'�%&&&�:�

��)*�(

�%&&&�:�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(

��*(�

��(��,(� ��(��,(� ��@(��+�(

��(��,(� ��(��,(� ��@(��+�(

��(��,(� ��(��,(� ��@(��+�(

,(�� ,(�*��(��(*��:�,(��(��@�

Figure 2-22 Directional Power, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–33

The settings of the offset mho elements should besuch that the relay detects the loss-of-field conditionfor any loading while not mis-operating during powerswings and fault conditions. Two approaches arewidely used in the industry, both of which aresupported by the M-3425A relay. Both approachesrequire knowledge of the reactances and otherparameters of the generator. They are described inFigure 2-23, Loss of Field (40) — ProtectiveApproach I and Figure 2-24, Loss of Field (40) —Protective Approach II.

Impedance calculations for various VT connectionsare shown in Table 2-2. All impedance settings aresecondary relay quantities and can be derived fromthe following formula:

ZSEC

= ZPRI

x (RC ÷ R

V)

where ZSEC

= secondary reflected impedance, ZPRI

= primary impedance, RC = current transformer

ratio, and RV = voltage transformer ratio.




40VC #1 DELAY WITH VC________ Cycles

The first approach is shown in Figure 2-23,Loss of Field (40) — Protective Approach I.Here, both of the offset mho elements (#1 and#2) are set with an offset of –Xl

d÷2, where Xld

is the (unsaturated) direct axis transient reac-tance of the generator. The diameter of the smallercircle (#1) is set at 1.0 pu impedance on themachine base. This mho element detects loss-of-field from full load to about 30% load. A smalltime delay provides fast protection.

The diameter of the larger circle (#2) is set equalto Xd, where Xd is the (unsaturated) direct axissynchronous reactance of the machine. This mhoelement can detect a loss-of-field condition fromalmost no load to full load. A time delay of 30 to60 cycles (#2) should be used in order to preventpossible incorrect operation on stable swings.

The time delay with voltage control is typicallyset shorter than the other time delay.

40 Loss of FieldThe Loss-of-Field function (40) provides protectionfor a partial or complete loss of field. A variety ofpossible settings make the M-3425A GeneratorProtection Relay very flexible when applied to loss-of-field protection. Ranges and increments arepresented in Figure 2-25.

The loss-of-field function is implemented with twooffset mho elements, an undervoltage element,and a directional element. The setting for each mhoelement, diameter, offset, and time delay, areadjusted individually. Each element has two timedelay settings. The second time delay (delay withVC) is applicable with voltage control, and the timeronly starts if the positive sequence voltage isbelow the voltage control setting. The function withvoltage control and without voltage control can beprogrammed to send to two different output contacts,if desired. The delay with voltage control may beenabled on each element but the voltage levelsetting is common. A common directional unit isprovided to block the relay operation during slightlyunderexcited conditions (since approach #1 withnegative offset is inherently directional, thedirectional element is not required). The directionalunit’s angle setting (Θ

D) can be set from 0° to 20°.


2–34





40 VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts

40 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT________ Degrees

The second approach is shown in Figure 2-24,Loss of Field (40) – Protective Approach II. Inthis approach, one of the mho elements is setwith an offset of –Xl

d ÷ 2, a diameter of 1.1 Xd-(Xld

÷ 2), and a time delay of 10 to 30 cycles. Thesecond element is set to coordinate with thegenerator minimum excitation limit and steady-state stability limit.

In order to obtain proper coordination, the offsetof this element must be adjusted to be positive.Typically, the offset is set equal to the unittransformer reactance (XT). The diameter isapproximately equal to (1.1 Xd + XT). A timedelay of 30 to 60 cycles would prevent mis-operation on stable swings.

Typical setting is 13° (0.94 power factor). Thissetting is common to both element #1 and #2.

The following table provides suggested time settings when time delay with VC is used in addition to standardtime delay.

1enoZ 2enoZ

gnitteSlortnoCegatloV A/Nfo%09ot08

egatloVlanimoN

yaleD selcyC51 selcyC006,3

CVhtiwyaleD elbasiD selcyC06

Table 2-3 Voltage Control Time Settings

Application – 2

2–35

�

� �

L�

�

��

��

�%&��

MLN��

!��-*��(��

!�*��(��+��)

��(��)'��(��+��)��

��-*��$��(��*(

��*��

Figure 2-23 Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 1

�

� �

�

��

�%��L�

MLN��

��L

!��-*��(��

!�*��(��+��)

��(��)'��(��+��)��

��

��

��-*��$��(��*(

��*��

��

��

��

��

Figure 2-24 Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 2


2–36

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�#&��'��$�$��

I�

��(

��*(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*�(��(�(��

��(��

�(��)�

&%��

'�"&%&��

��)*�(

�&&%&��

"&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

&%��

'�"&%&��

��)*�(

�&&%&��

"&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

��*�(��(�(��

��(��

�(��)�

"�**��@(�� &�*

&O��(*��(�(�� &O

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

*��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

*��*��@��F

*��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

*��*��@��F

��)*�(�(��)�,��*�� !&��)*�(� *�I�

*�I��)*�(�(��)�,��*�� !&��)*�(�

Figure 2-25 Loss-of-Field (40) Setpoint Ranges

■ NOTE: Out of Step Block Enable is not available for this release, and will appear greyed-out in display.

Application – 2

2–37

46 Negative Sequence OvercurrentThe Negative Sequence Overcurrent function (46)provides protection against possible rotoroverheating and damage due to unbalanced faultsor other system conditions which can causeunbalanced three phase currents in the generator.Ranges and increments are presented in Figure2-27.

This function has a definite time element and aninverse time element. The definite time pickupvalue and definite operating time are normallyassociated with an alarm function. The inversetime element is usually associated with a tripfunction and has a pickup and an operating timedefined by an (I

2)2 t = K, where K is the Time Dial

Setting and I2 is the per unit negative sequence

current.

The minimum delay for the inverse time function isfactory set at 12 cycles to avoid nuisance tripping.A maximum time to trip can be set to reduce theoperating times for modest imbalances. An importantfeature that helps protect the generator from damagedue to recurring imbalances is a linear resetcharacteristic. When I

2 decreases below the pickup

value, the trip timer takes four minutes to resetfrom its 100% trip level. Figure 2-26, NegativeSequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves,illustrates the inverse time characteristic of thenegative sequence overcurrent function.

Operating times are lower than shown in Figure2-26 when measured current values are greaterthan 15 A (3 A for 1 A rated circuit).

The first task of setting this function is to determinethe capabilities of the associated machine. Asestablished by ANSI standards, the machine limitsare expressed as (I

2)2t = K. The value of K is

established by the machine design and is generallyprovided on test sheets of the machine. The relaycan accommodate any generator size because ofthe wide range of K settings from 1 to 95. Typicalvalues can be found in ANSI C50.13-1977.

The negative sequence pickup range is from 3% to100% of the Nominal Current value input duringsystem setup (see Section 2.1, Configuration).

This protection must not operate for system faultsthat will be cleared by system relaying. This requiresconsideration of line protection, bus differential andbreaker failure backup protections.

46DT PICKUP________ %

46DT DELAY________ Cycles

46IT PICKUP________ %

46IT MAX DELAY________ Cycles

46IT RESET TIME________ Seconds


The pickup setting is usually quite low (3–5%)and the output of this function is usually con-nected to alarm only.

Time delay should be set high enough to avoidalarms on transients.

The 46 Inverse Time pickup setting should coincidewith the continuous negative sequence currentcapability of the generator operating at full output.

The maximum trip time is used to reduce thelonger trip times associated with low to moder-ate imbalances to a preset time.

The time dial setting corresponds to the K providedby the generator manufacturer for the specific unitbeing protected. See Figure 2-26 for the negativesequence overcurrent inverse time curves.


2–38

��

��

��!�"��#$$$%$$

&$$

'$$

($$

#$$

%$

&$

'$

($

#$%

&

'

(

#

$)&

$)'

$)(

$)#' * & % #$ ($ '$ &$ %$ #$$ #*$ ($$ +$$ '$$ *$$ &$$ %$$ #$$$ #$$$ ($$$ +$$$ '$$$

,-*

��&*.*$$��/��

*$(*

#$*

(#

0��12��

�((�3,

0��1��

?

■■■■■ NOTE: When the phase current exceeds 3X I nominal, the operating times will be greater than thoseshown.

* 0.24 seconds for 50 Hz units.

Figure 2-26 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�#!��'� ��*��P�� *�,��,,�

:�*��

�(��)�

�(%��(

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

�K

��)*�(

�&&K

��!&��)*�(�

:�*��

��(��

!�-��(�

,(�(��(�

��%��(

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

�K

�

!&&��)*�(�

��(*��

�&&K

("

!""&&��)*�(�

!&&��(*��

Figure 2-27 Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–39

49 Stator Overload ProtectionThe Stator Thermal Overload function (49) providesprotection against possible damage during overloadconditions. The characteristic curves are based onIEC-255-8 standard, and represent both cold andhot curves. The function uses the thermal timeconstant of the generator and stator maximumallowable continuous overload current (I

max) in

implementing the inverse time characteristic.

��J��-��

��:��

��

�

Where: t = time to tripτ = thermal time constantIL= load current

IPL

= pre-load currentImax

= maximum allowed continuous overload current

Example: If we consider that the generator wasloaded with 80% of its rating power prior to overload,then the current goes up to 2.0 times the maximumcurrent ((I

L/I

max)=2.0). Selecting the curve P=0.8

(see Figure 2-28), we have t/τ =0.1133. If τ =30minutes, then the time delay for this conditionwould be: t = 0.1133 x 30 = 3.3999 minutes.

The 49 function has two elements, one of whichcan be used for trip and the other for alarm.

49 #1 TIME CONSTANT5.0 Min

49#1 MAX OVERLOAD CURR2.00 Amps

Selects the time constant, ‘τ ’

Selects the maximum allowed continuous overloadcurrent.

49#2 Screens are identical to those for 49#1.


2–40

'-�4��5 ��

��

��

��

�

�

� � � � � � ! � "

��6��

:J&%&:J&%":J&%!:J&%

:J&%�

:J&%(

��

@$:A:12�B��

��

��

Figure 2-28 49 Function Overload Curves

Application – 2

2–41

�#(��'��,��*�,��

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��(��

!�-%��(��(��

I��%&��

�%&&��

(((%(��

�&%&&��

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �F

��(��

!�-%��(��(��

I��%&��

�%&&��

(((%(��

�&%&&��

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �F

Figure 2-29 Stator Thermal Protection (49) Setpoint Ranges


2–42

50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase andNeutral CircuitsThe Instantaneous Phase (50) and InstantaneousNeutral (50N) overcurrent functions provide fasttripping for high fault currents. The settings of bothfunctions must be set such that they will not pickupfor fault or conditions outside the immediateprotective zone. If the neutral current input isconnected to a step-up transformer’s neutral CT,the 50N function can be used as a breaker flashoverprotection when used in conjunction with externalbreaker failure protection. Ranges and Incrementsare presented in Figures 2-30 and 2-31. The function

automatically selects fundamental RMS or totalRMS calculation based on the input frequency.When the generator frequency is within 5 Hzfrom the nominal frequency, it uses fundamentalRMS calculation. Outside of this range, it usestotal RMS calculation, which will provide protectionduring offline down to a frequency of 8 Hz.

For providing off-line protection, one of the elementscan be supervised by a breaker ‘b’ contact, and theelement blocked when the breaker is closed. Thisallows the function to be set sensitively (below fullload current).

50#1 PICKUP________ Amps

50#1 DELAY________ Cycles

50N PICKUP________ Amps

50N DELAY________ Cycles

The relay current (IR) is equal to the primary current (Ip) divided bythe appropriate CT ratio. These screens are repeated for 50#2 ele-ment.

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�"&��'�� *�,��,,�

:�*��

�(��)�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

&%��

��)*�(

�#&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

:�*��

�(��)�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

&%��

��)*�(

�#&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

I�

I�

Figure 2-30 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–43

:�*��

�(��)�

&%��

��)*�(

�#&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

I�

�"& ��'�� ,��*�,��,,�

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

Figure 2-31 Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent (50N) Setpoint Ranges


2–44

50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV BreakerFlashoverThe Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashoverfunction (50BF) is applicable when a generatorbreaker is present and line side generator CTs arebeing used. The 50BF-Ph phase detector element(if enabled) is used for breaker failure and the50BF-N (if enabled) provides breaker flashoverprotection by providing an additional breaker failureinitiate which is only active when the breaker isopen. For high impedance grounded applications,the 50BF-N function is inapplicable and must bedisabled. Ranges and increments are presented inFigure 2-33.

50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure: When theM-3425A Generator Protection Relay detects aninternal fault or an abnormal operating condition, itcloses an output contact to trip the generator breakeror the unit HV breaker. When a generator breaker isused, protection is available for the instance whereit fails to clear the fault or abnormal condition. Suchgenerator breaker failure protection output contactsmust be connected to trip the additional necessarybreakers to isolate the generator from the system.

The breaker-failure condition is usually detected bythe continued presence of current in any one ormore of the phases after a breaker has been tripped.However, the current detector (50BF-Ph) may notalways give the correct status of the breaker,especially for generator breakers. This is becausefaults and abnormal operating conditions such asground faults, overexcitation, over/under frequency,and reverse power may not produce enough currentto operate the current detectors. For this reason,the breaker status input 52b contact must be used,in addition to the 50BF-Ph, to provide adequatebreaker status indication.

Implementation of the generator breaker failurefunction is illustrated in Figure 2-32. The breakerfailure timer will be started whenever any one of thedesignated output contacts or the externalprogrammed breaker failure initiate status input areoperated. The timer continues to time if any one ofthe phase currents are above the 50BF-Ph pickupsetting or if the 52b contact indicates the breaker isstill closed; otherwise, the timer is reset.

Since current in the generator high side CT whichenergizes the 50BF protection (I

A, I

B, I

C) might not

extinguish concurrently with the breaker opening forfaults between the CT location and the generatorbreaker, a possible area of mis-operation exists.Usually the risk of faults in this limited area is smallenough to be ignored but should be considered.

50BF-Neutral Element: This instantaneousovercurrent relay is energized from the generatorneutral CT (See Figure 2-1, One-Line FunctionalDiagram). This function is internally in series with abreaker “b” contact (IN1) to provide logic for thebreaker flashover protection (see Figure 2-32).

HV Breaker Failure (limited) The breaker failurefunction may be used for a unit breaker rather thana generator breaker. It is limited in that it has nofault detector associated with the unit breaker. Outputcontact operation would occur if any of the initiatecontacts close and the 52b contact indicated aclosed breaker after the set time delay.

This operation is chosen by disabling the neutralelement, disabling the phase element, anddesignating initiating inputs and outputs and a timedelay setting.

Application – 2

2–45

50BF PHASE ELEMENTdisable enable

50BF PICKUP PHASE________ Amps

50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENTdisable enable

50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL________ Amps

50BF INPUT INITIATE i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50BF OUTPUT INITIATEo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50BF DELAY________ Cycles

If generator breaker failure function is used in this application, ENABLEhere.

Set phase pickup amps.

If the breaker flashover protection is to be used with the generatorbreaker failure function of the relay, set ENABLE (enable phaseelement also for this application.)

Set the neutral pickup amps.

Designate the status inputs which will initiate the breaker failuretimer.

Designate the outputs that will initiate the breaker failure timer.

For generator breaker failure protection, the time delay should be set toallow for breaker operating time plus margin.

:��(��(��+�(

� ��"�+�

��@�*��@��,�(��+�(��(��*��(�

��

��

��

��(�$�C:A06AA:<#�D��

��(

��(

��

��(��C:A06AA:<#

�D��

(��(��+�(

��

��+��

�AEFA/GG:9�6#H6#�E<#/0#>

��

��@�*��@�,�(��+�(��(��(�

Figure 2-32 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram


2–46

�"&�$��'��,��3�,�$��,�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

"&�$

��(

��*(�

$� ! " # � � �

� ! " # � � ��(��(

� ! " # � � �

��*��@��:�� ! " # � � �

F

�(��)� ��)*�( ��!&��)*�(�

&%�&��:��(��(�� &%&&��

��+�( ��+�(

&%�&�� (��(�� &%&&��

��+�( ��+�(

Figure 2-33 Breaker Failure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–47

50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phasedifferential)The Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) function canbe applied in two different configurations based onthe CT connections. When CT configuration shownin Figure 2-1, One Line Functional Diagram is used,the 50DT function is used as a definite time phaseovercurrent function to provide protection for externaland internal faults in the generator. When the CTsare connected to measure the split phase differentialcurrent (shown in Figure 2-2, Alternative One LineFunctional Diagram), the 50DT function can beused as a split-phase differential relay.

■ NOTE: When 50DT function is used for split-phase differential, 50BF, 87 and 87GDfunctions must be disabled.

Refer to Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay SystemSetup for a description of the 50DT Split-PhaseOperate setting, and Section 2.2, System Diagrams.

In some cases, the generators may be run with afaulted turn shorted until the generator winding isrepaired. To prevent mis-operation under theseconditions, the pickup setting of the faulted phaseshould be set higher than the other phases. Toaccommodate this function, individual pickupsettings are available for each phase. Ranges andincrements are presented in Figure 2-3450DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A

________ Amps

50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE B________ Amps

50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE C________ Amps


50DT #2 screens are identical to 50DT #1.

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�"&��'��$� ��!��*�,��,,�

��(

��*(�

:�*��

:�*��

:�*��

�(��)�

&%�&��

&%�&��

&%�&��

��)*�(

�#&%&��

�#&%&��

�#&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

:�*��

:�*��

�(��)�

&%�&��

&%�&��

&%�&��

��)*�(

�#&%&��

�#&%&��

�#&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

Figure 2-34 Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges


2–48

50/27 Inadvertent EnergizingThe Inadvertent Energizing function (50/27) of therelay is an overcurrent function supervised bygenerator terminal bus voltage. Inadvertent oraccidental energizing of off-line generators hasoccurred frequently enough to warrant the use ofdedicated protection logic to detect this condition.Operating errors, breaker flashovers, control circuitmalfunctions or a combination of these causeshave resulted in generators being accidentallyenergized while off-line. The problem is particularlyprevalent on large generators connected through ahigh voltage disconnect switch to either a ring busor breaker-and-a-half bus configuration. When agenerator is accidentally energized from the powersystem, it will accelerate like an induction motor.While the machine is accelerating, high currentsinduced into the rotor can cause significant damage

in a matter of seconds. Voltage supervisedovercurrent logic is designed to provide thisprotection. (See Figure 2-35, Inadvertent EnergizingFunction Logic Diagram)

An undervoltage element (all three phase voltagesmust be below pickup) with adjustable pickup anddropout time delay supervises instantaneousovercurrent tripping. The undervoltage detectorsautomatically arm the overcurrent tripping when thegenerator is taken off-line. This undervoltage detectorwill disable or disarm the overcurrent operationwhen the machine is put back in service. Rangesand increments are presented in Figure 2-36.

50/27 PICKUP________ Amps

50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts

50/27 PICKUP DELAY________ Cycles

50/27 DROPOUT DELAY________ Cycles

Typical pickup setting is 0.5 amps. No coordination is required withother protection since this function is only operational when thegenerator is off-line.

The purpose of the undervoltage detector is to determine whether theunit is connected to the system. The voltage level during thisaccidental energization depends on the system strength. Typicalsetting is 50%–70% of rated voltage.

The pickup time delay is the time for the undervoltage unit to operateto arm the protection. It must coordinate with other protection forconditions which cause low voltages (typically longer than 21 and51V time delay settings.)

The dropout time delay is the time for the unit to operate to disarm theprotection when the voltage is increased above the pickup value orthe generator is brought on-line.

Application – 2

2–49

��

��

��

��

�� !��

"#�

$%�!��&'�

��(�

Figure 2-35 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�"&A� ��'�� *�,� �� ,��E� �

��(

��*(�

:�*��"&A�

:�*��

:�*�'��(��)�

��'��(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

�"&��'��*�,��,,�

&%"&�� "%&&��

�� '�� ,*��

Figure 2-36 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges


2–50

51N Inverse Time Neutral OvercurrentThe Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent function (51N)provides protection against ground faults. Since nozero sequence or ground current is usually presentduring normal operation, this function can be set forgreater sensitivity than the phase overcurrentprotection. If the 51N and 50N functions are notused at the generator neutral, they can be used todetect system ground faults by being energized bythe step-up transformer neutral CTs. Ranges andincrements are presented in Figure 2-37.

The curves available for use are shown in AppendixD, Inverse Time Curves. They cover a range from1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additional

one cycle time delay should be added to thesecurves in order to obtain the relay operating time.Inverse time curves saturate beyond 20 timespickup. For currents in excess of 20 times pickup,operating times are fixed at the 20 time pickuplevel.

The function automatically selects fundamentalRMS or total RMS calculation based on the inputfrequency. When the generator frequency is within

5 Hz from the nominal frequency, it usesfundamental RMS calculation. Outside of this range,it uses total RMS calculation, which will provideprotection during offline down to a frequency of 8Hz.


51N CURVEdef inv vinv einv

ieci iecvi iecei ieclt

51N TIME DIAL________

The relay current (IR) is equal to the primary current (I

P) divided by the

appropriate CT ratio. IR = IP ÷ CT ratio

Select one of the time curves shown in Appendix D, Inverse TimeCurves. The appropriate curve in the selected family is designatedhere.

Appropriate Time Dial for coordination with “downstream” relayprotection chosen from the time curve above.

$� ! " # � � �

��(

��*(�

�"� ��'�� *�,��!�� ,��*�,��,,�

:�*��

��(��

I�

��:�� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(�

�(��(��(

��

��(��(

��*�

*(�)��(��(

��

�-��(�(�)��(��(

��

&%�"��

&%"

��%&&��

��%&

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

Figure 2-37 Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–51

51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent withVoltage Control/RestraintTime-overcurrent relays, one per phase, are usedto trip circuits selectively and to time-coordinatewith other up- or downstream relays. For thisfunction, eight complete series of inverse timetripping characteristics are included. The samedescriptions and nomenclature which are traditionallyused with electromechanical relays are used in therelay. Thus, the curve families to be chosen aredefinite time, inverse, very inverse, extremelyinverse and four IEC curves. In the menu, theseare abbreviated as DEF, INV, VINV, EINV, IECI,IECVI, IECEI, and IECLT. Within each family, theoperator selects time dial setting and pickup (tap)setting, just as with electromechanical relays.Ranges and increments are presented in Figure2-39.

The curves available for use are shown in AppendixD, Inverse Time Curves. They cover a range from1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additionalone cycle time delay should be added to thesecurves in order to obtain the relay operating time.Inverse time curves saturate beyond 20 timespickup. For currents in excess of 20 times pickup,operating times are fixed at the 20 time pickuplevel. The particular settings will be made byinformation from short-circuit fault studies andknowledge of the coordination requirements withother devices in the system that respond to timeovercurrent.

51V is a true three-phase function, in that the relayincorporates separate integrating timers on eachphase.

The inverse time overcurrent function can be voltagecontrolled (VC), voltage restrained (VR), or neither.For voltage-controlled operation, the function is notactive unless the voltage is below the voltagecontrol setpoint. This philosophy is used to confirmthat the overcurrent is due to system fault. Whenapplied, most users will set voltage control limits inthe range of 0.7 to 0.9 per unit RMS voltage. Whenvoltage restraint is selected (See Figure 2-38,Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic), the pickupsetting is continuously modified in proportion to thecollapsing terminal voltage. The voltage restraintfunction is well-suited to small generators withrelatively short time constants.

■ NOTE: The 51V function should be blockedby fuse loss if in the voltage controlmode only. Fuse loss blocking is notdesirable for voltage restraint modebecause the pickup is automaticallyheld at 100% pickup during fuse lossconditions, and operation willcontinue as normal.

The internally derived voltage used to realize thevoltage control or restraint feature depends on theconfigured VT configuration and the Delta-YTransform setting (see Section 2.1, Configuration,Relay System Setup). Table 2-4, Delta/WyeTransformer Voltage-Current Pairs describes thecalculation for the various system VT configurations.

51V PICKUP________ Amps

51V CURVEdef inv vinv einvieci iecvi iecei ieclt

51V TIME DIAL________

51V VOLTAGE CONTROLdisable V_CNTL v_rstrnt

51V VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts

The pickup of the 51V is set in relay amps.(Relay amps = primary amps ÷ CT ratio)

Selects one of the time curves as shown in Appendix D, InverseTime Curves. The appropriate curve in the selected family of curvesis designated here.

Disable if neither voltage control nor voltage restraint is desired. Ifvoltage restraint is designated, the tap setting is modified as shown inFigure 2-38. If voltage control is designated, the 51V will only operatewhen the voltage is less than the 51V voltage control setting specifiedbelow. When applied, the voltage control is usually set in the range of70% to 90% of the nominal voltage.


2–52

50

25 50 75 100

75

25

Input Voltage (% of rated voltage)0

100

Tap Setting as %of Tap Setting atRated Voltage

Figure 2-38 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic

Generator Directly ConnectedGenerator Connected Through

Delta AB/Wye or Delta AC/Wye Transformer

CurrentVoltage Control or Restraint

CurrentVoltage Control or Restraint

L-G L-L or L-G to L-L L-G L-L or L-G to L-L

Ia

(VA

VC)/S3 V

ABI

aV

A(V

AB V

CA)/S3

Ib (VB VA)/S3 VBC Ib VB (VBC VAB)/S3

Ic

(VC

VB)/S3 V

CAI

cV

C(V

CA V

BC)/S3

Table 2-4 Delta/Wye Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�"�*��'�� *�,��!��*�,��,,� ��*�� ,��,�*��,��,��

I�&%"&��

&%"

��%&&��

��%&

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(�

�(��(��(

��

��(��(

��*�

*(�)��(��(

��

�-��(�(�)��(��(

��

*��@(�� "�* ��&�*

��+�( *��@(�� *��@(�,(��

:�*��

��(��

Figure 2-39 Inverse Time Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Voltage Restraint (51VC/VR)Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–53

59 Phase OvervoltageThe Phase Overvoltage function (59) may be usedto provide overvoltage protection for the generator.The relay provides overvoltage protection functionswith three voltage levels and three definite-timesetpoints, any one or more of which can beprogrammed to trip the unit or send an alarm. Thisis a true 3-phase function in that each phase has anindependent timing element.

The 59 function can be programmed to use phasevoltage (any one of the three phases) or positivesequence voltage as input.

Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27Magnitude Select setting (See Section 2.1,Configuration, Relay System Setup). When theRMS option is selected, the magnitude calculationis accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80Hz) and the accuracy of the time delay is +20cycles. If DFT option is selected, the magnitudecalculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and thetimer accuracy is 1 cycle. When the input voltageselect is set to positive sequence voltage, the 59functions uses DFT to measure the positivesequence voltage, irrespective of DFT/RMSselection. Ranges and increments are presented inFigure 2-40.

59 #1 INPUT VOLTAGE SEL.phase_volt pos_seq_volt



Generator capability is generally 105% of rated voltage.

59 #2 and 59 #3 screens are identical to 59 #1.

F��, � �G�$��*��(�(*�(�H

�"(��'�:��*�,*��

:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*��@(��(�(*�� :��(�*��@( :��(��(>�(�*(�*��@( I�

:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*��@(��(�(*�� :��(�*��@( :��(��(>�(�*(�*��@( I�

:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��*��@(��(�(*�� :��(�*��@( :��(��(>�(�*(�*��@( I�

��(

��*(�

Figure 2-40 Phase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges


2–54

59D Third Harmonic Voltage DifferentialThis scheme, when used in conjunction with 59Nfunction may provide 100% Stator Ground faultprotection.

Figure 2-41 illustrates a third harmonic voltagedifferential scheme. This scheme compares thethird harmonic voltage appearing at the neutral tothat which appears at the generator terminals. Theratio of these third harmonic voltages is relativelyconstant for all load conditions. A stator phase-to-

ground fault will disrupt this balance, causingoperation of the differential relay (see Figure 2-15).The generator terminal voltage (Line Side Voltage)can be selected as 3V

0(Calculated by the relay

from VA, V

B and V

C) or V

X (broken delta VT input

connected at the VX input.) Positive sequence

undervoltage blocking will prevent the function frommisoperating when the generator is offline (theterminal voltage is below the set value).

59D RATIO________

59D LINE SIDE VOLTAGE3v0 VX

59D POS SEQ VOLT BLKdisable ENABLE

59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK________ Volts

59D DELAY________ Cycles

This setting requires field measurements of third-harmonic voltage.

Selection of VX will give better accuracy and sensitivity than 3V

0. If

3V0 is selected, VT configuration must be set to Line-Ground. If thenominal third harmonic voltage is <1 V, 3V

0 line side voltage selection

is not recommended, because noise in the 3V0 and V

N can cause 59D

misoperation.

This setting is typically enabled.

Application – 2

2–55

V3N V3X

M-3425A

The ratio V3x

> Pickup V

3N

Where: V3x

is the Third Harmonic Triple Zero Sequence voltage measured at the generatorterminals.

V3N

is the Third Harmonic voltage measure at the neutral.

Figure 2-41 Third Harmonic Overvoltage Scheme for Generator Ground Fault Protection

,��*LA* ��

�(��)�

&%�

��)*�(

"%&

��!&��)*�(�

�"(��'��,��,!� ��*��$$�,� ��

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

I�

��&�*"�*

��(��(�*��@(� �*& *L

��+�( ��+�(

:��(>�*��@(��*��

Figure 2-42 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (59D) Setpoint Ranges


2–56

59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or ZeroSequenceThe Neutral Overvoltage function (59N) providesstator ground fault protection for high impedancegrounded generators. The 59N function can provideground fault protection for 90–95% of the statorwinding (measured from the terminal end).

The 59N function provides three setpoints, andresponds only to the fundamental frequencycomponent, rejecting all other harmonic components.Ranges and increments are presented in Figure2-43.

59N #1 PICKUP________ Volts

59N #1 DELAY________ Cycles

With typical grounding transformer ratios and a typical minimumsetting of 5 volts, this protection is capable of detecting groundfaults in about 95% of the generator stator winding from the termi-nal end.

If grounded-wye/grounded-wye VTs are connected at the machineterminals, the voltage relay must be time coordinated with VTfuses for faults on the transformer secondary winding. If relay timedelay for coordination is not acceptable, the coordination problemcan be alleviated by grounding one of the secondary phase conductorsinstead of the secondary neutral. When this technique is used, thecoordination problem still exists for ground faults on the secondaryneutral conductor. Thus, its usefulness is limited to those applicationswhere the exposure to ground faults on the secondary neutral issmall.

Since system ground faults can induce zero sequence voltages atthe generator due to transformer capacitance coupling, this relaymust coordinate with the system ground fault relaying.

59N #2 and 59N #3 screens are identical to 59N #1.

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�"( ��'� ��,��*�,*��

:�*��

�(��)�

"%&�*

��)*�(

��&%&�*

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"%&�*

��)*�(

��&%&�*

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"%&�*

��)*�(

��&%&�*

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

Figure 2-43 Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (59N) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–57

59X Multipurpose Overvoltage (Turn-to-TurnStator Fault Protection or Bus GroundProtection)For generators where the stator-winding configurationdoes not allow the application of split-phasedifferential, a neutral voltage method can be used todetect turn-to-turn stator winding faults. Figure 2-44illustrates this method. Three VTs are connected inwye and the primary ground lead is tied to thegenerator neutral. The secondary is connected in a“broken delta” with an overvoltage relay connectedacross its open delta to measure 3V

0 voltage. By

connecting the primary ground lead to the generatorneutral, the relay is made insensitive to stator

ground faults. The relay will, however, operate forturn-to-turn faults, which increase the 3V

0 voltage

above low normal levels. Installation requires thecable from the neutral of the VT to generator neutralbe insulated for the system line-to-ground voltageand the relay to be tuned to fundamental (60/50 Hz)voltage since some third-harmonic voltage will bepresent across the broken delta VT input.

Alternatively, this function can be used to detectbus ground faults, when connected as shown inFigure 2–6.

59X #1 PICKUP________ Volts

59X #1 DELAY________ Cycles

When used for Turn-to-Turn fault protection the pickup should be setabove the normal zero sequence voltage level. Typically the pickupis set to 5 V.

When used for Bus Ground protection it is again set above the normalzero sequence voltage seen at the bus. Typical setting is between 10and 20 Volts to provide sensitive protection.

The Time Delay for Turn-to-Turn faults should be set to approximately5 cycles. For bus ground fault protection application the time delayshould coordinate with other ground fault relaying and VT fuses.

59X #2 screens are identical to 59X #1.

59X

R

3V0

VT

R

GENERATOR

See Note Below

■ NOTE: Installation requires the cable from the neutral of the VT to generator neutral be insulated for thesystem line-to-ground voltage.

Figure 2-44 Turn-to-Turn Stator Winding Fault Protection


2–58

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�"(L��'�!��:�,:��*�,*��

��(

��*(�I�:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

I�:�*��

�(��)�

"�*

��)*�(

��&�*

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

Figure 2-45 (59X) Multi-purpose Overvoltage Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–59

60FL VT Fuse LossSome functions may operate inadvertently when aVT fuse is blown or an event causes a loss of one,two, or all three potentials to the relay. Provisionsare incorporated for both internal and externalpotential loss detection and blocking of user definedfunctions. The logic scheme and options areillustrated in Figure 2-46.

Internal Fuse Loss Detection LogicThe internal logic scheme available will detect aloss of one, two, and all three potentials.

For the loss of one or two potentials, positive andnegative sequence quantities are compared. Thepresence of negative sequence voltage in theabsence of negative sequence current is consideredto be a fuse loss condition. An additionalsupervising condition includes a minimum positivesequence voltage to assure voltage is being appliedto the relay.

For the loss of all three phase potentials, acomparison of the three phase voltages is made tothe three phase currents. If all three potentials areunder 0.05 V

nom, and all three currents are below

1.25 Inom

combined with I1 > 0.33A, a three phase

potential loss is declared. A seal in circuit isprovided to ensure a three phase fuse loss conditionis not declared during a three phase fault if the faultcurrent decays below the 1.25 I

nom pickup setting.

Protection functions in the relay may be blockedby an assertion of the fuse failure logic (FL), ineach function’s respective setting screen. Typicalfunctions to block on a loss of potential event are21, 27, 32, 40, 51V (for Voltage Control only), 67,67N, 78 and 81.

The 60FL function does not have to be enabled inorder to use the FL as a blocking input in the relayconfiguration menu.

External Fuse-Loss FunctionFor the specific application where the precedinglogic cannot be considered reliable (such as whencurrent inputs to the relay are not connected, orsustained positive sequence current during faultconditions is minimal), an external fuse failurefunction can be used as an input to the relay. Theexternal 60 FL Function contact is connected acrossany control/status input, (IN1-IN6). The relayprotection functions are then blocked by an assertionof the control/status input (INx), as a blockingfunction in each function’s respective setting screen.

60FL VT Fuse Loss Alarm FunctionThe 60FL alarm function is enabled by the internallogic by selecting the “FL” option in the 60 FLfunction setup screen. It is enable by the externallogic by selecting the appropriate control/statusinput (INx) in the 60FL function setup screen.

A timer associated with the fuse loss alarm logic isavailable. This timer is to assure proper coordinationfor conditions that may appear as a fuse loss, suchas secondary VT circuit faults that will be clearedby local low voltage circuit action (fuses or circuitbreakers). Ranges and increments are presented inFigure 2-47.

60FL INPUT INITIATEFL i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

60FL 3 PHASE DETECTdisable enable

60FL DELAY________ Cycles

The initiating control/status inputs are user-designated. The clos-ing of any of the externally connected contacts (across these in-puts) will start the associated time delay to the 60FL function op-eration. In order to use internal fuse loss logic for 60FL function,“FL” must be checked. Externally initiated fuse loss detection maybe input to other status inputs.

The time delay is set to coordinate for conditions which may appearas a fuse loss but will be corrected by other protection (such as asecondary VT circuit fault which will be cleared by local low voltagecircuit action). This delay does not affect internal FL blocking op-tion.


2–60

V1

Ver

ifies

VT

vol

tage

is a

pplie

dV

2 P

rovi

des

indi

catio

n of

blo

wn

fuse

I 2

Pre

vent

s op

erat

ion

durin

g ph

ase-

phas

e fa

ults

I 1

Pre

vent

s ou

tput

con

tact

s fr

om c

hatte

ring

whe

n

a

fuse

blo

ws

durin

g no

load

ope

ratio

n.

Pro

tect

ion

Fun

ctio

n B

lock

Sig

nal b

y IN

x fr

om E

xter

nal F

LE

xter

nal

"FL

" F

unct

ion

INx

60F

L A

larm

Fun

ctio

n in

itiat

e by

inte

rnal

"F

L" o

r S

tatu

s In

put C

onta

ct IN

x

Ext

erna

l Fus

eL

oss

Fun

ctio

n

AN

D

OR

AN

D

Inte

rnal

60F

L L

og

ic:

1 &

2 P

has

e L

oss

of

Po

ten

tial

AN

D

Inte

rnal

60F

L L

og

ic:

3 P

has

e L

oss

of

Po

ten

tial

AN

D

OR

I B >

1.2

5 I N

I C >

1.2

5 I N

I A >

1.2

5 I N

OR

VB <

0.0

5 V

N A

ND

60F

L A

larm

Sig

nal

T

FL

I 1

V

erifi

es O

n-lin

e co

nditi

onV

A,B

,C

Indi

catio

n of

3-p

hase

loss

of p

oten

tial

I A,B

,C

Pre

vent

s op

erat

ion

durin

g fa

ults

Sea

l-in

circ

uit e

nsur

es lo

gic

does

n't p

rodu

ce a

nou

tput

dur

ing

3-ph

ase

faul

t whe

n cu

rren

t dec

ays

belo

w1.

25IN

V1

> 12

.8 V

V2

> 0.

33 V

1

I 2 >

0.16

7 I 1

I 1 >

0.33

A

VC <

0.0

5 V

N

VA <

0.0

5 V

N

OR

Pro

tect

ion

Fun

ctio

n B

lock

Sig

nal b

y In

tern

al F

L L

ogic

Fig

ure

2-46

Fus

e L

oss

(60F

L)

Fun

ctio

n L

ogic

Application – 2

2–61

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�!&$��'�*�$��'��

�(��)� ��)*�( ��!&��)*�(� !&$�

$� ! " # � � ��(

��:�� ! " # � � �

F$� ! " # � � �

��*��@��

��((�:��(�$��(��(�(*�� +�(� ��+�(�

Figure 2-47 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges


2–62

64B/F Field Ground Protection64F Field Ground DetectionA typical connection diagram for Field GroundProtection is given in Figure 2-48. This functionrequires the connection of an external coupler(M-3921). To improve accuracy and minimize theeffects of stray capacitance, the M-3921 FieldGround Coupler should be mounted close to theexciter. Connections from the coupler to the relayshould use low capacitance shielded cable, and beas short as possible. Cable shield should beterminated at the relay end to Terminal 36 (SeeFigure 5-5, External Connections). If cabling between

the coupler and relay exceeds 100 feet, provisionsshould be made for in circuit calibration to nullifythe effects of cabling capacitance. See Section6.4, Auto Calibration, for calibration procedure.

The Field Ground function provides detection ofinsulation breakdown between the excitation fieldwinding and the ground. There are two pickup andtime delay settings, and one adjustable injectionfrequency setting for the 64F function. The adjustablefrequency is provided to compensate for the amountof capacitance across the field winding and theground so that the function accuracy is improved.Ranges and increments are presented in Figure2-49.

:,�� ,��!'�#�"�

:,��,

$�(��(�(*��

�>��(,��(�(�(��

��@��!(��(�(��

��:��*(��@,%�

��:�� ,3�!'�(��

��A!�*��(�$��(

��

��::��*��

�(�%,��

�

�"

�!

�"

,(��(��*��:�� %

��(��+�(

�#

��

*

*��

��(�

��

��

Figure 2-48 M-3921 Field Ground Coupler

64F #1 PICKUP________ kOhm

64F #1 DELAY________ Cycles



Application – 2

2–63

The following Table gives typical frequency settingsbased on the rotor capacitance. The rotorcapacitance can be measured with a capacitancemeter by connecting the meter across the fieldwinding to ground.

otgnidniWdleiFecnaticapaCdnuorG

gnitteSycneuqerFlacipyT

1 2ot μF zH25.0

3ot2 μF zH94.0

4ot3 μF zH64.0

5ot4 μF zH34.0

5 6ot μF zH93.0

7ot6 μF zH53.0

8ot7 μF zH23.0

9ot8 μF zH03.0

01ot9 μF zH82.0

01> μF zH62.0

Table 2-5 Typical Frequency Settings

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�!#$A��'�$��,�� :,��

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

!#�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(

��*(�

:�*��

�(��)�

"�3��

��)*�(

�&&�3��

��!&��)*�(�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"�3��

��)*�(

�&&�3��

��!&��)*�(�

:�*��

�(��)�

&��*

��)*�(

"&&&��*

��!&��)*�(�

$�(>�(�*)� &%�&�� %&&��

!#$I�

!#$I�

Figure 2-49 Field Ground Protection (64B/F) Setpoint Ranges

88888 WARNING: Machine should be off-line andfield excitation should be off during thecapacitance measurement.

■ NOTE: Field breaker should be closed for thecapacitance measurements.


2–64

64B Brush Lift-Off DetectionBrush Lift-Off Detection (64B) provides detection ofopen brushes of the rotor shaft. This function worksin conjunction with the 64F Field Ground Detectionfunction, and requires the M-3921 Field GroundCoupler.

When 64B operates, indicating open brushconditions, the 64F Function cannot detect a fieldground. For most generators, when the brushes ofthe rotor shaft are lifted, the capacitance across thefield winding and the ground significantly reduces toless than 0.15 μF. The 64B Function analyzes thiscapacitance-related signal, and initiates an outputcontact when it detects an open brush condition.Typically, this output is used to alert operatingpersonnel of an open brush condition. Ranges andincrements are presented in Figure 2-49. The typicalpickup setting is listed in Table 2-6, Typical BrushLift-Off Pickup Settings.

In order to assure correct setting, it is recommendedthat the actual operating value be predeterminedduring the final stage of the relay installation. Byintroducing a brush-open condition, the actual valuecan be easily obtained from the relay. The followingprocedure can be used to obtain the actual operatingvalue of the 64B during an open brush condition:

88888 WARNING: Machine should be off-line andfield excitation should be off during thecapacitance measurement.

■ NOTE: Field breaker should be closed for thecapacitance measurements.

1. After installation has been completed,determine the rotor capacitance, asoutlined for the 64F function.

2. With the machine still off-line, applypower to the relay and set the 64B/Foperating frequency in accordance withthe value listed in Table 2-5, TypicalFrequency Settings.

3. Introduce a brush-open condition bydisconnecting the rotor brushes or liftingthe brushes from their ground. Observethe 64B voltage value displayed byIPScom or the relay. The displayed valueis the actual measured operating valueof the 64B function.

4. To ensure correct operation and preventerroneous trips, the Pickup Setting forthe 64B Lift-off condition should be setat 80–90% of the actual operating value.

The 64B/F Frequency is a shared setting commonto both the 64B and 64F Functions. If either functionis enabled, this setpoint is available, and should beset to compensate for the amount of capacitanceacross the field winding and ground, so that themeasurement accuracy is improved.64B PICKUP

________ mV

64B DELAY________ cycles

64B/F FREQUENCY________ Hz

To minimize measurement errors, the 64B/F frequencyshould be set according to the amount of capacitanceacross the field winding and the ground. Table 2-5 in-cludes typical settings of the frequency for capacitance,ranging from 1 μF to 10 μF.

ecnaticapaCffO-tfiLhsurBtnelaviuqE ffO-tfiLhsurBlacipyTgnitteSpukciP

52.0~50.0 μF Vm0052

Table 2-6 Typical Brush Lift-Off Pickup Setting

Application – 2

2–65

64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by LowFrequency Signal Injection■ NOTE: The Stator Ground Protection function

(64S) must be selected when theM-3425A is initially ordered.

The 100% stator ground fault protection is providedby injecting an external 20 Hz signal into the neutralof the generator. This scheme requires the followingexternal components in addition to M-3425Aprotection system:

• 20 Hz Signal-generator (BECO Part No.430-00426)

• Band-pass filter. (BECO Part No.430-00427)

• 20 Hz Measuring Current Transformer,400/5 A CT (BECO Part No. 430-00428)

The voltage signal generated by the 20 Hz signal-generator is injected into secondary of the generatorneutral grounding transformer through a band-passfilter. The band-pass filter passes the 20 Hz signaland rejects out-of-band signals. The output of the20 Hz band-pass filter is connected to the V

N input

of the M-3425A relay through a suitable voltagedivider, that limits the M-3425A to OOOOO 200 V ac. The20Hz current is also connected to the I

Ninput of the

M-3425A, through the 20Hz current transformer.

When the generator is operating normally (no groundfault) only a small amount of 20 Hz current will flowas a result of the stator capacitance to ground.When a ground fault occurs anywhere on thegenerator stator windings the 20 Hz current willincrease. The 64S function will issue a trip signalafter a set time delay when the measured 20 Hzcurrent exceeds the pickup current as illustrated inFigure 2-51.

The 64S protection can be blocked by UndervoltageInhibit. If the 20 Hz voltage (nominal 25 V) is lessthan the Undervoltage Inhibit setting (andUndervoltage Inhibit is enabled), the 64S functionwill be blocked.

The 59N function (90 to 95%) should also be usedin conjunction with 64S protection to provide backup.

▲ CAUTION: Dangerous high voltages may bepresent at the generator terminals if the 20 Hzinjection voltage is not removed when the generatoris taken out of service.

If the 20 Hz injection voltage generator receivespower from the generator terminal voltage, then the20 Hz injection voltage generator will beautomatically switched off whenever the generatorterminal voltage is not present.

64S PICKUPmAmps

64S VOLT INHIBITdisable ENABLE

64S VOLT INHIBIT________ Volts

64S DELAY________ Cycles


2–66

RL

1B1

1A1

1B4

1A3 1A4

430-00427

430-00426

20 HzBand Pass

Filter

20 HzGenerator

4A1

1A1

1A2

1A3

2A3

2A1

3A2

3A14A3

Bl

3A3

Supply VoltageDC AC+V Aux V A(L1)

-VAux V B(L2)

V C(L3)

ExternalBlock

DeviceOperative

44 45

M-3425A

52 53

400A5A

L K

l k

Max. 200 V

V N

I N

NeutralTransformer

WiringShielded

20 Hz CT

400/5 A

430-00428

Figure 2-50 64S Function Component Connection Diagram

20 Hz Injection Voltage

I20

5 V 10 V 15 V 20 V 25 V 30 V 35 V 40 V

140 %

60 %

TRIP

45 V0 V

64SPickupCurrent

Figure 2-51 64S Function Time Delay Pickup Current Correlation

Mea

sure

d 2

0 H

z C

urr

ent

Application – 2

2–67

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�!#��'��&&K��,��,��

:�*��

�(��)�

��%

��)*�(

#&��

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(

��*(�

��(��@(��+�� +�( ��+�(

"�* �&�*

Figure 2-52 100% Stator Ground Protection (64S) Setpoint Ranges


2–68

67N Residual Directional OvercurrentThe Residual Directional Overcurrent function (67N)provides protection from ground faults. The 67Nfunction can provide generator ground faultprotection. It can also provide directionaldiscrimination when multiple generators are busedtogether. The 67N Function is subject to the followingconfiguration limitations:

• VX cannot be selected if 25 (Sync) function

is enabled.

• 3V0 can only be used with Line-Ground VT

configuration.

• 87GD Function is not available if 67N isenabled.

The 67N Function operates on the residual currenteither from internal calculation (3I

0) using I

A, I

B and

IC or using a residual current input from I

N input of

the relay (this is preferred compared to 3I0). The

relay can be polarized with the neutral voltage (VN),

broken delta voltage connected at VX

input or 3V0

calculated using VA, V

B and V

C inputs. The function

provides both definite time and inverse timeelements. The inverse time element provides severalcurves. The curves available for use are shown inAppendix D, Inverse Time Curves. They cover arange from 1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. Anadditional one cycle time delay should be added tothese curves in order to obtain the relay operatingtime. Inverse time curves saturate beyond 20 timespickup. For currents in excess of 20 times pickup,operating times are fixed at the 20 time pickuplevel.

67NDT PICKUP________ Amps

67NDT DIR ELEMENTdisable ENABLE

67NDT DELAY________ Cycles

67NIT PICKUP________ Amps

67NIT DIR ELEMENTdisable ENABLE

67NIT CURVEdef inv vinv einvieci iecvi iecei ieclt

67NIT TIME DIAL________

67N MAX SENSITIVITY ANGLE________ Degrees

67N OPERATING CURRENT3I0 in

67N POLARIZING QUANTITY3V0 vn vx

Pickup value for the 67N element.

Directional discrimination enable. When disabled, this functionwill work like a 50N.

Time Delay setting.

Inverse Time Pickup

Directional discrimination enabled. When disabled, this functionwill operate like 51N.

Select the inverse time curve.

Time dial setting

Select the operating current.

Select the polarization voltage. If 3V0 is selected, VT configura-tion must be set to Line-Ground.

Application – 2

2–69

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�! ��'�,��,�� *�,��,,�

��(

��*(�

�(%��(

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

&%"��

��)*�(

�#&%&��

��!&��)*�(�

��%��(

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

��(��

&%�"��

&%"

��%&&��

��%&

��(�

�(��(��(

��

��(��(

��*�

*(�)��(��(

��

�-��(�(�)��(��(

��

��+�( ��+�(��(*��(�(��

��+�( ��+�(��(*��(�(��

!�-��(��)��@�(� &� �"(�

��& � ��(��@��(��

�*&��*��(�� * *L:��@�P��)�

��(��*L�*��+(��(�(*�(��"��)�*��*��(��+�(�%��*&�*��)�+(��(��,��('��*�*��@��%

Figure 2-53 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Setpoint Ranges


2–70

78 DIAMETER________ Ohms

78 OFFSET________ Ohms

78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE________ Ohms

78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees

78 DELAY________ Cycles

78 TRIP ON MHO EXITdisable enable

78 POLE SLIP COUNT________ slips

78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME________ Cycles

78 Out-of-StepThe Out-of-Step function (78) is used to protect thegenerator from out-of-step or pole slip conditions.This function uses one set of blinders, along with asupervisory MHO element. Ranges and incrementsare presented in Figure 2-56

The pickup area is restricted to the shaded area inFigure 2-54, Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics,defined by the inner region of the MHO circle, theregion to the right of the blinder A and the region tothe left of blinder B. For operation of the blinderscheme, the operating point (positive sequenceimpedance) must originate outside either blinder Aor B, and swing through the pickup area for a timegreater than or equal to the time delay setting andprogress to the opposite blinder from where theswing had originated. When this scenario happens,the tripping logic is complete. The contact willremain closed for the amount of time set by theseal-in timer delay.

XT

= Transformer Reactance

XS

= System Reactance

Xd’= Transient Reactance of the Generator

Consider, for example, Figure 2-54. If the Out-of-step swing progresses to impedance Z

0(t

0), the

MHO element and the blinder A element will bothpick up. As the swing proceeds and crosses blinderB at Z

1(t

1), blinder B will pick up. When the swing

reaches Z2(t

2), blinder A will drop out. If TRIP ON

MHO EXIT option is disabled and the timer hasexpired (t

2–t

1>time delay), then the trip circuit is

complete. If the TRIP ON MHO EXIT option isenabled and the timer has expired, then for the tripto occur the swing must progress and cross theMHO circle at Z

3(t

3) where the MHO element drops

out. Note the timer is active only in the pickupregion (shaded area). If the TRIP ON MHO EXIToption is enabled, a more favorable tripping angle isachieved, which reduces the breaker tripping duty.The relay can also be set with a Pole Slip Counter.The relay will operate when the number of pole slipsare greater than the setting, provided the Pole SlipReset Time was not expired. Typically, the PoleSlip Counter is set to 1, in which case the Pole SlipReset Time is not applicable.

Typical setting is (1.5XT+2Xd’)

Typical setting is –2Xd’.

Typical setting is (1/2) (Xd’+ XT + XS) tan(Θ–(δ/2)). Typicalvalue for δ is 120°.

Typical setting for Θ is 90°.

The time delay should be set based on the stability study. Inthe absence of such a study, it can be set between 3 and 6cycles.

This setting is typically enabled.

Typical setting is 1 pole slip.

Typical setting is 120 cycles.

Application – 2

2–71

A B

Z3(t3)

Z2(t2)

Z1(t1)

Z0(t0)

Figure 2-54 Out-of-Step Relay Characteristics

SYSTEM

A B

R

P GN F

HM

MHOELEMENT

ELEMENTS

GEN(X'

d)

TRANS

O

X

BLINDER

C

XT

XS

D

d

'

SWINGLOCUS

1.5 XT

2Xd

Figure 2-55 Out-of-Step Protection Settings

δ


2–72

��*�(��(�(��

��(��

��(��(��*(�

��(��*(��@�(�

:��(��(��

:��(��,(�(��(�

�(��)�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

� ��'��$��:

��!��-�� +�( ��+�(

��(

��*(�

&%��

'��&&%&��

&%��

&O

�

��)*�(

��)*�(

�&&%&��

�&&%&��

"&%&��

(&O

�&

��!&��)*�(�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

Figure 2-56 Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–73

81 #1 PICKUP________ Hz


81 #2 PICKUP________ Hz


81 #3 PICKUP________ Hz


81 #4 PICKUP________ Hz


81 FrequencyThe Frequency function (81) provides eitheroverfrequency or underfrequency protection of thegenerator. It has four independent pickup and timedelay settings. The overfrequency mode isautomatically selected when the frequency setpointis programmed higher than the base frequency (50or 60 Hz), and the underfrequency mode selectedwhen the setpoint is programmed below the basefrequency. Ranges and increments are presentedin Figure 2-58.

The steam turbine is usually considered to be morerestrictive than the generator at reduced frequenciesbecause of possible natural mechanical resonancein the many stages of the turbine blades. If thegenerator speed is close to the natural frequency ofany of the blades, there will be an increase invibration. Cumulative damage due to this vibrationcan lead to cracking of the blade structure.

Sample settings of the 81 function are shown inFigure 2-57. The frequency functions areautomatically disabled when the input voltage(positive sequence) is very low (typically between2.5 V and 15 V, based on the frequency.)

The 81 function should be disabled using breakercontact when the unit is offline.

These magnitude and time settings describe a curve (as shown inFigure 2-57, Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics) which isto be coordinated with the capability curves of the turbine andgenerator as well as the system underfrequency load-sheddingprogram. These capabilities are given by a description of areas ofprohibited operation, restricted time operation, and continuousallowable operation.

The underfrequency function is usually connected to trip the machinewhereas the overfrequency function is generally connected to analarm.

In order to prevent mis–operation during switching transients, thetime delay should be set to greater than five (5) cycles.


2–74

61.0

60.8

60.6

60.4

60.2

60.0

59.8

59.6

59.4

59.2

59.0

Time (cycles)

81O

ver

Fre

qu

ency

(H

z)81

Un

der

Fre

qu

ency

(H

z)

Trip

Trip

Over FrequencyTime Delay #2

Over FrequencyTime Delay #1

Under FrequencyTime Delay #4

Under FrequencyTime Delay #3

Over FrequencyMagnitude #1

Under FrequencyMagnitude #4

Over FrequencyMagnitude #2

Under FrequencyMagnitude #3

Figure 2-57 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��'�$,�P��

:�*��

�(��)�

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

! %&&��

!""&&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

! %&&��

!""&&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

! %&&��

!""&&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

! %&&��

!""&&��)*�(�

I#

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

��(

��*(�

Figure 2-58 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–75

81A Frequency AccumulatorFrequency Accumulation feature (81A) provides anindication of the amount of off frequency operationaccumulated.

Turbine blades are designed and tuned to operate atrated frequencies, operating at frequencies differentthan rated can result in blade resonance and fatiguedamage. In 60 Hz machines, the typical operatingfrequency range for 18 to 25 inch blades is 58.5 to61.5 Hz and for 25 to 44 inch blades is between 59.5and 60.5 Hz. Accumulated operation, for the life ofthe machine, of not more than 10 minutes forfrequencies between 56 and 58.5 Hz and not morethan 60 minutes for frequencies between 58.5 and59.5 Hz is acceptable on typical machines.

The 81A function can be configured to track offnominal frequency operation by either set point orwhen the frequency is within a frequency band.

81A #1 HIGH BAND PICKUP________ Hz

81A #1 LOW BAND PICKUP________ Hz

81A #1 DELAY________ Cycles











When using multiple frequency bands, the lowerlimit of the previous band becomes the upper limitfor the next band, i.e., Low Band #2 is the upperlimit for Band #3, and so forth. Frequency bandsmust be used in sequential order, 1 to 6. Band #1must be enabled to use Bands #2–#6. If any band isdisabled, all following bands are disabled.

When frequency is within an enabled band limit,accumulation time starts (there is an internal tencycle delay prior to accumulation), this allows theunderfrequency blade resonance to be establishedto avoid unnecessary accumulation of time. Whenaccumulated duration is greater than set delay,then the 81A function operated the programmedoutput contact. The contact can be used to alert theoperator or trip the machine.


2–76

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��( ��*(�

��@��:�*��

��,�:�*��

�(��)�

�**%��

"&%&&��

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

&��)*�(

! %&&��

! %&&��

�!&&&&��)*�(�

�!&&&&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

,(�(�

��,�:�*��

�(��)�

�**%��

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

&��)*�(

! %&&��

�!&&&&��)*�(�

�!&&&&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

,(�(�

��,�:�*��

�(��)�

�**%��

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

&��)*�(

! %&&��

�!&&&&��)*�(�

�!&&&&��)*�(�

I"

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

,(�(�

��,�:�*��

�(��)�

�**%��

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

&��)*�(

! %&&��

�!&&&&��)*�(�

�!&&&&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

,(�(�

��,�:�*��

�(��)�

�**%��

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

&��)*�(

! %&&��

�!&&&&��)*�(�

�!&&&&��)*�(�

I#

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

,(�(�

��,�:�*��

�(��)�

�**%��

"&%&&��

��)*�(�

&��)*�(

! %&&��

�!&&&&��)*�(�

�!&&&&��)*�(�

I!

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

,(�(�

��$,�P�� !��,

Figure 2-59 Frequency Accumulator (81A) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–77

81R Rate of Change of FrequencyThe Rate of Change of Frequency function (81R)can be used for load shedding applications.

The function also has an automatic disable feature,to disable 81R function during unbalanced faults

and other system disturbances. This feature usesnegative sequence voltage to block 81R function.When the measured negative sequence voltageexceeds the inhibit setting, the function 81R andmetering are blocked. The time delay and magnitudesettings of 81R should be based on simulationstudies. The ranges and increments are presentedin Figure 2-60.

81R #1 PICKUP________ Hz/s

81R #1 DELAY________ Cycles

81R #2 PICKUP________ Hz/s


81R NEG SEQ VOLT INHIBIT________ %

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��,��'�,��$�� $�$,�P��

:�*��

�(��)�

&%�&��A�

��)*�(�

�&%&��A�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

&%�&��A�

��)*�(�

�&%&��A�

��!&��)*�(�

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

(@��(>%*��+�� &K ((K

Figure 2-60 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges


2–78

87 Phase DifferentialThe Phase Differential function (87) is a percentagedifferential with an adjustable slope of 1–100%.Although this protection is used to protect themachine from all internal winding faults, single-phase to ground faults in machines with highimpedance grounding may have currents less thanthe sensitivity of the differential relay (typicallybetween 3 and 30 primary amps). Ranges andincrements are presented in Figure 2-62.

Turn-to-turn faults are not detected by differentialrelays because the current into the generator equalsthe current out (see functions 50DT and 59X forturn-to-turn fault protection.) Even though thepercentage differential relay is more tolerant of CTerrors, all CTs should have the same characteristicsand accuracies.

To provide restraint for CT saturation at high offsetcurrents, the slope is automatically adjusted (at arestraining current equal to two times nominalcurrent) to four times the slope setting, see Figure2-61.

For very high currents in large generators, theproximity of CTs and leads in different phases cancause unbalanced currents to flow in thesecondaries. These currents must be less than theminimum sensitivity of the relay.

There are two elements in this function. Element #2is intended to provide phase differential protectionfor SFC (Static Frequency Converter) starting gasturbine generator applications. Element #1 shouldbe disabled with a contact blocking input during aconverter start operation (generator off-line), sincethe current is carried by only neutral side CTs andthe resulting differential current may mis-operate87#1 function. The 87#2 element, which is set witha higher current pickup, will still provide protectionfor this condition.

87 #1 PICKUP________ Amps

87 #1 SLOPE________ %



87 #2 SLOPE________ %


87 PHASE CT CORRECTION________

A typical setting is 0.3 amps.

A typical setting is 10%.

A typical setting is one cycle. Typical settings given above assumematched current transformer performance, and that transformer in-rush of the unit transformer does not cause dc saturation of the gen-erator CTs. If there is a significant difference in current transformerratings (C800 vs C200, for example), or if saturation of the generatorCTs is expected during energizing of the step up transformer, moreappropriate settings might be 0.5 A pick up, 20% slope, and a delay of5 to 8 cycles.

If line side and neutral side CTs do not have the same ratio, the ratioerror can be corrected (the line side measured current is multiplied bythe phase CT correction settings.)

Application – 2

2–79

I2��B�8��

��!��

��!��

��!��

"�#��$

��

%�&�'��

%�&�'�(��

��%

Where IA and Ia are generator high side and neutral side currents respectively, and CTC is theCT Phase correction.

Figure 2-61 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

�� '�:��$$�,� ��,,�

:�*��

�(��)�

:(�*(��(�

&%�&��

��)*�(

�K

�%&&��

��!&��)*�(�

�&&K

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:�*��

�(��)�

:(�*(��(�

&%�&��

��)*�(

�K

�%&&��

��!&��)*�(�

�&&K

I�

��:�� ! " # � � � $� ! " # � � �

��*��@��F

:��(��(*�� &%"& �%&&

Figure 2-62 Phase Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges


2–80

87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) DifferentialThe Zero Sequence Differential function (87GD)provides ground fault protection for low impedancegrounded generator applications. High sensitivityand fast operation can be obtained using thisfunction. Ranges and increments are presented inFigure 2-63.

The relay provides a CT Ratio Correction Factor(R

C) which removes the need for auxiliary CTs when

the phase and neutral CT ratios are different.

When the system can supply zero sequence currentto the ground fault (such as when several generatorsare bussed together), the 87GD function operatesdirectionally. The directional element calculates theproduct (–3I

0INCosØ) for directional indication. The

relay will operate only if I0 (Zero sequence current

derived from phase CTs) and IN (Neutral current

from Neutral CT) have the opposite polarity, whichis the case for internal generator faults.

The advantage of directional sensitivity is the securityagainst ratio errors and CT saturation during faultsexternal to the protected generator.

The directional element is inoperative if the residualcurrent (3I

0 ) is approximately less than 0.2 A, in

which case the algorithm automatically disables thedirectional element and the 87GD function becomesnon-directional differential. The pickup quantity isthen calculated as the difference between thecorrected triple zero-sequence current (R

C3I

0) and

the neutral current (IN). The magnitude of the

difference (RC3I

0–I

N) is compared to the relay pickup.

For security purposes during external high phase-fault currents causing CT saturation, this function isdisabled any time the value of I

N is less than

approximately 0.20 amps.

■ NOTE: When 87DG is enabled, 67N function isnot available.

87GD PICKUP________ Amps

87GD DELAY________ Cycles

87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT________

A typical setting is 0.2 amps. (Relay amps = primary amps ÷ CTratio.) For higher values of R

C, noise may create substantial differential

current making higher pickup settings desirable.

In order to prevent mis-operation during external faults with CTsaturation conditions, a time delay of 6 cycles or higher isrecommended.

CT Ratio Correction Factor = (Phase CT Ratio)/(Neutral CT Ratio)

�$� ! " # � � �

&%�&��

��)*�(

&%�&

�&%&&��

��!&��)*�(�

%((

�� '��,�� $$�,� ��

��*��@��:�� ! " # � � �

��(

��*(�

:�*��

(��)�

��,��

I�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

F

Figure 2-63 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–81

Breaker MonitoringThe Breaker Monitoring feature calculates an estimateof the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts bymeasuring and integrating the current (IT) or currentsquared (I2T) passing through the breaker contactsduring the interruption period. The per-phase valuesare added to an accumulated total for each phase,and then compared to a user-programmed thresholdvalue. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase,

the relay can operate a programmable output contact.The accumulated value for each phase can bedisplayed as an actual value. The accumulation startsafter a set time delay from the initiate point to accountfor the time it takes for the breaker to start opening itscontacts. The accumulation continues until the currentdrops below 10% of the nominal current setting or 10cycles, whichever occurs first.

BM PICKUP__________ kA-cycles

BM INPUT INITIATEi6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

BM OUTPUT INITIATE08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

BM DELAY________ Cycles

BM TIMING METHODit i2t

&��

&%��)*�(

"&&&&��

#&("%(��)*�(�

��!��'��,��3�,�!� ��,

��(

��*(�

:�*��

�(��)�

I�

��*��@��

� ! " # � � �

��(

� ! " # � � �

��:��

� ! " # � � �

��(

� ! " # � � �

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

&��)*�(�

&��)*�(�

&��)*�(�

"&&&&��)*�(�

"&&&&��)*�(�

"&&&&��)*�(�

:��(��

:��(��

:��(��

:�(�(��**��

��@�!(��(�(*�� Q�

$�

Figure 2-64 Breaker Monitor (BM) Setpoint Ranges


2–82

Trip Circuit MonitoringExternal connections for the Trip Circuit Monitoringfunction are shown in Figure 2-65. The default TripCircuit Monitor input voltage is 250 V dc. SeeSection 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers,Table 5-3 for other available trip circuit input voltageselections.

This function should be programmed to block whenthe breaker is open, as indicated by 52b contactinput (IN1).

When the Output Contact is open, and continuityexists in the Trip Circuit, a small current flows thatactivates the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If theTrip Circuit is open, and the output contact is open,

no current flows and the Trip Circuit MonitoringInput is deactivated. An Output Contact that iswelded closed would also cause the Trip CircuitMonitoring Input to deactivate, indicating failure ofthe Output Contact.

When the Output Contact is closed, no currentflows in the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If theM-3425A has issued a trip command to close theOutput Contact and Trip Circuit Monitoring Inputremains activated, this is an indication that theOutput Contact failed to close.

The output of the Trip Circuit Monitoring functioncan be programmed as an alarm to alertmaintenance personnel.

TCM DELAY________ Cycles

!'�#�"�

�A;H2�;A06;#�E<;#EA;<F2�<H6#

�6#H6#�E<#/0#

�

�

�682�<H6#

��2EA2��A;H2�E;7

�#/#;E<�/##:AJ

.

Figure 2-65 Trip Circuit Monitoring Input

�(��)� ��)*�( ��!&��)*�(� �

��'�,�:��,��!� ��,

��(

��*(�

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

$� ! " # � � ��*��@��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

Figure 2-66 Trip Circuit Monitor (TC) Setpoint Ranges

Application – 2

2–83

IPSlogic™The relay provides six logic functions and associatedIPSlogic. The logic functions can be used to allowexternal devices to trip through the relay, providingadditional target information for the external device.More importantly, these functions can be used inconjunction with IPSlogic to expand the capabilityof the relay by allowing the user to define customizedoperating logic.

Programming the IPSlogic can only be implementedthrough IPScom® Communications Software. TheIPSlogic cannot be programmed using the Human-Machine Interface (HMI).

IPS LOGICUSE IPSCOM TO CONFIGURE


2–84

Blo

ckin

g In

puts

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Pro

gram

mab

leIn

puts

1-6

Blo

ck V

iaC

om

mun

icat

ion

Po

int

Initi

atin

g In

puts

Initi

atin

g F

unct

ion

Trip

incl

udes

ext

erna

l ele

men

ts

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or/

No

r/N

and

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Pro

gram

mab

leIn

puts

1-6

Tim

ed O

ut

Pic

ked

Up

Initi

atin

g O

utpu

ts

Sel

ecta

ble

And

/Or

Pro

gram

mab

leO

utpu

ts 1

-8

Initi

ate

Via

Co

mm

unic

atio

nP

oin

t

Pro

gram

med

Tim

e D

elay

Pro

gram

med

Out

puts

1-8

Log

Tar

get

1-65

,500

cyc

les

(109

1sec

)

Log

Pic

kup

Pro

gram

med

Pro

lile

Set

ting

Gro

up 1

-4

IPS

logi

cA

ctiv

ated

Thi

s se

ctio

n of

the

IPS

log

icin

itiat

es th

e F

unct

ion

Out

put

Thi

s se

ctio

n of

the

IPS

log

ic u

sed

to B

lock

the

Fun

ctio

n O

utp

ut

Thi

s se

ctio

n of

the

IPS

log

icus

ed to

act

ivat

e th

e d

esir

ed O

utp

ut

Pro

gram

mab

le fu

nctio

n(s)

Fig

ure

2-67

IPSl

ogic

™ F

unct

ion

Setu

p

Application – 2

2–85

Settings and Logic Applicable whenIPSlogic™ Function(s) programmed usingIPScom®

There are four initiating input sources: InitiatingOutputs, Initiating Function Trips, Function Pickup(including the IPSlogic Functions themselves),Initiating Inputs, and initiation using theCommunication Port. The only limitation is that anIPSlogic Function may not be used to initiate itself.There are two blocking input sources: BlockingInputs and blocking using the Communication Port.

The activation state of the input function selectedin the Initiating Function can be either timeout(Trip) or pickup. The desired time delay for securityconsiderations can be obtained in the IPSlogicFunction time delay setting.

The IPSlogic Function can be programmed toperform any or all of the following tasks:

• Change the Active Setting Profile

• Close an Output Contact

• Be activated for use as an input to anotherExternal Function

Since there are six IPSlogic Functions per settingprofile, depending on the number of different relaysettings defined, the scheme may provide up to 24different logic schemes. The IPScom IPSlogicFunction programming screen is shown in Figure2-68.

F��, � �G��(��(�(*�(��H

��

I� I� I� I# I" I!

I�

� ! " # � � �

��@��

��(��*��:��

��*��*��:��

� ! " # � � �

��@��

�$� ! " # � � �

��*��@��

��:��

� ! " # � � �

F

��( ��*(�

��)*�( ��!&��)*�(�

:��(

I� I� I� I# ��*��(�

�,

�,

�,

�,

�,

�,

�,

�,

� �

�:��I��*��(�

�(��)�

:��

��@�$��*��(��

��@�$��*��:�*��

Figure 2-68 IPSlogic Function Programing


2–86

�3

��*(�

� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�� $�#��I�� $�#��I�� $�#�� $�"�� $�"�

� $! �� $! �� $ �� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�� $��I#

� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �I�� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�

� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�� $��I#� $��I"� $��I!� $��,�I�� $��,�I�

� $#&�I�� $#&�I�� $#&*�� $#&*�� $#!�� $#!�� $#(�I�� $#(�I�

� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �� :��I�� :��I�� :��I�� :��I#� �:��I"� �:��I!

� $"&�$� $"&�I�� $"&�I�� $"& � $"&��I�� $"&��I�� $"&� � $"�

� $�!� $�

� $"�*� $"(�I�� $"(�I�� $"(�I�� $"(�� $"( �I�� $"( �I�� $"( �I�

� $"(LR�� $"(LR�� $!&$�� $!#$�I�� $!#$�I�� $!#�� $!#�

�!�"�#"�!��$%!�"��!��&'�%"

Figure 2-69 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout

�3

��*(�

� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�� $�#��I�� $�#��I�� $�#�� $�"�� $�"�

� $! �� $! �� $ �� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�� $��I#

� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �I�� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�

� $��I�� $��I�� $��I�� $��I#� $��I"� $��I!� $��,�I�� $��,�I�

� $#&�I�� $#&�I�� $#&*�� $#&*�� $#!�� $#!�� $#(�I�� $#(�I�

� $� �I�� $� �I�� $� �� :��I�� :��I�� :��I�� :��I#� �:��I"� �:��I!

� $"&�$� $"&�I�� $"&�I�� $"& � $"&��I�� $"&��I�� $"&� � $"�

� $�!� $�

� $"�*� $"(�I�� $"(�I�� $"(�I�� $"(�� $"( �I�� $"( �I�� $"( �I�

� $"(LR�� $"(LR�� $!&$�� $!#$�I�� $!#$�I�� $!#�� $!#�

�!�"�#"�!��$%!�"��!��(%)

Figure 2-70 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup

Operation – 3

3–1

3 Operation

3.1 Front Panel Controls .................................................................. 3–1

3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ................................................ 3–5

3.3 Setup Unit Data .......................................................................... 3–5

3.4 Setup System Data .................................................................... 3–6

3.5 Status/Metering .......................................................................... 3–9

3.6 Target History ........................................................................... 3–10

Arrow PushbuttonsThe left and right arrow pushbuttons are used tochoose among the displayed menu selections. Whenentering values, the left and right arrow pushbuttonsare used to select the digit (by moving the cursor) ofthe displayed setpoint that will be increased ordecreased by the use of the up and downpushbuttons.

The up and down arrow pushbuttons increase ordecrease input values or change between upperand lower case inputs. If the up or down pushbuttonis pressed when adjusting numerical values, thespeed of increment or decrement is increased.

EXIT PushbuttonThe EXIT pushbutton is used to exit from a displayedscreen and move up the menu tree. Any changedsetpoint in the displayed screen will not be saved ifthe selection is aborted using the EXIT pushbutton.

ENTER PushbuttonThe ENTER pushbutton is used to choose ahighlighted menu selection, to replace a setpoint orother programmable value with the currently displayedvalue, or to move down within the menu tree.

Target & Status Indicators and ControlsThe target/status indicators and controls consist ofthe POWER SUPPLY (2) LEDs, RELAY OK LED,the OSCILLOGRAPH TRIG LED, BREAKERCLOSED LED, TARGET LED, DIAGNOSTIC LEDand TIME SYNC LED.

This chapter contains information that describesthe operation of the M-3931 Human Machine InterfaceModule (HMI) and the M-3925A Target module. Itfurther describes the direct setting and configurationprocedures for entering all required data to the relay.Included in this chapter is a description of theprocess necessary for review of setpoints and timing,monitoring function status and metering quantities,viewing the target history, and setup of theoscillograph recorder.

3.1 Front Panel Controls

The relay has been designed to be set andinterrogated locally with the optional HMI panel. Anintegral part of this design is the layout and functionof the front panel indicators and controls, illustratedin Figure 3-1.

Alphanumeric DisplayTo assist the operator in setting and interrogatingthe relay locally, the HMI displays menus whichguide the operator to the desired function or setpointvalue. These menus consist of two lines. The bottomline lists lower case abbreviations of each menuselection with the chosen menu selection shown inuppercase. The top menu line provides a descriptionof the chosen menu selection.

Screen BlankingThe display will automatically blank after exitingfrom the Main Menu, or from any screen after five(5) minutes of unattended operation. To wake up thedisplay, the user must press any key except EXIT.


3–2

Power Supply #1 (#2) LEDThe green PS LED indicator will remain illuminatedfor the appropriate power supply whenever power isapplied to the unit and the power supply is operatingcorrectly. A second power supply is available as anoption.

Relay OK LEDThe green RELAY OK LED is controlled by therelay's microprocessor. A flashing RELAY OK LEDindicates proper program cycling. The LED can alsobe programmed to be continuously illuminated.

Oscillograph Recorded LEDThe red OSC TRIG LED will illuminate to indicatethat oscillographic data has been recorded in theunit’s memory and is available for download.

Breaker Closed LEDThe red BRKR CLOSED LED will illuminate toindicate when the breaker status input IN1 (52b) isopen.

Target Indicators and Target ResetWhen a condition exists that causes the operationof outputs 1 through 8, the TARGET LED willilluminate, indicating a relay operation. The TARGETLED will remain illuminated until the conditioncausing the trip is cleared, and the operator pressesthe TARGET RESET pushbutton. For units equippedwith the optional M-3925A Target Module, additionaltargeting information is available. The Target moduleincludes an additional 24 target LEDs, and 8 outputstatus LEDs. LEDs corresponding to the particularoperated function as well as the present state of theoutputs are available. Pressing and holding theTARGET RESET pushbutton will display the presentpickup status of all functions available on the targetmodule. This is a valuable diagnostic tool whichmay be used during commissioning and testing.

Time Sync LEDThe green TIME SYNC LED will illuminate to indicatethat the IRIG-B time signal is received and theinternal clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B timesignal. IRIG-B time information is used to accuratelytag target and oscillograph events.

Diagnostic LEDThe diagnostic DIAG LED will flash when a self-testerror is detected. The LED will flash the Error Codenumber; for example, for Error Code 32, the LED

will flash 3 times, followed by a short pause, andthen flash 2 times, followed by a long pause, thenrepeat LED flash sequence. For units equipped withthe HMI, the Error Code number is also displayedon the screen.

Accessing ScreensTo prevent unauthorized access to relay functions,the unit includes a provision for assigning accesscodes. If access codes have been assigned, theaccess code entry screen will be displayed afterENTER is pressed from the default message screen.

Default Message ScreensWhen power is applied to the unit, the relay performsa number of self-tests to ensure that it is operatingcorrectly. During the self-tests, the screen displaysan “X” for each test successfully executed.

If all self-tests are executed successfully, the relaywill briefly display the word PASS and then a seriesof status screens that include:

• Model Number

• Software Version Number

• Serial Number

• Date and time as set in the system clock

• User Logo Screen

If a test fails, an error code will be displayed and therelay will not allow operation to proceed. In such acase, the error code should be noted and the factorycontacted. A list of error codes and their descriptionsare provided in Appendix C, Error Codes.

When the relay has power applied and is unattended,the user logo lines are blanked.

If a function has operated and the targets have notbeen reset, the screen will display the time and dateof the operation and automatically cycle throughscreens for each applicable target (see Figure 3-2).Pressing the ENTER pushbutton will enter localmode operation, displaying the access code entryscreen or, if access codes have been disabled, thefirst level menu.

Figure 3-3 presents the software menu flow map forHMI-equipped units. This map can be used as aquick reference guide to aid in navigating the relay'smenus.

Operation – 3

3–3

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

�� !��"#$��

� �!�%"#$��

��&'��()*"��'�+��,�

�#��))�!!�)�$�

��'��))�!!��#��$-

�))�!!�$�#(�$-

./�0�!, �!1�,2,3�45�)*6(� ��)��()�)�

��/ �'

��'78247��/��'9�.9��

�

� 4,��%40��2��%��

��&'��2��"40��,2:�

��

;;;;;;;;��6��#�!��<��!�!

��!!��6��#�!��<��!�!

!��(��#"=5��'/�

�'78247��/��'.9�>9/�

��

��

��./�0�!, �!1�,2,3�45��?�3,��,�3��)�

5��?�3,��,�3��)�

5��?�3,��,�3��)�

5��?�3,��,�3��)�

��

��

��

��

��

��=7/>�.�5��?�3,��,�3��)�

��

Figure 3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow

Figure 3-1 M-3425A Front Panel


3–4

VOLTAGE RELAYVOLT curr freq v/hz

• 27 Phase Undervoltage• 59 Phase Overvoltage• 27TN Neutral Undervoltage• 59X Overvoltage• 59N Neutral Overvoltage• 59D Volt. Diff. 3rd Har.

CURRENT RELAYvolt CURR freq v/Hz

• 46 Neg Seq Overcurrent• 50 Inst Overcurrent• 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing• 50BF Breaker Failure• 50DT Def Time Overcurr• 50N Inst Overcurrent• 51N Inv Time Overcurrent• 49 Stator Overload• 51V Inv Time Overcurrent• 87 Differential Overcurr• 87GD Gnd Diff Overcurr• 67N Res Dir Overcurr

FREQUENCY RELAYvolt curr FREQ v/hz

• 81 Frequency• 81R Rate of Change Freq• 81A Frequency Accum

VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAYvolt curr freq V/HZ

• 24 Def Time Volts/Hertz• 24 Inv Time Volts/Hertz

POWER RELAY PWR lof fuse dist

• 32 Directional Power

LOSS OF FIELD RELAY pwr LOF fuse dist

• 40 Loss of Field

V. T. FUSE LOSS RELAY pwr los FUSE dist

• 60FL V. T. Fuse Loss

PHASE DISTANCE RELAY pwr lof fuse DIST

• 21 Phase Distance• 78 Out of Step

FIELD GROUND RELAYFIELD stator sync

• 64B/F Field Ground

STATOR GROUND RELAY field STATOR sync

• 64S Stator Ground

SYNC CHECK RELAY field stator sync

• 25S Sync Check• 25D Dead Volt

BREAKER MONITORBRKR trpckt ipslog

• Set Breaker Monitoring• Preset Accumulators• Clear Accumulators

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITORbrkr TRPCKT ipslog

• Trip Circuit Monitor

IPS LOGICbrkr trpckt IPSLOG

• IPS Logic

CONFIGURE RELAYCONFIG sys stat

• Voltage Relay• Current Relay• Frequency Relay• Volts per Hertz Relay• Power Relay• Loss of Field Relay• V.T. Fuse Loss Relay• Phase Distance Relay• Field Gnd Relay• Stator Gnd Relay• Sync Check Relay• Breaker Mon Relay• Trip Ckt Mon Relay• IPSLogic Relay

SETUP SYSTEMconfig SYS stat

• Input Activated Profiles• Active Setpoint Profile• Copy Active Profile• Nominal Voltage• Nominal Current• V. T. Configuration• Delta-Y Transform• Phase Rotation • 59/27 Magnitude Select• 50DT Split-phase Operate• Pulse Relay• Latched Outputs• Relay Seal-in Time• Active Input State• V.T. Phase Ratio• V.T. Neutral Ratio• V.T. VX Ratio• C.T. Phase Ratio• C.T. Neutral Ratio

STATUSconfig sys STAT

• Voltage Status• Current Status• Frequency Status• V/Hz Status• Power Status• Impedance Status• Sync Check Status• Breaker Mon Acc Status• 81A Accumulators Status• In/Out Status• Timer Status• Relay Temperature• Counters• Time of Last Powerup• Error Codes• Checksums

VIEW TARGET HISTORYTARGETS osc_rec comm

• View Target History• Clear Target History

OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDERtargets OSC_REC comm

• View Record Status• Clear Records• Recorder Setup

COMMUNICATIONtargets osc_rec COMM

• COM1 Setup• COM2 Setup• COM3 Setup• Communication Address• Comm Access Code• Ethernet

SETUP UNITSETUP exit

• Software Version• Serial Number• Alter Access Codes• User Control Number• User Logo Line 1• User Logo Line 2• Clear Output Counters• Clear Alarm Counter• Date & Time• Clear Error Codes• Ethernet Firmware Ver.• Diagnostic Mode

EXIT LOCAL MODE setup EXIT

■ NOTE: Depending on which functions are purchased, somemenus may not appear.

Figure 3-3 Main Menu Flow

Operation – 3

3–5

3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings

The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is shippedfrom the factory with all functions disabled (user willonly be able to enable purchased functions).

The Setup Procedure provided below is a suggestedsetup procedure for initially entering settings intothe relay. While it is written for HMI-equipped units,the same procedure is applicable when setting therelay through remote communication utilizingM-3820D IPScom® Communications Software.

Following the Setup Procedure are several sectionswhich provide additional detail concerning thesettings required for proper commissioning.

Setup Procedure■ NOTE: Configuration Record forms are available

in Appendix A, Configuration RecordForms, to record settings for futurereference.

1. Enter the Setup Unit data. This is generalinformation required including alteringaccess codes, setting date and time,defining user logos, and otheradjustments. See Section 3.3, SetupUnit Data.

2. Configure the Setup System data. Thisis the general system and equipmentinformation required for operation,including such items as CT and VT ratios,VT configuration, and Nominal values.See Section 3.4, Setup System Datasubsection.

3. Enable the desired functions andelements. See Section 3.4, ConfigureRelay Data subsection.

4. Enter the desired setpoints for theenabled functions. See Section 3.4,Setpoints and Time Settings subsection.

5. Enter configuration information for theoscillograph recorder. See Section 3.4,Oscillograph Recorder Data subsection.

6. If remote communication is used, setthe parameters as needed. See Section3.4, Communications Settingssubsection, or in Chapter 4, RemoteOperation.

3.3 Setup Unit Data

■ NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,for a list of submenus associated withthe SETUP UNIT menu.

To access the SETUP UNIT menu proceed asfollows:

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton to displaythe main menu.

2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilSETUP UNIT is displayed on the topline of the screen.

3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe SETUP UNIT menu.

SETUP UNIT setup exit

4. Press the ENTER pushbutton to movedown within the SETUP UNIT menu tothe desired category. To exit a specificcategory and continue to the next menucategory, press the EXIT pushbutton.

Setup Unit Data EntryThe general information required to complete theentry of Setup Unit Data includes:

Access Codes: The relay includes three levels ofaccess codes. Depending on their assigned code,users have varying levels of access to the installedfunctions.

1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints,monitor status, view target history.

2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1privileges, plus read & changesetpoints, target history, set timeclock.

3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2privileges, plus access to allconfiguration functions and settings.

Each access code is a user-defined one- to four-digit number. Access codes can only be altered bya level 3 user.

If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, theaccess code feature is disabled. When accesscodes are disabled, the access screens arebypassed, and all users have full access to all therelay menus. The relay is shipped from the factorywith the access code feature disabled.


3–6

User Control Number: This is a user-defined valuewhich can be used for inventory or identification.The relay does not use this value, but it can beaccessed through the HMI or the communicationsinterface, and can be read remotely.

User Logo: The user logo is a programmable, two-line by 24-character string, which can be used toidentify the relay, and which is displayed locallywhen the relay is idle. This information is alsoavailable remotely.

Date and Time: This screen is used to view and setthe relay's internal clock. The clock is used to timestamp system events such as trip and oscillographoperations.

The clock is disabled when shipped from the factory(indicated by “80” seconds appearing on the clock)to preserve battery life. If the relay is to beunpowered for an extended length of time, the clockshould be stopped (see Diagnostic Mode). If theIRIG-B interface is used, the hours, minutes, andseconds information in the clock will besynchronized with IRIG-B time information everyhour.

The relay can accept a modulated IRIG-B signalusing the rear panel BNC connector, or ademodulated TTL level signal using extra pins onthe rear panel COM2 RS-232 interface connector(see Figure B-4 for COM2 pinout.) If the TTL signalis to be used, then Jumper 5 will be required to bepositioned (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switchesand Jumpers).

Setup Unit Features That Do Not Require DataEntryThe Setup Unit menu categories that provide theuser with read only information are SoftwareVersion, Serial Number and Ethernet FirmwareVer..

The Setup Unit menu also contains features thatprovide the user with the ability to Clear OutputCounters, Clear Alarm Counter, Clear ErrorCodes and access the Diagnostic Mode. The errorcodes are described in Appendix C, Self Test ErrorCodes. Note that while the relay is in DiagnosticMode, all protective functions are inoperative.

3.4 Setup System Data

■ NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,for a list of submenus associated withthe SETUP SYSTEM menu.

To access the SETUP SYSTEM menu proceed asfollows:


2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilSETUP SYSTEM is displayed on thetop line of the screen.

3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe SETUP SYSTEM menu.


To input the data, access the menu as follows:


2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilSETUP SYSTEM is displayed on thetop line of the screen.

3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe SETUP SYSTEM menu and beginthe data input.

System setup data is required for proper operationof the relay. Information needed to complete thissection includes: Nominal Voltage, Nominal Current,VT Configuration, and other system-relatedinformation. See Section 2.1, Configuration, RelaySystem Setup subsection for a more detaileddescription of the settings required.

Operation – 3

3–7

Configure Relay Data■ NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,

for a list of submenus associated withthe CONFIGURE RELAY menu.

To input the data, access the CONFIGURE RELAYmenu as follows:


2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilCONFIGURE RELAY is displayed onthe top line of the screen.

3. Press ENTER to access theCONFIGURE RELAY menu and beginthe data input.

CONFIGURE RELAYCONFIG sys stat

The general information required to complete theinput data in this section includes:

• enable/disable

• output choices (OUT1–OUT8)

• input blocking choices (IN1–IN6), plus fuseloss blocking

Each of the purchased functions within the relaymay be individually enabled or disabled. In addition,many functions have more than one element whichmay also be enabled or disabled. Unused functionsand elements should be disabled to avoid nuisancetripping and speed up HMI response time.

After enabling a function/element, the user ispresented with two additional screens for selectionof input blocking and output contact designations.Any combination of the six control/status inputs orthe internally generated VT fuse loss logic can beselected to dynamically block the enabled function.“OR” logic is used if more than one input is selected.

Outputs are designated in a similar manner. Outputs1–6 are form “a” contacts (normally open) and outputs7 and 8 are form “c” contacts (center tapped “a” and“b” contacts). Output contacts 1–4 contain specialcircuitry for high-speed operation and pick upapproximately 4 ms faster than other contacts.

See Section 2.1, Configuration, for more information.

Setpoints and Time Settings■ NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,

for a list of submenus and specificelements associated with the Setpointsand Time Setting menus.

To input the data, access these menus as follows:


2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilVOLTAGE RELAY, the first of thesetpoint and time setting menus, isdisplayed on the top line of the screen.

■ NOTE: Some menus are dynamic, and do notappear if the function is not purchasedor is unavailable.

3. Press ENTER to begin the data input forthis menu, or continue pressing the rightarrow pushbutton until the desiredsetpoint and time setting menu isdisplayed, and then press ENTER tobegin the data input.

The general information required to complete theinput data in this section includes individual relayfunction:

• pickup settings (converted to relayquantities)

• time delay settings

• frequency settings

• time dials

• power level settings (in percent rated)

• impedance diameter in relay ohms fordistance and offset settings

Settings should be programmed based on systemanalysis as described in Chapter 2, Application. Acomplete description of the individual function aswell as guidelines for settings are explained therein.


3–8

Oscillograph Recorder Data■ NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,

for a list of submenus associated withthe OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDERmenu.

To input the data, access the OSCILLOGRAPHRECORDER menu as follows:


2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilOSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER isdisplayed on the top line of the screen.

3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER menuand begin the data input.

OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDERtargets OSC_REC comm

The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensivedata recording (voltage, current, and status input/output signals) for all monitored waveforms (at 16samples per cycle). Oscillograph data can bedownloaded using the communications ports to anyIBM compatible personal computer running theM-3820D IPScom® Communications Software. Oncedownloaded, the waveform data can be examinedand printed using the optional M-3801D IPSplot®

PLUS Oscillograph Data Analysis Software.

The general information required to complete theinput data of this section includes:

• Recorder Partitions: When untriggered,the recorder continuously recordswaveform data, keeping the data in abuffer memory. The recorder's memorymay be partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions.

When triggered, the time stamp isrecorded, and the recorder continuesrecording for a user-defined period. Thesnapshot of the waveform is stored inmemory for later retrieval using IPScomCommunications Software. The OSC TRIGLED on the front panel will indicate arecorder operation (data is available fordownloading).

• Trigger Inputs and Outputs: The recordercan be triggered remotely through serialcommunications using IPScom, orautomatically using programmed statusinputs (IN1–6) or outputs (OUT1–8).

• Post-Trigger Delay: A post-trigger delayof 5% to 95% must be specified. Aftertriggering, the recorder will continue tostore data for the programmed portion ofthe total record before rearming for thenext record. For example, a setting of80% will result in a record with 20%pretrigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.

forebmuN

snoititraP

selcyCforebmuN

noititraPhcaErep

1 selcyC274

2 selcyC513

3 selcyC632

4 selcyC981

5 selcyC751

6 selcyC531

7 selcyC811

8 selcyC501

9 selcyC49

01 selcyC58

11 selcyC87

21 selcyC27

31 selcyC76

41 selcyC36

51 selcyC95

61 selcyC55

Table 3-1 Recorder Partitions

Communications SettingsTo enter the communications settings, access theCOMMUNICATION menu as follows:

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe main menu.

2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilCOMMUNICATION is displayed on thetop line of the screen.

Operation – 3

3–9

3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe COMMUNICATION menu and beginthe data entry.


The general information required to complete thecommunications settings entry of this sectioninclude:

• Baud rate for COM1 and COM2communication ports. The COM3 port doesnot have a separate baud rate setting butuses the setting of COM2 (or COM1: seeSection 5.5 Circuit Board Switches andJumpers).

• Communications address is used toaccess multiple relays using a multidropor network communication line.

• Communications access code is used forcommunication system security (enteringan access code of 9999 disables thecommunication security).

• Communication protocol and dead synctime for COM2 and COM3.

• Parity for COM2 or COM3 if MODBUS orMODBUS over TCP/IP protocol is used.

• IP Address, Net Mask and GatewayAddress are required if the ethernet port isutilized and the network does not supportthe DHCP protocol.

Detailed information concerning setup and operationof the communication ports is described in Chapter4, Remote Operation.

3.5 Status/Metering

Monitor Status/Metering■ NOTE: Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow,

for a list of submenus associated withthe STATUS menu.

To access the STATUS menu and begin monitoring,proceed as follows:


2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilSTATUS is displayed on the top line ofthe screen.

3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe STATUS menu.

STATUSconfig sys STAT

■ NOTE: Some menus are dynamic, and do notappear if the function is not purchasedor is unavailable.

4. Press the ENTER pushbutton to movedown within the STATUS menu to thedesired category. To exit a specificcategory and continue to the next menucategory, press the EXIT pushbutton.

The menu categories for monitored values are:• Voltage Status: phase voltages, neutral

voltage, positive sequence voltage,negative sequence voltage, zero sequencevoltage, third harmonic neutral voltage,field ground measurement circuit, statorlow frequency injection voltage

• Current Status: phase currents (A–B–C/a-b-c), differential current, neutral current,ground differential current, positivesequence current, negative sequencecurrent, zero sequence current, stator lowfrequency injection current

• Frequency Status: frequency, rate ofchange of frequency

• Volts/Hz Status: volts per hertz

• Power Status: real power, reactive power,apparent power, power factor

• Impedance Status: impedance (Zab, Zbc,Zca), positive sequence impedance, fieldground resistance

• Sync Check Status: 25S Sync Checkand 25D Dead Volt

• BRKR Monitor

• 81A Accum. Status

• IN/OUT Status: Status of input and outputcontacts

• Timer: 51V Delay Timer, 51N Delay Timer,46IT Delay Timer, 51T Delay Timer, 24ITDelay Timer

• Relay Temperature

• Counters: output, alarm counter

• Time of Last Power up

• Error Codes

• Checksums: setpoints, calibration, ROM


3–10

3.6 Target History

The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay includesthe ability to store the last 32 target conditions in anonvolatile memory. A target is triggered wheneveran output is operated (OUT1–OUT8). A secondfunction attempting to operate an output (which isalready operated) will not trigger a new target, sinceno new output has been operated or closed. If thesecond function operation closes a different,unoperated output, a new target will be triggered. Atarget includes:

• an indication which function(s) haveoperated, and timers expired (operated),

• status information which indicates anyfunction that is timing (picked up),

• individual phase element information atthe time of the trigger, if the operatingfunction was a three phase function,

• phase currents at the time of operation

• neutral current at the time of operation,

• input and output status, and

• a date/time tag.

When a target is triggered, the front panel TARGETLED will light, indicating a recent event. If theoptional M-3925A Target Module is present, thecorresponding function LED will be lit. If the optionalM-3931 HMI module is available, a series of screenswill be presented, describing the most recentoperation. This information is also available remotelyby using the IPScom® Communication Software.

To access the TARGET HISTORY menu performthe following:

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton to accessthe main menu.

2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilTARGET HISTORY is displayed on thetop line of the screen.

To view Target History records proceed as follows:

1. Ensure that the View Target HistoryMenu is selected to TRGT (upper case).

VIEW TARGET HISTORYTRGT clear

If TRGT is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select TRGT.

2. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:

VIEW TARGET HISTORY1 Target number

Detailed descriptions for each View TargetHistory screen are presented on thefollowing page.

Operation – 3

3–11

TARGET 1PHASE A=X B=X C=X

TARGET 1-CURRENT STATUS-

TARGET 1a=0.02 b=0.03 c=0.04

TARGET 1N=0.50 AMPS

This display gives the phase pickup information for the specificfunction.

This screen displays the phase current at the time the targetoperated.

This screen displays the neutral current at the time the targetoperated.

VIEW TARGET HISTORYTRGT clear

VIEW TARGET HISTORY 1 Target number

TARGET 101-JAN-2001 12:27:35.125

TARGET 108 05 01

TARGET 1I3 I1

TARGET 1-OPERATE TARGETS-

TARGET 127#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

TARGET 1PHASE A=X B= C=

TARGET 1-PICKUP TARGETS-

TARGET 127#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

This screen gives access to the target history, and also allowsthe user to clear the target history record from memory.

Using up and down buttons, user may select which particulartarget to view from the last 24 recorded triggers.

This screen gives the date and time tag of the selected target.

This screen displays operated outputs.

This screen displays operated inputs at time of trip.

The following screens display the timed out or “operate” func-tions.

This screen displays the specific function which timed out andtriggered the target.

This screen displays the phase information for the displayedfunction at time out.

The following screens display the timing on “picked up” func-tions when the target was recorded.


3–12

This Page Left Intentionally Blank

1

3

A

B

C

4–1

Remote Operation – 4

44444 Remote OperationRemote OperationRemote OperationRemote OperationRemote Operation

4.1 Remote Operation ...................................................................... 4–1

4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom®) ............................................. 4–8

4.3 Operation .................................................................................... 4–8

4.4 Checkout Status/Metering (Windows) ..................................... 4–20

4.5 Cautions .................................................................................... 4–25

4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................. 4–26

4.7 IPSutil™ Communications Software ........................................ 4–27

This chapter is designed for the person or groupresponsible for the remote operation and setting ofthe relay using the M-3820D IPScomCommunications Software or other means.

4.1 Remote Operation

The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay providesthree serial communication ports and one ethernetport.

Serial Ports (RS-232)Two serial interface ports, COM1 and COM2, arestandard 9-pin, RS-232, DTE-configured ports. Thefront-panel port, COM1, can be used to locally setand interrogate the relay using a temporaryconnection to a PC or laptop computer. The secondRS-232 port, COM2, is provided at the rear of theunit. COM2 is unavailable for use when the optionalethernet port is enabled.

The individual addressing capability of IPScom andthe relay allows multiple systems to share a director modem connection when connected throughCOM2 using a communications-line splitter (seeFigure 4-1). One such device enables 2 to 6 units toshare one communications line. Appendix B, FigureB-2 illustrates a setup of RS-232 Fiber Optic network.

Serial Port (RS-485)COM3 located on the rear terminal block of theM-3425A is an RS-485, 2-wire connection. AppendixB, Figure B-3 illustrates a 2-wire RS-485 network.

Individual remote addressing also allows forcommunications through a serial multidrop network.Up to 32 relays can be connected using the same2-wire RS-485 communications line.

Optional Ethernet PortThe M-3425A when equipped with the optionalEthernet Port can be accessed from a local network.When the ethernet port is enabled the COM2 serialport (RS-232) is unavailable for use. Although theethernet connection speed is faster than the RS-232port (can be up to 10 Mbps), the ethernet moduleconnects internally through the COM2 serialconnection and is therefore limited to connectionspeeds up to 9600 bps.

Either COM2, COM3 or Ethernet port may be usedto remotely set and interrogate the relay using alocal area network, modem or other direct serialconnection. Equipment such as RTU’s, dataconcentrators, modems, or computers can beinterfaced for direct, on-line, real time dataacquisition and control. Generally, all data availableto the operator through the front panel of the relaywith the optional M-3931 HMI module is accessibleremotely through the BECO 2200, MODBUS, BECO2200 over TCP/IP or MODBUS over TCP/IP dataexchange protocols.

1

3

A

B

C


4–2

The communication protocols are used to fulfill thefollowing communications functions:

• Real-time monitoring of line status


• Downloading of recorded oscillograph data

• Reconfiguration of all relay functions

Protocol documents are available directly fromBeckwith Electric or from our websitewww.beckwithelectric.com.

Direct ConnectionIn order for IPScom to communicate with the relayusing direct serial connection, a serial “null modem”cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) forthe system, and an applicable connector for thecomputer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for anull modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,Communications.

An optional 10 foot null modem cable (M-0423) isavailable from the factory, for direct connectionbetween a PC and the relay’s front panel COM port,or the rear COM2 port.

When fabricating communication cables, every effortshould be made to keep cabling as short as possible.

Low capacitance cable is recommended. The RS-232standard specifies a maximum cable length of 50feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50 feet of cablelength is required, other technologies should beinvestigated.

Other communication topologies are possible usingthe M-3425A Generator Protection Relay. AnApplication Note, “Serial Communication withBeckwith Electric’s Integrated Protection SystemRelays” is available from the factory.

Communications-Line Splitter

Up to six controlscan be used with a

communications-line splitter.Address 2

Address 4

Address 5

Address 6

Address 3Address 1

IBM-Compatible PC

Integrated ProtectionSystem

Null Modem Cable forDirect RS-232 Connection

Master Port

Figure 4-1 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter

1

3

A

B

C

4–3


Communication Access Code: If additional linksecurity is desired, a communication access codecan be programmed. Like the user access codes, ifthe communication access code is set to 9999(default), communication security is disabled.

Individual relay communication addresses shouldbe between 1 and 200. The dead sync time, whilenot critical for most communication networks, shouldbe programmed to match the communicationschannels baud rate (see Table 4-1, below).

etaRduaB emiTcnyS-daeD

0069 sm4

0084 sm8

0042 sm61

0021 sm23

Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time

Ethernet Communication SettingsThe RJ45 ethernet port can be enabled utilizingeither IPSutil™ from the Ethernet Settings menu orfrom the HMI Communication menu. When theethernet port is enabled the COM2 Serial Port is notavailable for use.

The following parameters must be set for properethernet communication:

DHCP Protocol

ENABLE: If the network server supports the DHCPprotocol the network server will assign the IPAddress, Net Mask and Gateway Address.

DISABLE: If the network server does not supportthe DHCP protocol or the user chooses to manuallyinput ethernet settings, then obtain the IP Address,Net Mask and Gateway address from the NetworkAdministrator and enter the settings.

ETHERNET ProtocolsSERCONV:To utilize the BECO2200 protocol overa TCP/IP connection select the SERCONV(BECO2200 TCP/IP) protocol. The IP Address ofthe relay must be entered in the IPScomCommunication screen. Also, ensure that the COM2protocol is selected to BECO2200 and the baudrate is set to 9600 bps.

Setting Up the M-3425A Generator ProtectionRelay for CommunicationThe initial setup of the relay for communicationmust be completed by the optional M-3931 HMIModule or using direct serial connection.

For units shipped without the optional HMI Module,the communication parameters may be altered byfirst establishing communication using the defaultparameters and the IPSutil™ program.

IPSutil is an auxiliary program shipped on the samedisk with the IPScom® program. It is usedexclusively for altering communication and setupparameters on units shipped without the M-3931HMI Module.

Serial Communication SettingsThe following parameters must be set for properserial communication:

COM1 Baud Rate: Standard baud rates from 300 to9600 are available.

COM2 Baud Rate: Standard baud rates from 300 to9600 are available. COM2 and COM3 share thesame baud rate (see Section 5.5, Circuit BoardSwitches and Jumpers).

COM2 Dead Sync Time: This delay establishesthe line idle time to re-sync packet communication.Dead sync time should be programmed based onthe channel’s baud rate.

COM2 Protocol: BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocolis supported on COM2.

COM2 Parity: None, odd or even parity is availableif MODBUS protocol is selected.

COM2 Stop Bits: One or two stop bits available ifMODBUS protocol is selected.

COM3 Dead Sync Time: This delay establishesthe line idle time to re-sync packet communication.Dead sync time should be programmed based onthe channel’s baud rate.

COM3 Protocol: BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocolis supported on COM3.

COM3 Parity: None, odd or even parity is availableif MODBUS protocol is selected.

COM3 Stop Bits: One or two stop bits available ifMODBUS protocol is selected.

Communications Address: For multidrop networks,each device must have a unique address.

1

3

A

B

C


4–4

6. Ensure that TCP is selected (Upper Case).

If TCP is not selected (Upper Case), thenuse the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons toselect TCP.


DHCP PROTOCOLDISABLE enable

8. If the network does not support the DHCPprotocol, then go to Step 14 to manuallyconfigure the ethernet board.

9. If the DHCP Protocol is to be enabled, thenuse the Right/Left arrow pushbutton to selectENABLE (Upper Case), then press ENTER,the following will be displayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGSTCP prot

10. Ensure that PROT is selected (Upper Case).

If PROT is not selected (Upper Case), thenuse the Right arrow pushbutton to selectPROT.


SELECT PROTOCOLmodbus serconv

12. Use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons toselect the desired protocol (Upper Case),then press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGStcp PROT

13. Press EXIT, the ethernet board willreconfigure and the following will bedisplayed:

CONFIGURING ETH...

If the ethernet board successfully obtainsan IP Address the following will be displayedfor approximately 2 seconds:

ETHERNET IP ADDRESSXX.XX.XX.XX

The ethernet board is now configured foruse and may be accessed through anetwork.

The Standard Port Number for the BECO2200 overTCP/IP protocol is “Port 8800”. The master devicemay require the entry of the Standard Port Number.

MODBUS:To utilize the MODBUS protocol over aTCP/IP connection select the MODBUS (MODBUSover TCP/IP) protocol. The IP Address of the relaymust be entered in the IPScom® Communicationscreen. Also, ensure that the COM2 protocol isselected to MODBUS, baud rate is set to 9600 bps,1 stop bit and no parity selected.

The Standard Port Number for the MODBUS overTCP/IP protocol is “Port 502”. The master devicemay require the entry of the Standard Port Number.

Ethernet Port SetupEnabling the ethernet port and selecting the requiredsupport settings can be accomplished using eitherthe HMI or IPSutil™. Both methods are presentedbelow.

HMI Ethernet Port Setup1. Ensure that the Communication Menu is

selected to COMM (upper case).


If COMM is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select COMM.


COM1 SETUPCOM1 com2 com3 com_adr

3. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to selectETH (Upper Case).

ETHERNET SETUPaccess ETH eth_ip


ETHERNETDISABLE enable

5. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to selectENABLE (Upper Case), then press ENTER,the following will be displayed:


1

3

A

B

C

4–5


21. Use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons toselect the desired protocol (Upper Case),then press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGStcp PROT

22. Press EXIT, the ethernet board willreconfigure and the following will bedisplayed:

CONFIGURING ETH...

If the ethernet board is successfullyconfigured, then the entered IP Addresswill be displayed for approximately 2seconds:


The ethernet board is now configured foruse and may be accessed through anetwork.

IPSutilTM Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP1. Connect the appropriate RS232 cable from

the PC hosting IPSutil to the target relay.

2. Launch IPSutil, then select Ethernet fromthe menu bar. IPSutil will display the EthernetSettings screen Figure 4-34.

3. From the Ethernet Settings screen selectEthernet Enable.

4. Select DHCP Protocol Enable.

5. Select the desired protocol.

6. Select Save, IPSutil will respond with theAdvance Setup dialog box stating “It willtake about 15 seconds to reset Ethernetboard to allow the menu of the unit toreflect the change.”

7. Select OK, IPSutil will configure the ethernetboard, then close the Ethernet Settingsscreen. The ethernet board is nowconfigured for use and may be accessedthrough a network.

IPSutilTM Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP1. Connect the appropriate RS232 cable from

the PC hosting IPSutil to the target relay.

2. Launch IPSutil, then select Ethernet fromthe menu bar. IPSutil will display the EthernetSettings screen Figure 4-34.

If the ethernet board fails to obtain an IPAddress within 15 seconds the followingwill be displayed (for approximately 2seconds):

CONFIGURING ETH...ETH BOARD ERROR

Then the display will return to the following:

ETHERNET SETUP

access ETH eth_ip

Contact the Network Administrator todetermine the cause of the configurationfailure.

14. Ensure that DISABLE is selected (UpperCase).

If DISABLE is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Left arrow pushbutton to selectDISABLE.


IP ADDRESSXX.XX.XX.XX

16. Enter the desired IP Address, then pressENTER, the following will be displayed:

NET MASKXX.XX.XX.XX

17. Enter the desired Net Mask, then pressENTER, the following will be displayed:

GATEWAYXX.XX.XX.XX

18. Enter the desired Gateway, then pressENTER, the following will be displayed:

TCP/IP SETTINGStcp prot

19. Ensure that PROT is selected (Upper Case).

If PROT is not selected (Upper Case), thenuse the Right arrow pushbutton to selectPROT.



1

3

A

B

C


4–6

Figure 4-2 IPScom® Menu Selections

■ NOTE: Greyed-out menu items are for future release, and are not currently available.

�'"%) �

��!�"�* �

�#*�'"+ �

�',%'!�'��-��.'!"+ �

�+��//��*#)0 �

�*�-�/' �

1*�"'�$�/'��'/#2

'#3�4#"#�$*�&�'/#2

5�&&

1�!3�6

�'6�)'!7775/�+'

�#.'�#.'��+777

�*�!"

�*�!"'*��'"%)

�8�" �/"�$�

5#+�#3'

��/'

�**#!�'��!+

5/�+'��//

�$EE>;<F2#$:2�EGG2G:<62>:<9>2JE69;A:0#7J2#E2#$:2�EGG6<;0/#;E<29;/7EF2,E8�

9'/)

5�!"'!"+

�:�%"777

�*�-�/'��!-�

9'/)5�&&$�/' '/#2 1�!3�6��&

�>:A2�EFE2�;<:>-2�<;#2�9:<#;K;:A

�<;#2�99A:>>

�:7/J2�JH:$�/'

�'"%)��2+"'&

�'")��!"+

�'"�4#"';��&'

4�+)/#2

'+'"��4

5/'#*�9�+"�*2

�� !'�#�"

�*�&#*2��"#"%+

�'��!3#*2��"#"%+

��%&%/#"�*��"#"%+

�0#+'�4�+"#!�'

��++��-�$�'/3

�%"��-��"')

�0#+�*�4�#�*#&

�2!��)'

$%!�"��!��"#"%+

�6�"�0�!��'"0�3

��"�.'��*�-�/'

5�)2��*�-�/'

�'"%)

'"*�'.'

�*��'*

5/'#*

'/#2

�'"%)

'"*�'.'

<�'6

5/'#*

1

3

A

B

C

4–7


3. From the Ethernet Settings screen selectEthernet Enable.

4. Select DHCP Protocol Disable.

5. Enter values for IP Address, Net Mask andGateway.

6. Select the desired protocol.

7. Select Save, IPSutil will respond with theAdvance Setup dialog box stating “It willtake about 15 seconds to reset Ethernetboard to allow the menu of the unit toreflect the change.”

8. Select OK, IPSutil will configure the ethernetboard, then close the Ethernet Settingsscreen. The ethernet board is nowconfigured for use and may be accessedthrough a network.

Installing the ModemsUsing IPScom to interrogate, set or monitor therelay using a modem requires both a remote modemconnected at the relay location and a local modemconnected to the computer with IPScom installed.

In order to use IPScom to communicate with therelay using a modem, the following must be providedwith the unit:

• An external modem (1200 baud or higher),capable of understanding standard ATcommands.

• Serial modem cable with 9-pin connectorfor the unit and the applicable connectorfor the modem.

■ NOTE: Any compatible modem may be used;however, the unit only communicates at1200 to 9600 baud.

Similarly, the computer running IPScom must alsohave access to an internal or external compatiblemodem.

The local modem can be initialized, using IPScom,by connecting the modem to the computer, andselecting the COMM menu in IPScom. SelectMODEM, enter the required information, and finallyselect INITIALIZE from the expandedCommunications dialog box. The following stepsoutline the initialized modem setup procedure.

1. Connecting the modem to the computer:a. If the computer has an external modem,

use a standard straight-through RS-232modem cable to connect the computerand modem (M-3933). If the computerhas an internal modem, refer to themodem’s instruction book to determinewhich communications port should beselected.

b. The modem must be attached to (ifexternal) or assigned to (if internal) thesame serial port as assigned in IPScom.While IPScom can use any of the fourserial ports (COM1 through COM4),most computers support only COM1and COM2.

c. Connect the modem to the telephoneline and power up.

2. Connecting the Modem to the Relay:Setup of the modem attached to the relaymay be slightly complicated. It involvesprogramming the parameters (using the ATcommand set), and storing this profile inthe modem’s nonvolatile memory.

After programming, the modem will powerup in the proper state for communicatingwith the relay. Programming may beaccomplished by using “Hyperterminal” orother terminal software. Refer to your modemmanual for further information.

■■■■■ NOTE: The relay does not issue or understandany modem commands. It will not adjustthe baud rate and should be considereda “dumb” peripheral. It communicateswith 1 start, 8 data, and 1 stop bit.

a. Connect the unit to an external modemby attaching a standard RS-232 modemcable to the appropriate serialcommunications port on both the unitand the modem.

b. Connect the modem to the telephoneline and power up.

The modem attached to the unit must have thefollowing AT command configuration:

E0 No EchoQ1 Don’t return result code&D3 On to OFF DTR, hang-up and reset&S0 DSR always on&C1 DCD ON when detectedS0=2 Answer on second ring

The following commands may also be required atthe modem:

&Q6 Constant DTE to DCEN0 Answer only at specified speedW Disable serial data rate adjust\Q3 Bi-directional RTS/CTS relay&B1 Fixed serial port rateS37 Desired line connection speed

There are some variations in the AT commandssupported by modem manufacturers. Refer to thehardware user documentation for a list of supportedAT commands and direction on issuing thesecommands.

1

3

A

B

C


4–8

4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom)

IPScom runs with the Microsoft Windows® 95operating system or later. IPScom® only supportscommunication using the BECO 2200 protocol.

IPScom is available on CD-ROM, or it my bedownloaded from our website atwww.beckwithelectric.com

The M-3820D IPScom Communications Softwarepackage is not copy-protected and can be copied toa hard disk. For more information on your specificrights and responsibilities, see the licensingagreement enclosed with your software or contactBeckwith Electric.

Hardware RequirementsIPScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible computerthat provides at least the following:

• 8 MB of RAM

• Microsoft Windows 95 or later

• CD-ROM drive

• one serial (RS-232) communication port

• pointing device (mouse)

Installing IPScom1. Insert software CD-ROM into your drive.

An Auto-Install program will establish aprogram folder (Becoware) and subdirectory(IPScom). After installation, the IPScomprogram item icon (see Figure 4-3) islocated in Becoware. The default locationfor the application files is on drive C:, in thenew subdirectory “IPScom”(C:\Becoware\Ipscom).

2. If the Auto-Install program does not launchwhen the CD-ROM is inserted into the drivethen proceed as follows:

a. Select Run from the Start Menu.b. In the Run dialog box, locate the

installation file contained on theinstallation disk(sfi_m3425Acom_V______.exe).

c. Select Run to start the installationprocess.

Figure 4-3 IPScom Program Icon

Installing IPSutil™IPSutil is utility software used to program system-level parameters for units shipped without the M-3931HMI Module. The IPSutil.exe file is automaticallyinstalled in the Becoware folder, along with theIPScom files, and does not require separateinstallation.

4.3 Operation

Activating CommunicationsAfter the relay has been set up, the modemsinitialized, and IPScom installed, communication isactivated as follows:

1. Choose the IPScom icon from theBecoware folder.

2. The IPScom splash screen is displayedbriefly, providing the software versionnumber and copyright information. Thisinformation is also available by choosingthe About... command from the Help menu.

3. Choose the COMM menu selection.Complete the appropriate information onthe window for the relay to be addressed.a. If communication is through a modem,

choose the Modem command buttonto expand the communications dialogbox. Choose the desired relay locationand choose Dial button. This actionestablishes contact and automaticallyopens communication to the relay.

b. If computer is connected through thefront port, choose the Open COMbutton. This action establishescommunications.

4. Enter any valid IPScom command(s) asdesired.

5. To end communication whencommunicating by modem, choose the HangUp command button from the expandedCommunication dialog box. To close thecommunication channel when connectedlocally, choose the Close COM commandbutton.

1

3

A

B

C

4–9


OverviewWhen IPScom® is run, a menu and status bar isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 4-2. This sectiondescribes each IPScom menu selection and explainseach IPScom command in the same order as theyare displayed in the software program. For detailedinformation regarding each dialog box field (function),refer to Chapter 2, Application.

When starting IPScom, the initial menu choices arethe File menu or the Comm menu. The choicespecifies whether the operator desires to write to adata file or to communicate directly with the relay.

File Menu

File

New

Open...

Close

Save

Save As...

Print

Printer Setup

Exit Alt+F4

The File menu enables the user to create a newdata file, open a previously created data file, close,print, and save the file. The IPScom program canalso be exited through the File menu.

Since IPScom can be used with several Beckwithprotection systems in addition to the M-3425AGenerator Protection Relay, the format and contentsof a file must be established depending on whichprotective system is being addressed. When notconnected to one of the protection systems, usingthe New command, a new file is established withthe New Device Profile dialog box (see Figure 4-4).Choosing the OK command button allows the newdata file to be named by using the Save or SaveAs...commands.

■■■■■ NOTE: By choosing the NEW command, unitand setpoint configuration values arebased on factory settings specified forthe profiled protection system.

�2+"'&��2)'

��)�(� � ��

��$�(>�(�*)�

�%%��(*��)�,��@�

:��(�,��

"&�� !&��

�� "��

��

�3

��*(�

Figure 4-4 New Device Profile Dialog Box

Path: File menu / New command

COMMAND BUTTONS

OK Saves the currently displayedinformation.

Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window;any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.

The Save and Save As... commands allow re-saving a file or renaming a file, respectively. TheOpen command allows opening a previously createddata file. With an opened data file, use the Relay...Setup... menu items to access the setpointwindows.

If communication can be established with a relay, itis always safer to use the Read Data From Relaycommand to update the PC’s data file with therelay data. This file now contains the proper systemtype information, eliminating the need to set theinformation manually.

The Print and Printer Setup commands allow userto select printer options and print out all setpointdata from the data file or directly from the relay, if arelay is communicating with the PC.

The Exit command quits the IPScom program.

Comm Menu

HelpWindowFile RelayComm

The Communication dialog box (see Figure 4-5)allows setup of the IPScom communication data tocoordinate with the relay and by choosing theModem button, to establish contact for remotelocations. When communicating by way of a fiberoptic loop network, echo cancelling is available bychecking the Echo Cancel box. This commandmasks the sender’s returned echo.

If the modem was not used to establishcommunication (direct connection), press the OpenCOM button to start. If the relay has a defaultcommunication access code of 9999, a messagewindow will be displayed showing Access Level #3was granted. Otherwise, another dialog box willappear to prompt the user to enter the access codein order to establish the communication. CloseCOM discontinues communication.

1

3

A

B

C


4–10

5�&&%!��#"��!

��(��!

��(��!

!��(�

��*(�

��

��

�(�(�(

��(

!��(� ��@��(��,��,��(��@

:��(� ��+(��

:��:��!�

��,��(

��&&

#�&&

�#&&

(!&&

�*��*(�

�**(��(

,(��)

��(��

��(��:R�:

��(��:R�:�:��:��,��

��( �� @��

�:��:

Figure 4-5 Communication Dialog Box

Path: Comm menu

COMMAND BUTTONS

Open COM Initiates contact withthe protectivesystem, either by direct serial or modemcommunication.

Close COM Breaks communication with theprotective system, for both direct serialor modem communication.

TCP_IP Opens the ethernet applicablecommunication screen selections toallow user to enter a TCP_IP address (ifnecessary), and opening and closingcommunication with the target relay.

Modem Displays the expanded Communicationdialog box.

Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window;any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.

Open TCP_IP Initiates contact with the protectivesystem by ethernet connection.

Close TCP_IP Closes Ethernet connection.

Bring Up When selected, following connection toTerminal the target modem, allows the user toWindow send commands to the modem.AfterDialing

Add Displays the Add/Edit dialog box,allowing you to type a protectivesystem’s unit identifier, phone number,and communication address.

Edit Displays the Add/Edit dialog box,allowing you to review and change theuser lines (unit identifier), phonenumber, and communication address ofa selected entry.

Delete Deletes a selected entry.

Save Saves any changes to the displayedinformation

Initialize Allows the user to send special setup orother AT commands directly to themodem.

Dial Dials the entry selected from thedirectory.

Hang Up Ends modem communication, allowingthe user to dial again.

Relay Menu

'/#2

�(��

!��

��@(�

�(>�(�*(��(��

��*��@��

:��(

��(�$��(��,(��)

,(��$��,(��)

The Relay menu provides access to the windowsused to set, monitor, or interrogate the relay. Sixsubmenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Target ,Sequence of Events, Oscillograph and Profileas well as two commands, Write File to Relay andRead Data From Relay.

'/#2

�(��

!��

��@(�

�(>�(�*(��(��

��*��@��

:��(

��(�$��(��,(��)

,(��$��,(��)

�(��)��(�

�(��

�(��(��(

The Setup submenu provides three commands:Setup System, Setpoints, and Set Date/Time.The Setup System command displays the SetupSystem dialog box (Figure 4-6) allowing the input ofthe pertinent information regarding the system onwhich the protective relay is applied (see Section2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup).

1

3

A

B

C

4–11


��:��!

��$�(>�(�*)��!&�� %%��(*��)�,��@��"�

��*��@(� ��&

��( ��(

��( ��(

��( ��(

��( ��(

��( ��(

! " # � � ��( ��(

��*��(��(�

!""&%&

!""&%&

�!""&%&

!""&&

!""&&

� %&

� %&

� %&

�&

�&

��

��

��

��

��

� %&

� %&

� %&

�

�

*%%��@��

"(A� �!�@%��(�(*��

:��(�,��

*%%�:��(�,��

*%%� (��,��

*%%�*L�,��

�%%�:��(�,��

�%%� (��,��

��

��(�� "%&&

�#&%&�*"&%&�*

!%&&��&%"&��

�(��'��

��+�(

� �� ( � � � �� ( � � � �� ( � �� ( '� � �� ( '� �� (

, !� �$ ,(��)��(��'��(

��

��

��

#�

"�

!�

�

��

�&

�&

�&

�&

�&

�&

�&

�&�*)*�(�

��!&*)*�(�

�(��'�� (��'��

"&��:��(��(�(��

��+�(

��+�(

�� # " ! �

:��(�,(��)

�� # " ! �

��*�(��

��S(*��$�(>�(�*)��$!#��&��

��( �� * ( �

��(� :��(A��*�(��,(��)��+(��(�(*�(��(��(�(�(*��*�(�A:��(�,(��)��(��(�(*��:��(A��*�(��(

Figure 4-6 Setup System Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup System command

COMMAND BUTTONS

Save When connected to a protection system, sends the currently displayed information to the unit.Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information.

Cancel Returns you to the IPScom® main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost.

■■■■■ NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the “operated” state established byan opening rather than a closing external contact.

1

3

A

B

C


4–12

The Setpoints command displays the RelaySetpoints dialog box (see Figure 4-7) from which theindividual relay function dialog boxes can beaccessed. Choosing a Relay function button willdisplay the corresponding function dialog box (seeFigure 4-8 for example).

��'/#2��'")��!"+

��@��( �-��

��

:��(��*(

�#

*��A��

�"

�)�*��(*�

� ��*��(��@(

#(

��(��

"&�$

��(��(��$��(

"&��%�:��(

��(�*��%

"& ��%� (��(�*��(��

"(:��(

��(��@(

"(��**��@(��%

"( (��

��(��@(

"(L

!��(��(��@(

�

��(�

� :��(��(�(��

��(�� :��(

��(��@(

��

��(*��:�,(�

#&

��$�(��

#! (@%��(>%��(�*��(��

"&��(��(��(��(�*��(��

"&A� ��(��(��(�@��@

"� ��%��(� (�%��(�*��(��

"�*��%��(

��(�*��(��

!&$�*�$��('��(�(*��

! ,(��%��(�*��(��

!#�

��

!#$A�$�(��

:��(*��

� ��

��(�(��

�!

��(��(��!��

��*��

!��

$� �� $� �� ''�"�* "(�''��

��$�(>�(�*)

��$�(>%��**��%

��,,��$

�:��:��@�*

Figure 4-7 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window

COMMAND BUTTONS

Functions Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog boxfor the specified range of functions.

Configure Opens the Configure dialog box.

Exit Saves the currently displayedinformation and returns you to theIPScom® main window.

The Relay Setpoints dialog box gives access to twoadditional dialog boxes: All Setpoints Table andConfigure.

Choosing either of the Functions command buttons(either 21–51V or 59–TC) displays an All SetpointsTable dialog box for the specified range of setpoints(see Fig. 4-9). This dialog contains a list of settingsfor each relay within a single window to allow scrollingthrough all relay setpoint configuration values.Choosing the Configure command button displaysthe Configure dialog box (see Fig. 4-10), whichcontains a chart of programmed input and outputcontacts, in order to allow scrolling through all relayoutput and blocking input configurations. Both dialogboxes (All Setpoint Table and Configure), featurehotspots which allows the user to jump from a

scrolling dialog box to an individual relay functiondialog box and return to the scrolling dialog boxagain. All available parameters can be reviewed orchanged when jumping to a relay configuration dialogbox from either scrolling dialog box.

Figure 4-8 Typical Setpoint Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ 46command button OR 46 jump hotspot within All SetpointsTable or Configure dialog box

COMMAND BUTTONS

Save When connected to a protection system,sends the currently displayedinformation to the unit. Otherwise, savesthe currently displayed information andreturns you to the Relay Setpoints, AllSetpoints Table, or Configure dialogbox.

Cancel Returns the user to the Relay Setpoints,All Setpoints Table, or Configure dialogbox; any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.

1

3

A

B

C

4–13


�//��'")��!"+��#:/'

��:��!

��*��@(� ��(��

��$�(>�(�*)�:��(�,��

�%%��(*��)�,��@�"(A� �!�@%��(�(*��(��'��

��*��,(��)��

$!#��$�(>�(�*)�*%%��@��*%%�:��(�,��*%%� (��,��

*%%�*L�,��%%�:��(�,��%%� (��,��"&��:��(�

$��(�,(��)��

��

��

��

��#�

��"�

��!�

��

��

�(��'��(��)*�(��

��*�(��(�(��(��

��(��*(��@�(��*�%��@�(�

��,�,(�*��(��)�

��(��(��)��(�*��(��*�

��(��*��*�%��

��(��

��*�(��(�(��(��

��(��*(��@�(��*�%��@�(�

��,�,(�*��(��)�

��(�*��(��*��(��*��

��*�%��(��

��*�(��(�(��(��

��(��*(��@�(��*�%��@�(�

��,�,(�*��(��)�

��(�*��(��*��(��*��

��*�%��(��

��'�:��

��#�'�*��A�E

:�*��I��

�(��)�I��

:�*��I��

�(��)�I��

�(��(��( ��(��(��(

:�*��

��(��

��(��I�

,(�(��,��(�

��"�'�� 3:�%��@%��,�

��(��*��%��

��,(��*��

�)�*��(*��(��)�

�(��*��@(�

�(��$�(>�(�*)�

�"��)�*��(*��

�"� �"�

�(��*��

�(��*��*��

��*��(��*��

�(��*��(��*��

�(��(��)�

��(�

�� '�:�� ,*��

:�*��I��

�(��)�I��

:�*��I��

�(��)�I��

:�*��

:��%��(>%�*��%��*��

$��,��:�,(��*��

,(�(��(�:�,(��*��

�(��*�,��*��

�� '�� ,*��G� ��,��

:�*��

:��%��(>%�*��%��*��

$��,��:�,(��*��

,(�(��(�:�,(��*��

�(��*�,��*��

Figure 4-9 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box (partial)

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Display All command button

JUMP HOTSPOTS

This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box andthe Setup Relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the All Setpoints Table dialog box.

CONTROL MENU

Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.

Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box.

1

3

A

B

C


4–14

�)�*�(��

I�I�

I�I�I�

I�

I�I�

I�I�

*�I�

*�I�

�(%��(��%��(

I�I�

I�

I�

�(%��(�I��(%��(�I��(��(��(

5�!-��%*'

� � : � �

� ! " # � � �

��*��@��

! " # � � �

�"

�#

��I�I�I�

�

�

��

#&

"&�$

#!

"&�

"&

"&

Figure 4-10 Configure Dialog Box (partial)

Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button

JUMP HOTSPOTS

This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box.Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box.

CONTROL MENU

Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box.

Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box.

1

3

A

B

C

4–15


The Set Date/Time command (see Figure 4-11)allows the system date and time to be set, orsystem clock to be stopped. This dialog box alsodisplays an LED mimic to identify when the TimeSync is in use (preventing date/time from beingchanged by user).

Figure 4-11 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu/ Setup submenu/ Set Date/TimeCommand

There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic in this dialogbox (the LED is displayed as different shading on amonochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, therelay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and theTime field is grayed out, indicating that this fieldcan’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed(by editing and pressing Save).

When the LED is not blue, the relay is not time-synchronized and therefore, both the Date and Timefields can be changed.

The time field in the dialog box is not updatedcontinuously. The time at which the dialog box wasopened is the time that is displayed and remains assuch. This is true whether the relay is synchronizedwith the IRIG-B signal or not.

COMMAND BUTTONS

Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop, the relayclock. ‘Stop’ pauses, ‘Start’ resumes.

Save Saves Time and Date settings to therelay when applicable.

Cancel Returns you to the IPScom® mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation is lost.

The Monitor submenu provides access for reviewingthe present status of the relay's measured andcalculated values, other real-time parameters andconditions as well as examining real-time andhistorical demand metering information (see Section4.4 Checkout Status/Metering). A cascading menuappears, providing several command options asshown below.

■ NOTE: Displayed parameters in status screenswill vary depending on unit configuration.

:��)��

�(*��)��

�**��

:��(��*(

��$�(��

��(�

:��@��

�)�*��*��(

$��*��

'/#2

�(��

!��

��@(�

�(>�(�*(��(��

��*��@��

:��(

��(�$��(��,(��)

,(��$��,(��)

The Targets submenu provides three commandoptions: Display, Reset LED, and Clear History.The Display command displays the Target Dialog.This dialog box (see Figure 4-12) provides detaileddata on target events, including time, date, functionstatus, phase current values, and IN/OUT contactstatus at the time of trip. Individually recordedevents may be selected within the dialog box andsaved into a text file, or be printed out with optionaladded comments. The Reset LED is similar topushing the Target Reset button on the relay’s frontpanel, resetting current target(s) displayed on therelay. This command does not reset any targethistory.

'/#2

�(��

!��

��@(�

�(>�(�*(��(��

��*��@��

:��(

��(�$��(��,(��)

,(��$��,(��)

��)

,(�(��

��(��)

The Clear History command clears all stored targetdata.

1

3

A

B

C


4–16

��

&�%�&�'T��'�&&&�&��&��&%&&&&�%�&�'T��'�&&&�&��&��&%&&&&�%�&�'T��'�&&&�&��&��&%&&&&#%�&�'T��'�&&&�&��&��&%&&&

��

�� ! " # � � �

:��(�� :��(�� :��(�� :��(�

'��!%((�� '��!%((�� '��!%((�� &(%(&��(��

$��*��I ��

��(��(:��(��

! " # � � �$�

Figure 4-12 Target Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Targets submenu / Display window

Time is displayed in milliseconds.

COMMAND BUTTONS

Comment Opens comment dialog box for annotation.

Print Prints out selected target information, with comment.

Save Saves selected target information, with comment, as a text file.

Close Exits the currently displayed dialog box.

The Sequence of Events feature settings and displays will be available in a later release of IPScom®.

1

3

A

B

C

4–17


�'�#�

�./��

0./1�.�.

1�22.1

��.31

�./��

456�/51

312./

�.7�.68.�5��.6/�

��8��5213��

915��.

�1�/.�$��.�/5�0.�3)

0.3:��3/3�$15��0.�3)

The Oscillograph submenu allows storing data onselected parameters for review and plotting at alater time. The Setup command allows the user toset the number of partitions and triggeringdesignations to be made (see Table 3-1, RecorderParticitions). The Retrieve command downloadsand stores collected data to a file; Trigger allowsthe manual triggering of the recorder; Clear erasesthe existing records. Run the optional M-3801DIPSplot® PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Softwareprogram to view the downloaded oscillograph files.

�'"%)��#)��'��'�

�.6:

�368.�

95�/�1�22.1

�.�3)� " K

1�22.1��/��/�

�� ! "

#��; < =

1�22.1��6��/�

!��" #

;��< =

��+.1�5�0.851:�

=��< ; # "��! �

(��=& == =< =;��=# =" =!

Figure 4-13 Setup Oscillograph Recorder

$��.�$51�3/� �.85��%�� 40��631)%82G�%:3/�

�'"��'�'��#)��'��

0./1�.�. �368.�

0.851:�I=� ��.31.:

0.851:�I<� ��.31.:

0.851:�I;� ��.31.:

0.851:�I#� ��.31.:

0.851:�I"� ��.31.:

0.851:�I!� ��.31.:

0.851:�I � ��.31.:

0.851:�I�� .31.:

0.851:�I(� ��.31.:

0.851:�I=&� ��.31.:

0.851:�I==� ��.31.:

0.851:�I=<� ��.31.:

0.851:�I=;� ��.31.:

0.851:�I=#� ��.31.:

0.851:�I="� ��.31.:

0.851:�I=!� ��.31.:

Figure 4-14 Retrieve Oscillograph RecordDialog

�'�#�

�./��

456�/51

312./

�.7�.68.�5��.6/�

��8��5213��

915��.

�1�/.�$��.�/5�0.�3)

0.3:��3/3�$15��0.�3)

�,�/8��62�4./�5:

�8/��.�915��.

�5�)�915��.

The Profile submenu provides three commandoptions: Switching Method, Active Profile, andCopy Profile.

Switching Method command allows selection ofeither Manual or Input contact. Active Profile allowsuser to designate active profile. Copy Profile copiesactive profile to one of four profiles (user shouldallow approximately 2 minutes for copying.)

▲ CAUTION: Switching the active profile when therelay is on-line may cause unexpected operation ifthe wrong profile is selected.

��'�� "��!��'"��

436�3� �6��/��56/38/

�8/��.�915��.

9= 9< 9; 9#

�> �368.�

Figure 4-15 Profile Switching MethodDialog

■ NOTE: During Profile Switching, relay operationis disabled for approximately 1 second.

1

3

A

B

C


4–18

�'/'�"��"�.'��*�-�/'

!�� *�

�*��(�:��(

:� :� :� :#

�3 ��*(�

Figure 4-16 Select Active Profile

5�)2��"�.'��*�-�/'

!�� *�

��)��*��(�:��(��

:� :� :� :#

�3 ��*(�

Figure 4-17 Copy Active Profile

The Write File To Relay command is used to writethe data to the relay. The Read Data From Relaycommand is used to retrieve the data from the relayto the computer for display.

'/#2

�(��

!��

��@(�

�(>�(�*(��(��

��*��@��

:��(

��(�$��(��,(��)

,(��$��,(��)

Window Menu/Help Menu

The Window menu enables the positioning andarrangement of all IPScom® windows so that thereis better access to available functions. This featureallows the display of several windows at the sametime. Clicking on an inactive window activates thatwindow.

Currently in revision, the Help menu will enable theuser to look up information about any IPScommenus or commands. Though displaying (greyed-out)Help commands, this menu item is currentlyunavailable.

9'/)

��(��

�+��%%%

:��(��

The Help menu provides four commands. TheContents command initiates a link to a PDF (PortableDocument File) version of this instruction book foreasy reference. An Adobe Acrobat® reader isrequired to view this document.

The M-3425A Instruction Book has been indexed toits table of contents. By selecting the “Navigatorpane’ in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can directlyaccess selected topics. The About commanddisplays IPScom version and developmentinformation. Profile Info displays user infromationfor input and editing.

1

3

A

B

C

4–19


�:�%"��&

�3�:�*��

��(@��(��:��(*��)��(�

*(��'&��*&�%&&%�"

��)��@��(( '�&&��(*�,��(*��*��%G��*%

�� !'�#�"�

��3��,��!'�#�"�

�(�� +(� �

��,��(�*(�� *&�%&&%��

��*��(��

�� +(� �

�(��(*��

��+��(*��

��

��

Figure 4-18 About IPScom Dialog Box

Path: Help menu / About... command

COMMAND BUTTONS

OK Exits the currently displayed dialog box.

The Profile Info command will allow the user toview or make notations for the relay setpoint datafiles.

1

3

A

B

C


4–20

4.4 Checkout Status/Metering

�*�&#*2��"#"%+

� !!"#�

&%&

:��(�*

&%&

:��(��

&%&

:��(�+

&%&

:��(��

&%&

:��(��

&%&

:��(��

&%&

(��

$��%"$��%"

��

&%&&&

E(��(>%

&%&&&

(@%��(>%

&%&&&

:��%��(>% ��

�!"& "#�'

��

��

$()*

&%&

K

!��

��

��A�

��+"!

&%&&

,(��

&%&&

,(�*��(

&%&&

��(��

&%&&��

:�,(��$�*��& �& �C/

,!"�-"!

��

&%&&

�*L �C

&%&&

�� C

&%&&

�E(��(> �C

&%&&

�:��(��C &%&&

�:��(�� C

&%&&

:��(�� C

&%&&

� (�� C &%&&

�:��(> �C

&%&&

� (@��(> �C

� ��

�� !��"��#��

.#� ��

$� ! " # � � �

Figure 4-19 Primary Status Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Primary Status window

These are calculated values based on the VT and CT inputs.

� ��

�� !��"��#��

.#� ��

��!��"��#��

,!"�-"!

��

�'��!3#*2��"#"%+

$��%"

&%&&

�:��(��

&%&&

�:��(��

&%&&

� (@��(>

&%&&

�E(��(>

�!"& "#�'

��

$()*

&%&

K��

&%&

* ��

&%&

*&��

&%&

�*&A*

� !!"#�

&%&&&

E(��(>%

&%&&&

��,�$%��S��

&%&&&

:��%��(>%

&%&&&

(@%��(>%

&%&&&

:��(��

&%&&&

:��(��

&%&&&

:��(��

&%&&&

(��

!��

��

��A�

$��%"

&%&&

:��(��

&%&&

� (��

&%&&

�:��(>

&%&&

��,�$��S%

��+"!

&%&&&&

,(��%�%�

&%&&&&

,(�*��(��%�%�

&%&&&&

��(��%�%�

&%&&&&

$�*��

.��"��#�"

, L&%&& &%&&

:��(��

, L&%&& &%&&

:��(��

, L&%&& &%&&

:��(��

, L&%&& &%&&

:��(> $�(��

U"��,

&%&&

�*L

&%&

��*�

&%&&&

:��(��

&%&&&

:��(�+

&%&&&

:��(�*

&%&&&

�'��

&%&&&

�'+��

&%&&&

�'*��

&%&&&

��

&%&&&

#(I�

&%&&&

#(I�

Figure 4-20 Secondary Status Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Secondary Status window

1

3

A

B

C

4–21


#��)*�+�� +�� +��

��,�-�)��

��.��"/��/��)��/��

��)��/��01

��)��/��0�

��)��/��0

��)��/��0(

��)��/��02

��)��/��03 -�)��

-�)��

-�)��

-�)��

-�)��

-�)��%��,��*

4��5��-��)��/��%��

Figure 4-21 Accumulator Status Screen

&

!&

"&

#&

�&

�&

'�&

��*�(��(�(�

��*�(��(�

�%&&

&%�&

:��(��(��*(��

'&%�& '&%!& '&%#& '&%�& &%�& &%#& &%!& &%�&

�&

�0#+'�4�+"#!�'

��*�(��(��*(��@�(

��

��

��

�

�

�

��*��@�(��

��,�,(�*��

Figure 4-22 Phase Distance Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phase Distance window

Phase Distance window shows a graphic representation of phase distance settings.

Move the scope window to the right

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Refresh Scope

CONTROL BUTTONS

Move up the scope window

Move down the scope window

Move the scope window to the left

1

3

A

B

C


4–22

�&

'�&

'�&

'�&

'#&

'"&

'!&

' &

'&%�& '&%�& '�& '�& �& �& �& #&

��*�(��(�(��

��*�(��(��

:��(��(>�(�*(��(��*(��

��++��-�$�'/3

��(*��(�(��

Figure 4-23 Loss of Field Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Loss of Field window

Loss-of-Field window shows a graphic representation of loss-of-field settings, and also displays the positive sequenceimpedance.

CONTROL BUTTONS





Zoom In

Zoom Out

Refresh Scope

#&

�"

�&

�"

�&

�"

'�&

��*�(��(�(�

��*�(��(�

�&%&��

'&%�& '&%!& '&%#& '&%�& &%�& &%#& &%!& &%�&

�&

�%"��-��"')

��*�(��(��*(��@�(

��(��(��*(

:��(��(>�(�*(��(��*(

��!��-��

"

�"%&��

�"O

"%& �

� ��

�� %! �V�S�� %! �

Figure 4-24 Out-of-Step Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Out-of-Step window


Zoom In

Zoom Out

Refresh Scope

CONTROL BUTTONS




1

3

A

B

C

4–23


=

�=

>=�=

��=

��=

�?=

��=

��=��=

�==

��=

$*''@'

<�/"#�'+��<�

<#A

<:A

<�A

<!A

<8A

�0#+�*�4�#�*#& L

5%**'!"+��

�#A

�:A

��A

��A

�BA

��A

Figure 4-25 Phasor Dialog Box

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phasor Diagram window

CONTROL BUTTONS

p Voltage Toggle & display voltage channel information

p Currents (A) Toggle & display current channel information.

p Freeze Toggle & update information

:��(��@�(��%��

�(��*��&%#�*

�(��$�(>��&%&��

�2!��)'

�� $��&

�&&

� &

�#&

��&

��&

�"&

��&

(&

!&

�&

&

Figure 4-26 Sync Scope Screen

1

3

A

B

C


4–24

�A��(%) �A�*�))'3 � ��

$%!�"��!��"#"%+

��I��:��(��*(��I��:��(��*(��I��:��(��*(��#��I��*��A��$��#��I��*��A��$��#��*��A�� *�� I��:��(��(��@(�� I��:��(��(��@(�� I��:��(��(��@(��"��)�*��(*��"��(��(*�� I��*��(��@(�� I��*��(��@(��I��(*��:�,(��I��(*��:�,(��I��(*��:�,(��#&��I��$�(��#&��I��$�(��#&*��I��$�(��,��*��#&*��I��$�(��,��*��#!�� (@%��(>%��(�*��(��$�#!�� (@%��(>%��(�*��(�� *�#(��I��(��#(��I��(��"&�$��(��(��$��(�"&��I��:��(��(�*��(��"&��I��:��(��(�*��(��"&��I��:��(��(�*��(��"& ��%� (��(�*��(��"&��I��(��(�*��(��"&��I��(��(�*��(��"&A� ��(��(��(�@��@�"� ��%��(� (�%��(�*��(��"�*��%��(�:��(��(�*��(��"(��I��:��(��(��@(�"(��I��:��(��(��@(�"(��I��:��(��(��@(�"(��*�*��@(��(�(��

�"( ��I�� (��(��@(�"( ��I�� (��(��@(�"( ��I�� (��(��@(

�"(L��I��!��'��(��(��@(�"(L��I��!��'��(��(��@(

�!&$��*�$��(��!#$��I��$�(��!#$��I��$�(��

�!#��'��!#��&&K��

�! ��,(��(��(��(�*��(��! ��,(��(��(��(�*��(��

� ��(��I��$�(>�(�*)��I��$�(>�(�*)��I��$�(>�(�*)��I#�$�(>�(�*)

��I��$�(>��**��I��$�(>��**��I��$�(>��**��I#�$�(>��**��I"�$�(>��**��I!�$�(>��**��

��,��I�,��(��@(��$�(>�(�*)��,��I��,��(��@(��$�(>�(�*)

�� I��:��(��(�(��(�� I��:��(��(�(��(��

�� (�(��(��:��I��:��:��I��:��:��I��:��:��I#��:��:��I"��:��:��I!��:��!��(��(��!��

��*��!��

� :��

� :��

� :��

� :��#

� :��"

� :��!

� :��$��:��

��:��

��:��

��:��#

��:��"

��:��!

��:��

��:��

L

Figure 4-27 Function Status Screen

Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Function Status window

Function Status window shows the status of various functions, with “T” representing the function which has tripped, and “P”representing the function which has picked up and is timing.

1

3

A

B

C

4–25


4.5 Cautions

System and IPScom® CompatibilityEvery attempt has been made to maintaincompatibility with previous software versions. Insome cases (most notably with older protectionsystems), compatibility cannot be maintained. Ifthere is any question about compatibility, contactthe factory.

System PrioritySystem conflicts will not occur, as local commandsinitiated from the front panel receive priorityrecognition. When the unit is in local mode,communication using the serial ports is suspended.IPScom displays an error message to indicate thisfact.

Time and Date StampingTime and date stamping of events is only as usefulas the validity of the unit’s internal clock. Under theRelay menu, the Set Date/TIme command allowsyou to manually set the unit’s clock.

Echo CancelThe Echo Cancel check box, under the Commmenu, should only be used when several relays areconnected using a fiber optic loop network.Otherwise, echo cancel must not be selected orcommunication will be prevented.

Serial Port ConnectionsIf the serial port is connected to something otherthan a modem, and an IPScom modem commandis executed, the results are unpredictable. In somecases, the computer may have to be reset.

1

3

A

B

C


4–26

4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard ShortcutsSYSTEM KEYS

These keys can be used within Microsoft Windows® and IPScom®.

Alt-Tab To switch between applications.

Ctrl-Esc To open Task List dialog box. Opens Start Menu (Win 95/98).

Ctrl-Tab To switch between windows within an application.

Arrow Keys To select an application or group icon.

First Character of Name To select application or group icon.

Enter To open selected group or run selected application.

MENU KEYS

These keys enable you to select menus and choose commands.

Alt or F10 To select or cancel selection of the Setup menu on the menu bar.

Left Arrow, Right Arrow To move between menus.

Up Arrow, Down Arrow To move between commands.

A character key To choose the menu or command. The underlined character matchesthe one you type.

Enter To choose the selected menu name or command.

Esc To cancel the selected menu name, or to close the open menu.

DIALOG BOX KEYS

These keys are useful when working in a dialog box.

Alt-a character key To move to the option or group whose underlined letter or numbermatches the one you type.

Arrow Keys To move highlighted selections within list boxes.

Alt-Down Arrow To open a list.

Spacebar To select an item or cancel a selection in a list. Also to select orclear a check box.

Enter To carry out a command.

Esc or Alt-F4 To close a dialog box without completing the command.

Table 4-2 Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts

1

3

A

B

C

4–27


4.7 IPSutil™ Communications Software

Figure 4-28 IPSutil Main Menu Flow

M-3890 IPSutilThe M-3890 IPSutil Communication software packageprovides communication with the Beckwith IntegratedProtection System® (IPS) for setting up the relays.Its main purpose is to aid in setting up IPS relaysthat are ordered without the optional front panel HMIinterface.

Installation and SetupIPSutil runs with the Microsoft® Windows 95 operatingsystem or above. Hardware requirements are thesame as those stated for IPScom®.

50#!�'�5�&&��'++�5�3'

50#!�'��'++��'.'/�5�3'

9'/)��+�'//#!'�%+�'�%*�"25/��('/#25�&&

��+�'//#!'�%+

�'"%)

��!�"�*��"#"%+

5#/�:*#"��!

9'/)

�:�%"777

5/��(

'/#25�&&

1�!3�6

5�!!'�"

�8�"��/"�$�

5�&&

�'�%*�"2

��%"�/�"2��'/#2�� 4 ==�<77��5�&& �"0'*!'"

�"0'*!'"

1

3

A

B

C


4–28

InstallationAn installation utility has been provided as a part ofIPScom® and IPSutil™ programs. After installation,IPSutil can be run from the hard drive by choosingIPSUTIL.EXE.

System SetupConnect a null modem cable from COM1 of therelay to the PC serial port. IPSutil supports COM1port direct connection only. Modem connection isnot supported. IPSutil is not supported throughCOM2 or COM3 ports of the relay.

OverviewIPSutil helps in setting up IPS relays which wereordered without the optional front panel HMI interface.Units delivered without HMI’s are shipped with a setof factory default settings for various parametersthat the end user may wish to change. While theutility program is directed to users that do not haveHMI, users of HMI-provided relays can also useIPSutil to set various parameters. When IPSutil isstarted, a warning window appears:

IPSutility should NOT be used to set up the relay which is on-line because someparameter’s modifications may result in unexpected operations. It is only for off-line relaysetup.

OK

WARNING X

Figure 4-29 Warning Message

After the user accepts the warning, the user canaccess the IPSutil main menu. The following sectionsdescribe each IPSutil menu items.

Comm Menu

��(*�

�-��V$#

5�&&

The Comm menu allows the user to makeconnections to the relay. This is the first commandthe user must use to access the unit. After the userselects the Connect submenu item, theCommunications dialog box appears (See Figure4-33).

• Select the correct PC communication portwhere the null modem cable is connectedfor the relay.

• Select the baud rate of the relay. Factorydefault is 9600 baud.

• Select the access code resident in therelay. Factory default is 9999.

• Select “Open com”.

The following message window will be displayedshowing COM opened. Now, the title bar will displaythe relay model and the software version.

��%"�/�"2

!'�#�"��!��(�(�

�3

The Exit submenu allows you to quit IPSutil. If therelay was connected, this submenu disconnectsthe relay. When the relay was connected, if youhave made any changes for some parameters (forexample, baud rate, phase rotation) the followingmessage window appears.

Some parameter’s changes require resetting the relay to become effective. Do you wishto reset the relay now?

IPSUTILITY X

OK Cancel

Figure 4-30 IPSutility Reset Relay Message

Relay Comm CommandWhen Relay Comm command is selected, theRelay Comm Port Settings dialog box appears (SeeFigure 4-34). It allows you to set the relaycommunication ports COM1 or COM2/COM3 baudrate. For COM2/COM3, it allows you to set theprotocol and dead synch time. Additionally, forCOM2 and COM3, if you select MODBUS protocol,the dialog box allows you to enable the parityoption.

NOTE: If COM1 baud rate is changed and therelay is reset, the new baud rate must beused to communicate with COM1

Ethernet CommandWhen the Ethernet command is selected, theEthernet Settings dialog box appears (see Figure4-35.) This command allows the user to enable ordisable the ethernet connection and enable/setprotocols.

Clock CommandWhen the Clock command is selected, the “SetUnit Date/Time” dialog box appears (See Figure4-36). Date and Time can be changed and sent tothe relay. This dialog box allows you to start or stopthe clock in the relay.

1

3

A

B

C

4–29


Security Menu

�'�%*�"2

��@(��**(��(

��@(��(�(��**(��(

The Security Menu allows you to set thecommunication access code and the level accesscodes for the relay.

The Change Comm Access Code allows you toassign new communication access code to therelay. The range of the access code is 1 to 9999.Note that the access code 9999 is a factory default(See Figure 4-37).

NOTE: Setting the access code to 9999 disablessecurity.

The Change User Access Code allows you toassign three different levels of access code for therelay functions accessibility. The range of the levelaccess code is 1 to 9999 (See Figure 4-38).

▲▲▲▲▲ CAUTION: This submenu allows you to changethe relay level access codes.

Miscellaneous Menu

��+�'//#!'�%+

�(��!��+��

The Miscellaneous menu allows you to set andmonitor some of the relay parameters.

The Setup command allows you to change theusers Logo information, test outputs, assigncommunication address and user control number,phase rotation, OK LED flash mode in the relay.Note that the highest number used for thecommunication address is 255 and the highestcontrol number allowed is 9999 (See Figure 4-39).

The Monitor Status command allows you to monitorand clear the error code counters, monitor the checksums, and to view inputs test status. Note thatpowerloss counter cannot be cleared.

��!�"�*��"#"%+

��(�

��(��*��

! " # � � �

��(�

��(

��(*��

��+��(# �(��&

��(��

��(��(��

��(��(��'��

��(��(��'��

��(��(��'��

��

,(*(��(�:�*�(��

��(��(��

��

��

��

��#�

��"�

��!�

��

��

��

:�,(��

�3 ��*(�

�#

��&

�

&

��

��

�

&

#�

#"

��

&

&

#��

�#

Figure 4-31 Monitor Status Screen

The Calibration command provides the user withinstructions on how to recalibrate NominalFrequency, Third Harmonic, (64F) Field Ground,and (64S) Stator Protection.

5#/�:*#"��!

�(�(*��+�� :��*(��(�

��$�(>�(�*)

��*

!#$�$�(��

!#��:��(*��

��+��( ��*(�

��(*��* J�&%&��VA'�&%&��*��&��G&��(@��(%�:�(��+��(�,�(��(��)%

Figure 4-32 Calibration Dialog

COMMAND BUTTONS

Calibrate Sends the currently displayedinformation to the relay.

Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.

1

3

A

B

C


4–30

�:A�:��

��:��*��

�"0'*!'"��'""�!�+

��(��(��

��:�:��*�� +�( ��+�(

:��*��(�(*�� !�� (�*��

��+�( ��+�(

��+�( ��+�(

�:��(��

��( ��*(�

�(� �!� � #�

(��!�� "" �"" �"" &

��(,�)� & & & &

Figure 4-35 Ethernet Settings

COMMAND BUTTONS

Ethernet Enable/Disable: Allows user to enableand disable the Ehternet Port.

DHCP Protocol Enable/Disable: Allows the userto enable or disable the DHCP protocol. WhenDHCP protocol is enabled the the IP Address portionof the screen is grayed out. When DHCP protocol isdisabled the IP Address can be manually entered.

EGD Protocol Enable/Disable: Not available.

Protocol Selection MODBUS/Serconv: Providesthe user with the ability to select either MODBUSover TCP/IP or Serconv (BECO2200 over TCP\IP)protocol.

Save Saves values to the relay.

Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window.Any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.

��C��4��;��

�!��

��*�

��(�

��(�

�� A �" A (�

�& � &� � &�

��*( ��(

Figure 4-36 Set Unit Date/Time Dialog Box

Help Menu

9'/)�+��%%%

Under Help, the About... submenu provides youthe information on the IPSUtil™ version numbers.

COM1

COMM X

PC Port

Access Code

Baud Rate

300

1200

4800

600

2400

9600

Open COM

Close COM

Cancel

Figure 4-33 Communication Dialog

COMMAND BUTTONS

Open COM Initiates communication with theprotective system by direct serialcommunication.

Close COM Discontinues communication with theprotective system.


��!��,��(��(!&&

��*��(��

��!��,��(��(!&&

'/#2�5�&&��*"��'""�!�+

��*(��3

��

��!�

�(��)�*��(��"& ��

�� &&&��

�(*��&& !��

:��)�� (��(��

��

��!�

�(��)�*��(��"& ��

�� &&&��

�(*��&& !��

:��)�� (��(��

Figure 4-34 Relay Comm Port Settings

COMMAND BUTTONS

OK Sends the currently displayedinformation to the relay.


1

3

A

B

C

4–31


COMMAND BUTTONS

Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop the clockof the relay. The ‘Stop’ stops the clock inthe relay. The ‘Start’ resumes the clockin the relay.

Save When connected to the protectionsystem, the date and time informationon the display is sent to the relay.

Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.

There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on the Set Date/Time dialog box (the LED is displayed as differentshading on a monochrome monitor). When this LED isblue, the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signaland the Time field is grayed out, indicating that this fieldcan’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed(by editing and pressing Save). When the LED is notblue, the relay is not time-synchronized and therefore,both the Date and Time fields can be changed. Thetime field in the dialog box is not updated continuously.The time at which the dialog box was opened is thetime that is displayed and remains as such. This is truewhether the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signalor not.

Change Comm Access Code X

New Access Code:

Confirm New Access Code:

xxxx

xxxx

OK Cancel

Figure 4-37 Change Communication AccessCode Dialog Box

COMMAND BUTTONS


Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ mainwindow. Any changes to the displayedinformation are lost.

Change User Access Code X

New User Access Code:

Confirm New User Access Code:

OK Cancel

xxxx

xxxx

xxxx

xxxx

xxxx

xxxx

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Figure 4-38 Change User Access CodeDialog Box

COMMAND BUTTONS



��(��,(��)�� ! " # � � �

�$$

�

8��C�

��(��@�

��(��

��(��

��3��,��%

!'�"�&

��+�(

��

��+�(

��

��(�� +(��

�3��$��

:��(�,��

�3 ��*(�

Figure 4-39 Setup Dialog Box

COMMAND BUTTONS



NOTE: Output Test is not available on someversions of the M-3425A Relay.

1

3

A

B

C


4–32


Installation – 5

5–1

5Installation

5.1 General Information .................................................................... 5–1

5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions .............................................. 5–1

5.3 External Connections ................................................................. 5–6

5.4 Commissioning Checkout ........................................................ 5–12

5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ...................................... 5–17

5.1 General Information

■■■■■ NOTE: Prior to installation of the equipment, itis essential to review the contents ofthis manual to locate data which may beof importance during installationprocedures. The following is a quickreview of the contents in the chapters ofthis manual.

The person or group responsible for the installationof the relay will find herein all mechanical informationrequired for physical installation, equipment ratings,and all external connections in this chapter. Forreference, the Three-Line Connection Diagrams arerepeated from Chapter 2, Application. Further, acommissioning checkout procedure is outlined usingthe HMI option to check the external CT and VTconnections. Additional tests which may be desirableat the time of installation are described in Chapter6, Testing.

Service Conditions and Conformity to CEStandardStating conformance to CE Standard EN 61010-12001, operation of this equipment within the followingservice conditions does not present any knownpersonnel hazards outside of those stated herein:

• 5° to 40° Centigrade

• Maximum relative humidity 80% fortemperatures up to 31° C, decreasing in alinear manner to 50% relative humidity at40° C.

This equipment will function properly, and at statedaccuracies beyond the limits of this CE Standard,as per the equipment's specifications, stated in thisInstruction Book.

It is suggested the terminal connections illustratedhere be transferred to station one-line wiring andthree-line connection diagrams, station paneldrawings and station DC wiring schematics.

If during the commissioning of the M-3425AGenerator Protection Relay, additional tests aredesired, Chapter 6, Testing, may be consulted.

The operation of the relay, including the initial setupprocedure, is described in Chapter 3, Operation,for HMI front panel users and in Chapter 4, RemoteOperation, when using a personal computer. Section3.1, Front Panel Controls, details the front panelcontrols. Section 3.2, Initial SetupProcedure/Settings, details the HMI setupprocedure. This includes details necessary for inputof the communications data, unit setup data,configure relays data, the individual setpoints andtime settings for each function, and oscillographrecorder setup information. Section 3.5,Status/Metering, guides the operator through thestatus and metering screens, including monitoringthe status. Section 3.6 includes information onviewing the target history.

5.2 Mechanical/PhysicalDimensions

Figures 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, and 5-4 contain physicaldimensions of the relay that may be required formounting the unit on a rack.


5–2

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !�"��#�$$�$

��%�&�'(�$��$��)��*+(�$��(��*(��'(�(�$�

,-�.!!-/&-&�� .� �0�-/�,-��1�2�/. ��-&�� /&�,&�,��3�!.�/

,(��4�(5

��6��. �7�68

Figure 5-1 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions – Horizontal Chassis

Installation – 5

5–3

.9�� 4(��*� �!�"��#�$$�$

��%�&�'(�$��$��)��*+(�$��(��*(��'(�(�$�

�!�!�4��5

��4�!��"5

��4��!�5 ��!�

4��5

�"�4��5 �!��

4��"!5�0#6/7

��"4��5

��4��5

�!��4��5

��

��24��528��!24��5��2��8

,(��4�(5

,-�.!!-/&-&�� .� �0�-/�,-��1�2�/. ��-&�� /&�,&�,��3�!.�/

Figure 5-2 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions – Vertical Chassis


5–4

.261 [0.66]Diameter4 Holes

19.00[48.26]

6.19[15.72]

Max. Depthof Unit:

Front View

10.50[26.67]

RecommendedPanel CutoutDimensions

.39[0.99]

18.21[46.25]

8.72[22.15]

2.80[7.12]

2.80[7.12]

8.72[22.15]

2.25[5.71]

1.91[4.85]

� NOTE: Dimensions inbrackets are in centimeters.

Figure 5-3 (H2) Mounting Dimensions

Installation – 5

5–5

.75 6.13[15.57]

.261 [0.66]Diameter6 Holes

7.78[19.76]

20.78[52.78]

7.63[19.38]

8.72[22.15]

Max. Depthof Unit:

Front View

10.50[26.67]

8.72[22.15]

2.80[7.12]

2.80[7.12]

2.60[6.60]

1.14

RecommendedPanel CutoutDimensions

15.56[39.52]

18.50[46.99]

5.56[14.12]

1.04[2.64]

� NOTE: Dimensions in bracketsare in centimeters.

Figure 5-4 (H3) Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet


5–6

5.3 External Connections

88888WARNING: The protective grounding terminalmust be connected to an earthed ground anytimeexternal connections have been made to theunit.

88888WARNING: Only dry contacts are to beconnected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10 to11 common) because these contact inputs areinternally wetted by the M-3425A. Application ofexternal voltage to these inputs may result indamage to the unit.

88888 WARNING: Do not open live CT circuits. LiveCT circuits should be shorted prior todisconnecting CT wiring to the M-3425A. Deathor severe electrical shock may result.

▲ CAUTION: Mis-operation or permanent damagemay result to the unit if a voltage is applied toterminals 1 and 2 (aux) that does not match theconfigured Trip Circuit Monitoring input voltage.

To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listings,terminal block connections must be made with No.12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire inserted inan AMP #324915 (or equivalent) connector, andwire insulation used must be rated at 60° C minimum.

Grounding RequirementsThe M-3425A is designed to be mounted in anadequately grounded metal panel, using groundingtechniques (metal-to-metal mounting) and hardwarethat assures a low impedance ground.

Unit IsolationSensing inputs should be equipped with test switchesand shorting devices where necessary to isolatethe unit from external potential or current sources.

A switch or circuit breaker for the M-3425A's powershall be included in the building installation, andshall be in close proximity to the relay and withineasy reach of the operator, and shall be plainlymarked as being the power disconnect device forthe relay.

Insulation CoordinationSensing Inputs: 60 V to 140 V, Installation CategoryIV, Transient Voltages not to exceed 5,000 V.

Torque Requirements• Terminals 1–34: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum,

and 8.0 in-lbs, maximum.

• Terminals 35–63: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum,and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum.

Relay OutputsAll outputs are shown in the de-energized state forstandard reference. Relay standard reference isdefined as protective elements in the non-trip,reconnection and sync logic in the non-assertedstate, or power to the relay is removed. Outputcontacts #1 through #4 are high speed operationcontacts. The power supply relay (P/S) is energizedwhen the power supply is OK. The self-test relay isenergized when the relay has performed all self-tests successfully.

Replacement FusesF1–F4 replacement fuses must be fast-acting 3Amp, 250 V (3AB) Beckwith Electric Part Number420-00885.

Installation – 5

5–7

Fig

ure

5-5

Ext

erna

l C

onne

ctio

ns

■■■■ ■N

OT

ES

:

1.S

ee S

ectio

n 2.

3, S

etpo

ints

and

Tim

e S

ettin

gs, s

ubse

ctio

n fo

r 64

B/F

Fie

ld G

roun

d P

rote

ctio

n.

2.B

efor

e m

akin

g co

nnec

tions

to th

e T

rip C

ircui

t Mon

itorin

g in

put,

see

Sec

tion

5.5,

Circ

uit B

oard

Sw

itche

s an

d Ju

mpe

rs, f

or th

e in

form

atio

nre

gard

ing

setti

ng T

rip C

ircui

t Mon

itorin

g in

put v

olta

ge. C

onne

ctin

g a

volta

ge o

ther

than

the

volta

ge th

at th

e un

it is

con

figur

ed to

may

resu

ltin

mis

-ope

ratio

n or

per

man

ent d

amag

e to

the

unit.

3.8888 8

WA

RN

ING

: O

NL

Y D

RY

CO

NT

AC

TS

mu

st b

e co

nn

ecte

d t

o i

np

uts

(te

rmin

als

5 th

rou

gh

10

wit

h 1

1 co

mm

on

) b

ecau

se t

hes

eco

nta

ct in

pu

ts a

re in

tern

ally

wet

ted

. Ap

plic

atio

n o

f ext

ern

al v

olt

age

on

thes

e in

pu

ts m

ay r

esu

lt in

dam

age

to th

e u

nit

s.

4.8888 8

WA

RN

ING

: Th

e p

rote

ctiv

e g

rou

nd

ing

term

inal

mu

st b

e co

nn

ecte

d to

an

ear

thed

gro

un

d a

ny

tim

e ex

tern

al c

on

nec

tio

ns

hav

eb

een

mad

e to

the

un

it.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�� !!�

��"��#$

��

��%&��'��

��

!�!(��(��

��

�')

�')

��

��

��

��(��

&�� *��&��'��+��

�'��%

��,

��

��

��

�-�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��'��

�

�

��

(�

��

��

��

��

(.

��

��

�

��

��

�

.

!"

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�"�"�"�"�!�!�!�!

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��!

�"��

�

��

��

��!

�"

��

�/��

��

��

��

,!

�� 0

��

��

�!�"

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��!

��

��"

��

��

�� (�

��

��

*

*��

��

*

��12�(��22222222222222222222222222222222222222222222��&��12�(��

(.

.(

��

��(

��

��

�(��

�

��

�(��-�')

��

��

��3

�

��"��

��-�

�

!


5–8

52Gen

A B C

Generator

58 59

56 57

54 55

OtherRelays

R45 44

M-3425A

M-3425A

WARNING: ONLY dry contact inputs must beconnected because these contact inputs areinternally wetted. Application of externalvoltage on these inputs may result indamage to the units.NOTE : M-3425A current terminal polarity marks( . ) indicate "entering" current direction whenprimary current is "from" the generator to thesystem. If CT connections differ from thoseshown, adjust input terminals.

M-3921Field Ground

Coupler Module

10

11

52b

M-3425A

43 41 3942 40 38

M-3425A

Two Vt Open-DeltaConnection

43 41 3942 40 38

M-3425A


434139 424038

M-3425A

Three VT Wye-WyeAlternate Connection

A

B

C

A

B

C

55 54

57 56

59 58

M-3425A

55 54

57 56

59 58

M-3425AOther

RelaysOtherRelays

a b c

a b c a b c

OR OR


52 53

M-3425A


OR

50 51

48 49

46 47

M-3425AOther

Relays1

1

1

A B C

Example of Control/Output Connections

M-3425A

PowerSupply

52G

+

-

TRIPALARM

SELF-TEST

FAILUREALARM

POWEROK

STATUSALARM

VTFUSELOSS

EXTERNALINPUTS

ALARMOUTPUTS

CONTROLOUTPUTS

TRIPOUTPUT

BREAKERFAILUREINITIATE

52Ga

5

3 336

OSCILLOGRAPHRECORDER

INITIATE

60FL52b

2

60 6261 63 11 10

4

+

-

DC: 24V 48V

ORDC: 110V 125V 220V 250VAC: 110V 120V 230V 240V

16

15

12

13

4

5

6

Alarm output can be grouped to a single alarmat the discretion of user.Available control output to service other relaysfor VT Fuse Loss can be designated.Input contact number is designated by user.

2

3

1 Wire to split phase differential CTs foruse with 50DT split phase function.Required generator breaker status input(52b). Contact is closed when generatorbreaker is open. Use unit breakercontact if no generator breaker present.Output contact pairs designated byuser.

Figure 5-6 Three-Line Connection Diagram

Installation – 5

5–9

52Gen

A B C

Generator

10

11

52b

M-3425A

VX

43

41

39

42

40

38

M-3425A


A B C

V1

OR

VX

64

65

M-3425A

64

65

M-3425A

VX

Two VT Open-DeltaConnection

43

41

39

42

40

38

M-3425A

OR

A B C

Used when GeneratorSide VTs are connected

Line-Ground.

Used when Generator Side are connected Line-Line

Figure 5-7 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram


5–10

52Gen

A B C

Generator

10

11

52b

M-3425A

a b c

52 53

M-3425A


65

64

M-3425A

A B C

Line to NeutralVoltage Rated

Cable

R

R45 44

M-3425A


OR

Figure 5-8 Function 59X Turn to Turn Fault Protection Three-Line Connection Diagram

Installation – 5

5–11

52Gen

A B C

Generator

10

11

52b

M-3425A

a b c

52 53

M-3425A


A

B

C

IN input can be connectedeither at Neutral or as Res

I N input can be connectedeither at Neutral or as Res

OR

R45 44

M-3425A


65 64

M-3425A

R

59XBus Ground

65

64

M-3425A

A B C

R

67N, 59DConnection

53

52

M-3425A

67NConnection

Residual CT

Bus Section

Figure 5-9 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-Line Connection Diagram


5–12

7. Press ENTER to display Third HarmonicDifferential Ratio:

3RD HARMONIC DIFF RATIO__________

Press ENTER once more to display theline side Third Harmonic Voltage:

3RD HARMONIC 3V0 VOLT__________

8. Press ENTER to display Stator LowFrequency Injection (20 Hz) Voltage:

STATOR LOW FREQUENCY INJECT._____ Volts

9. Display positive, negative and zerosequence voltages. Press ENTER untilthe unit displays:

POS SEQUENCE VOLTAGE_____ Volts

The positive sequence voltage should beV

POSy V

Ay V

By V

C or V

ABy V

BCy V

CA.

10. Press ENTER until the unit displays:

NEG SEQUENCE VOLTAGE0.0 Volts

The negative sequence voltage shouldbe V

NEGy 0.


ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE0.0 Volts

The zero sequence voltage should beV

ZEROy0.

If the negative sequence voltage showsa high value and the positive sequencevoltage is close to zero, the phasesequence is incorrect and proper phasesmust be reversed to obtain correct phasesequence. If the phase sequence isincorrect, frequency- and power-relatedfunctions will not operate properly andthe Monitor Frequency Status menuwill read LOW VOLT DISABLE.

If positive, negative and zero sequencevoltages are all present, check thepolarities of the VT connections andchange connections to obtain properpolarities.

5.4 Commissioning Checkout

During field commissioning, check the following toensure that the CT and VT connections are correct.

1. Press ENTER. After a short delay, theunit should display

VOLTAGE RELAYVOLT curr freq v/hz pwr

2. Press the right arrow button until the unitdisplays:

STATUS config sys STAT

3. Press ENTER. The unit should display:

VOLTAGE STATUSVOLT curr freq v/hz

4. Press ENTER. The unit should displayeither V

A, V

B, V

C (line-to-ground

connections) or VAB

, VBC

, VCA

(line-to-lineor line-ground to line-line connections).

PHASE VOLTAGEA= B= C=

Compare these voltages with actualmeasurements using a voltmeter. If thereis a discrepancy, check for looseconnections to the rear terminal block ofthe unit. If line-ground to line-line voltageselection is used, the voltages displayedare S3 times of the line-ground voltagesapplied.

5. Press ENTER to display the NeutralVoltage:

NEUTRAL VOLTAGE_____ Volts

The neutral voltage should be near zerovolts.

6. Press ENTER to display VX Voltage:

VX VOLTAGE_____ Volts

Installation – 5

5–13


3RD HARMONIC NTRL VOLT_____ Volts


FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT_______ mV

15. Press EXIT until the unit displays:

VOLTAGE STATUSVOLT curr freq v/hz

13. Press the right arrow to display:

CURRENT STATUSvolt CURR freq v/hz

14. Press ENTER to display line currents(I

A, I

B, I

C). The unit should display:

PHASE CURRENTA= B= C=

Compare these currents with themeasured values using a meter. If thereis a discrepancy, check the CTconnections to the rear terminal block ofthe unit.

15. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

PHASE CURRENTa= b= c=

Compare these currents with themeasured values using a meter. If thereis a discrepancy, check the CTconnections to the rear terminal block ofthe unit.


DIFFERENTIAL CURRENTA= B= C=

Differential current should be near zeroamps. If a significant amount ofdifferential current is present, check theCT polarities.

`7. Press ENTER for the unit to display:

NEUTRAL CURRENT______ Amps


GND DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT______ Amps


STATOR LOW FREQ INJECT.I= ___ mAmps

20. Press ENTER to display:

POS SEQUENCE CURRENT______ Amps

The positive sequence current should beIPOS

y Iay I

by I

c.


NEQ SEQUENCE CURRENT______ Amps

Negative sequence current should nearzero amperes.


ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENT______ Amps

The zero sequence current should beIZERO

y0 A. If a significant amount ofnegative or zero sequence current(greater than 25% of I

A, I

B, I

C,) then

either the phase sequence or thepolarities are incorrect. Modifyconnections to obtain proper phasesequence and polarities.


F49 THERMAL CURRENT #1______ Amps

Press ENTER once more to display:

F49 THERMAL CURRENT #2______ Amps


5–14

22. Press EXIT, then the Right arrow todisplay:

FREQUENCY STATUSvolt curr FREQ v/hz


FREQUENCY--DISABLED--


RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY0.00 Hz/Sec

25. Press EXIT, then right arrow to display:

V/HZ STATUSvolt curr freq V/HZ


VOLTS PER HERTZ_________ %

27. Press EXIT, then right arrow to display:

POWER STATUS POWR imped sync brkr

28. Press ENTER to display real power andcheck its sign. The unit should display:

REAL POWER_____ PU W

The sign should be positive for forwardpower and negative for reverse power. Ifthe sign does not agree with actualconditions, check the polarities of thethree neutral-end CTs and/or the PTs.


REACTIVE POWER________ PU VAr


APPARENT POWER________ PU VA


POWER FACTOR__ Lag/Lead

32. Press EXIT and then right arrow todisplay:

IMPEDANCE STATUS powr IMPED sync brkr


IMPEDANCE Zab (Ohms)R= X=


IMPEDANCE Zbc (Ohms)R= X=


IMPEDANCE Zca (Ohms)R= X=


IMPEDANCE POS SEQ (Ohms)R= X=


FIELD GND RESISTANCE______ Ohms

36. Press EXIT and then right arrow todisplay:

SYNC CHECK STATUS powr imped SYNC brkr


PHASE ANGLE___ degrees


DELTA VOLTAGE_____ Volts LO

Installation – 5

5–15


DELTA FREQUENCY_____ Hz HI

40. Press EXIT, then right arrow until unitdisplays:

BREAKER MON ACC. STATUS power imped sync BRKR


BREAKER MON ACC. STATUSA=0 A-cycles

Press ENTER to cycle through Acc.Status screens for B and C.


81A ACCUMULATORS STATUS FREQ_ACC i/o timer


81A #1 ACCUMULATORS STAT____ Cycles

Pressing ENTER will display a statusscreen for each of the six elements.


81A #1 ACC. STARTUP TIME00-20XX 00:00:00:000


IN/OUT STATUS freq_acc I/O timer


FL I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

Press ENTER once more to viewoutputs:

O8 O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1

47. Press EXIT, then arrow button to display:

TIMER STATUS freq_acc i/o TIMER


51V DELAY TIMERA= B= C=


51N DELAY TIMER_________ %


46IT DELAY TIMER_________ %


24IT DELAY TIMER_________ %


RELAY TEMPERATURE TEMP count powerup


RELAY TEMPERATURE25° C


5–16


COUNTERS temp COUNT powerup


OUTPUT COUNTER 1__________

Pressing ENTER will display a statusscreen for each of the eight outputs.


ALARM COUNTER__________

57. Press EXIT, then right arrow until theunit displays:

TIME OF LAST POWER UP temp count POWERUP


TIME OF LAST POWER UP05-Jan-2003 20:39:29

■■■■■ NOTE: The CT and VT polarities can be easilyverified by looking at the oscillographicwaveforms, using M-3801D IPSplot®

PLUS analysis software.


ERROR CODES ERROR check


ERROR CODES (LAST)__________

Pressing ENTER will display a statusscreen for three previous error codes.


RST LOCATION0000 CBR=0.0 BBR=0.0


COMM ERROR CODE (LAST)__________


COMM PACKET COUNTER__________


COMM RX ERROR COUNTER__________


SELFTEST COUNTER__________


RESET COUNTER__________


POWERLOSS COUNTER__________


CHECKSUMS error CHECK


SETPOINTS CHECKSUMEECS= BBCS= CAL=


CALIBRATION CHECKSUMEECS= BBCS= CAL=


ROM CHECKSUMEECS= BBCS= CAL=

Installation – 5

5–17

5.5 Circuit Board Switches andJumpers

See Figure 5-10, M-3425A Circuit Board for Jumperand Switch locations.

Accessing Switches and Jumpers88888 WARNING: Operating personnel must notremove the cover or expose the printed circuitboard while power is applied. IN NO CASE maythe circuit-based jumpers or switches be movedwith power applied.

88888 WARNING: The protective grounding terminalmust be connected to an earthed ground anytime external connections have been made tothe unit. See Figure 5-5, Note #4.

▲ CAUTION: This unit contains MOS circuitry,which can be damaged by static discharge. Careshould be taken to avoid static discharge on worksurfaces and service personnel.

1. De-energize the M-3425A.

2. Remove the screws that retain the topcover, lift the top cover off the relay.

3. Jumpers J5, J18, J20, J21, J22, J46,J60, and J61 are now accessible. SeeFigure 5-10, M-3425A Circuit Board forlocations.

4. Dipswitch SW1 is now accessible. SeeFigure 5-10 for location.

REPMUJ NOITISOP NOITPIRCSED

5J

BotA 2MOC6nipnolangisLTTB-GIRIdetaludomeD

CotB )tluafeD(CNBlangisB-GIRIdetaludoM

81J

BotA detresnirotsisernoitanimretmho0023MOC

CotB )tluafeD(noitanimreton3MOC

64J

BotA 1MOChtiwetarduaBserahs3MOC

CotB )tluafeD(2MOChtiwetarduaBserahs3MOC

06J

BotA )tluafeD(2MOCfo1nipotlangisDCDstcennoC

CotA 2MOCfo1nipotV51+stcennoC

16J

CotB 2MOCfo9nipotV51-stcennoC

BotA )tluafeD(taolf9nip2MOC

■■■■■ NOTE: Short circuit protection (100 ma limit) is incorporated on pins 1 and 9 when used for +/- 15V.

Table 5-1 Jumpers


5–18

TCELESEGATLOVTUPNIROTINOMTIUCRICPIRT

EGATLOVTUPNI02JREPMUJ

NOITISOP

12JREPMUJ

NOITISOP

22JREPMUJ

NOITISOP

cdV42 BotA BotA BotA

cdV84 CotB BotA BotA

cdV521 CotB CotB BotA

*cdV052 CotB CotB CotB

.yrotcafmorfdeppihssatluafeD*

Table 5-3 Trip Circuit Monitor Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration

1WShctiwspiD

1 2 3 4

X X X )pu(nepO

X )nwod(desolC

pu3 pu4 edoMnuR

pu3 nwod4 woleBnoituaCeeS*tluafedotMORPEEezilaitinI

nwod3 pu4 *noitacinummoCdnasedoCsseccAezilaitinI

nwod3 nwod4 esUyrotcaF

pu2 )tluafeDyrotcaF(elbasiDetadpUhsalF

nwod2 elbanEetadpUhsalF

pu1 tinUylppuSrewoPlauD

nwod1 tinUylppuSrewoPelgniS

nehwthgillliwDELcitsongaiDehtdnaffosniamerthgilDELKOeht,purewopretfA*detelpmocylirotcafsitasneebsahnoitarepo ..

Switches should not be changedwhile unit is energized.

▲ CAUTION: A loss of calibration, setpoints, and configuration will occur when the EEPROM is initialized todefault.

Table 5-2 Dip Switch SW-1

Installation – 5

5–19

Fig

ure

5-10

M-3

425A

Cir

cuit

Boa

rd

�

��

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

"

��

�

��

L!"

��

�

��

�

� ��

��

�

��

�

"

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

�

L!�

�"

��%&��'

��

��

�

�

� �

�"

�

�

�

�

��M��(��

��

�(�"�!2��

�"

.

��

��

L"�

��

��

�!�

��

��

��

�!

��

�!�

��"

��!

��

�!�

��!

��

L��

L��

L�

�"�

�"!

��

��

�"�

��

�!

��

��!

�"

��

��

��!

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�!"

��

��!

�!�

��

��"

��

��

��

�!

��

��

��

�!

��

��!

��

��

��

�!

��

��

�!� �!�

��

�!

�!�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�"

��

��

��

��"

��

��

��

��!��

��

��

��

��

��!

��"

��

��

.��

.

��

.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�"�

.��"

�� L�! ��!

��!

��"

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��L�

��

L��

��

�"�

�"�

��

��"

�"�

��"!

��"

��"�

��!

��

��

��

��

�� "

��

��

L��

��!

��

L�

��

�"�

��

��

��

�"

L��

��

��

��

�"

.��

��

. ��

��.

��

��

�� " �

��

�� .

��"

L�

��

��!

�"�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��"

��!

��"

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��!

��

��

��

L�"��

�� .��

��

��

L��

��

��

.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� ��

��

��"

��!

��

. ��

3�

��

��!

��

��!

�"�

��"

��

��!

��

�"�

��

��

��

��

��

�!

�!�

�!�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�"� ��

��

��

�"�

�"�

��!

��

��

�!�

.

��!

.

��

��

��

��

.

��

�"�

��!

��

��

.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

L��

L��

��

��

��

.

��

��

��!

��

��

��

.

��

��

��" ��"

��! ��

��!

L��

��"

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��""

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��"

��

��"

��

��

��!

��

��

��

��

��!

��"

��

��

��

��!

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

.

��

3��

��

��

��

��

��!

��"

�"

L��

��

L�

��"�

��

��

��

��

L��

��!

��

��

%�

��

��

��

��"�

��

��

+�

.

��

L��

�!�

%�

��

��

��

��"

3�

L��

�� !"

%"

��"

��

3�

��

L��

��

��

��"

��

��

��!

��

��

��

��

��

.��

��

�!�

��

��

�"

��

��

��

��

��! ��

��

L�"

L��

��!�

��

��

��

L!�

L��

L�

��

��

��"

��

��

��

%!

��!

��

��!��

��!

��

��

��

%�

%�

��

�

��

��

��

L��

��"

��

��

��

�� !

��

��

��!

L��

��

L"�

L�!

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

.

��

��

��

L�

��

��

��

L!

��!

L�

��

��

�&�

��!

��

��

��

��

��

3�

�!�

��

�!�

��

��

��

.

��

��

.

��

��

��!

L!�

��

��

%�

.

��"

��

��(��

��

��

��

%�

�!�

%�

L!�

��

.

��!

��

��

. ��

��

L�"

%�

.

��

�!�

��

��

��

��

��

.

��

L!�

L!�

L��

L��

��

��"

L�!

��

��

��

L��

��

��

��

3��

3��

L��

.

��"

��

��!

��

��

��

��

��

��

3�

�!!

��

��

��

��

.

��

��!

��"��

�

��"

L��

.

�""

L�

L�!

��

L!�

��"

�!

�&�

.

��

��

.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

3�

.

��

��"

��

.

��

��.

�"��

��

��

��!

��

.

��

.

��

��"

��

��

��

L� L�

L��

L�

L��

L��

L��

L��

�&�


5–20


6–1

Testing – 6

6 Testing

6.1 Equipment/Test Setup ............................................................... 6–2

6.2 Functional Test Procedures ....................................................... 6–6Power On Self Tests ................................................................. 6–721 Phase Distance ..................................................................... 6–824 Volts per Hertz ...................................................................... 6–925D/25S Sync Check .............................................................. 6–1227 Phase Undervoltage ............................................................ 6–1627TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral ........................... 6–1732 Directional Power, 3-Phase ................................................ 6–2140 Loss of Field ....................................................................... 6–2446 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ......................................... 6–2649 Stator Overload ................................................................... 6–2850 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent ...................................... 6–3050BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure .................................................. 6–3150/27 Inadvertent Energizing ................................................... 6–3350DT Definite Time Overcurrent for Split-Phase Differential . 6–3450N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent .................................. 6–3551N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ................................... 6–3651V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent withVoltage Control/Restraint ......................................................... 6–3759 Phase Overvoltage ............................................................. 6–3959D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential ................................. 6–4059N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence .............. 6–4159X Multipurpose Overvoltage ................................................. 6–4260FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ................................................ 6–4364F Field Ground Protection .................................................... 6–4464B Brush Lift Off Detection ................................................... 6–4664S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Injection .................. 6–4767N Residual Directional Overcurrent ..................................... 6–4978 Out of Step ......................................................................... 6–5381 Frequency ............................................................................ 6–5581A Frequency Accumulator .................................................... 6–5681R Rate of Change of Frequency .......................................... 6–5787 Phase Differential ................................................................ 6–5987GD Ground Differential ......................................................... 6–61Breaker Monitoring ................................................................... 6–63Trip Circuit Monitoring .............................................................. 6–65

IPSLogic ................................................................................... 6–66

6.3 Diagnostic Test Procedures .................................................... 6–66

6.4 Auto-Calibration ........................................................................ 6–75


6–2

6.1 Equipment/Test Setup

No calibration is necessary, as the M-3425AGenerator Protection Relay is calibrated and fullytested at the factory. If calibration is necessarybecause of a component replacement, follow theauto calibration procedure detailed in Section 6.4,Auto Calibration (or see Section 4.7, Calibrationsubsection for units without an HMI). These testprocedures are based on the prerequisite that thefunctions are enabled and have settings as describedin Chapter 2, Application, and that the unit is fittedwith the optional HMI module.

Equipment RequiredThe following equipment is required to carry out thetest procedures:

1. Two Digital Multimeters (DMM) with 10A current range.

2. 120 V ac or 0 to 125 V dc variablesupply for system power.

3. Three-phase independent voltage sources(0 to 250 V) variable phase to simulateVT inputs.

4. Three-phase independent current sources(0 to 25 A) variable phase to simulateCT inputs.

5. Electronic timer accurate to at least 8ms.

6. For relays with the 64F/B option:

a. Resistor decade box capable of 500ohms to 150 kOhms, able to step in100 ohm increments.

b. Capacitors ranging from 0.15 mf to10 mf.

7. For relays with the 64S option:

a. 20 Hz Voltage Generator (variable) 0to 40 V.

b. 20 Hz Current Generator (variable) 0to 40 mA.

Setup1. Connect system power to the power input

terminals 62 (hot) and 63 (neutral). Therelay can be ordered with a nominal inputpower supply of 110/120/230/240 Vac,110/125/220/250 Vdc or 24/48 Vdc. Anoptional redundant power supply isavailable.

■■■■■ NOTE: The proper voltage for the relay is clearlymarked on the power supply label affixedto the rear panel.

2. For each test procedure, connect thevoltage and current sources accordingto the configuration listed in the testprocedure and follow the steps outlined.

6–3

Testing – 6

■ NOTE: The phase angles shown here use leading angles as positive and lagging angles as nega-tive. Some manufacturers of test equipment have used lagging angles as positive, in which caseVB=120 V a120° and VC=120 V a240°. Similarly other voltages and currents phase angles shouldbe adjusted. These test configurations are for ABC phase rotation. They must be adjusted appropriate-ly for ACB phase rotation.

9��

��*�/

<�/�� <��D��<��E

�

��

��

��<��D��<��E

9��

��*�/

<�/��

��

��<�

9��

��*�/

��

��<

9��

��*�/

��

��<5�D��<��E

9��

��*�/

<�/��

Figure 6-1 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1

<��D��E

�

��

��

��

��

��

<�/��

<�/��

9��

��*�/

��*�/

9��

<�5�D��E

<5��D��E

<�

��

��

9��

��*�/

<�/��<��

��9�

Figure 6-2 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2


6–4

Ia ∠0°

55

54

57

56

59

58

Current Input 1

Polarity

Current Input 2

Current Input 3

Ib ∠–120°

Ic ∠120°

Figure 6-3 Current Inputs: Configuration C1

IA ∠0°

47

46

49

48

51

50

53

52

Current Input 1

Polarity

Current Input 2

Current Input 3

IB ∠–120°

IC ∠120°

IN

Figure 6-4 Current Inputs: Configuration C2

6–5

Testing – 6

Figure 6-5 Current Configuration C3

5�**��

��/�*��2��

�F��

��E

��

:F � �:

��

�F��

��

W

W

W

��

��

��9�<�/��!��*��

"<�*��:/�#

��

��

��

��

��9�5�**��!��*��

"<�*��:/�#

Figure 6-6 64S Test Configuration

Current Input 2

Polarity 47

AØ 46 IA

0°

49

BØ 48 IB

51

CØ 50 IC

•

•

•

120o

240o


6–6

6.2 Functional Test Procedures

This section details test quantities, inputs andprocedures for testing each relay function. Thepurpose is to confirm the functions’ designatedoutput operation, the accuracy of the magnitudepickup settings, and the accuracy of time delaysettings. Whereas the first test described, “PowerOn Self Test”, does not require electrical quantityinputs, all other functional tests do require inputs,and the necessary connection configurations arenoted.

In all test descriptions, a process for calculatinginput quantities to test the actual settings of thefunction will be given if needed. Disable all otherfunctions not being tested at the time. This action isto prevent the operation of multiple functions withone set of input quantities, which could causeconfusion of operation of outputs or timers. Thecomplete description of the method to disable/enablefunctions may be found in detail in Section 3.2,Configure Relay Data subsection or Chapter 4,Remote Operation. The complete description ofthe method to install setting quantities may befound in Section 3.4, Setpoints and Time Settingssubsection.

It is desirable to record and confirm the actualsettings of the individual functions before beginningtest procedures. Use Figure A-3, FunctionalConfiguration Record Form and Figure A-4, Setpoint& Timing Record Form, found in Appendix A,Configuration Record Forms, to record settings. Itis also possible to download the relay settings intoa file using IPScom®.

It may be desirable to program all test settings in analternate profile, or to save the relay settings inIPScom to preserve desired setup.

The tests are described in this section in ascendingfunction number order as used in Chapter 2,Application.

■ NOTE: User should disable all functions notcurrently being tested before beginningany function test.

During the lifetime of the relay, testing of individualfunctions due to changes in application settings willbe more likely than an overall testing routine. Anindex of the individual test procedures is illustratedat the beginning of this chapter.

■■■■■ NOTE: Care must be taken to reset or enableany functions that have been changedfrom their intended application settingswhen the test procedures are complete.

Many options for test sequences and methods arepossible. As an example, the operation of the outputcontacts can be tested along with the operation ofthe LEDs in the Diagnostic Test Procedures. Theoperation of the output contacts may also beconfirmed with the LED and function operation duringFunctional Test Procedures, if desired.

If timer quantities are to be checked, the timer mustbe activated by the appropriate output contacts.The contact pin numbers are enumerated in Table6-1, Output Contacts.

It is suggested that copies of the following be madefor easy referral during test procedures:

Input Configurations – pg 6–3 to 6-5Output Contact Numbers – pg 6–68Relay Configuration Table – pg A–2Setpoint & Timing Record Form – pg A–20

6–7

Testing – 6

Power On Self Tests

VOLTAGE INPUTS: none

CURRENT INPUTS: none

1. Apply proper power to the power input terminals (60 HOT and 61 NEUTRAL).

2. The following sequence of actions will take place in the following order:

a. The unit will display the following:

POWER ON SELFTESTSXXXXXXxxxxxxxxxxx

b. All LEDs will illuminate for approximately 1 second.

c. The POWER and RELAY OK LEDs will remain illuminated, all other LEDs will extinguish.

d. The unit will display the following:

POWER ON SELFTESTSPASS

e. The unit will display the model number:

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.M-3425A

f. The unit will display the firmware version.

BECKWITH ELECTRICD-0114xx.xx.xx

g. The unit will display the serial number.

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.SERIAL NUMBER xxx

h. The POWER LED(s) will illuminate.

i. The RELAY OK LED will flash (or stay on as programmed in the diagnostic menu).

j. The BREAKER CLOSED LED will remain illuminated. If the relay breaker position contactIN1 is connected to a breaker position contact (52b) and the breaker is open the LED will beextinguished.

3. The power-on self-tests end with the unit displaying the system date, time and default logo.

4. If there are any recorded targets they are then displayed.


6–8

21 Phase Distance (#1, #2 or #3)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V1

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1

TEST SETTINGS: Diameter P Ohms (0.1 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500.0)

Offset O Ohms (–100 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (–500.0 to 500.0)

Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)

Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)

Programmed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8)

VT Configuration Line - Ground or Line-Line

■■■■■ NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the element with the higher “reach” (Diameter plus Offset)setting first (lower current), and test the lower reach setting operation, since the higher reachsetting operation can be tested without disabling the lower setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 21 Phase Distance settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 21 Phase Distance settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®

Communications Software.

3. Disable all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings,Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions.

4. Connect test voltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1.

5. Connect test current inputs as shown in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1.

6. The level of current at which pickup operation is to be expected for an individual setting isdetermined as follows:a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (P ohms + O ohms) [O, usually set at zero ohms].b. For Line-Ground configuration, define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage)I R ohms). The

voltage level may be selected based on the desired test current level. For Line-Lineconfiguration, define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage/S3) I R ohms).

Pickup Test:

1. Set the three-phase voltages to the Selected Voltage value from Step 6b above.

2. Set the phase angle between the voltage and current inputs at (A) degrees from settings above(for Line-Line configuration, set the phase angle at (A–30°).

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three-phase inputcurrents until the 21 PHASE DISTANCE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates onthe IPScom Function Status screen.

The level at which the 21 PHASE DISTANCE actuates should be equal to I calculated in Step 6with the resulting impedance 0.1 ohms or 5%.

4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the three-phase input currents. Theassigned OUTPUT LEDs will extinguish.

5. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets.

Time Test:

1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close.

2. Apply approximately 110% of the current (I) found in Step 6, and start timing. The contacts willclose after D cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

6–9

Testing – 6

24 Volts/Hz Definite Time (#1 or #2)


CURRENT INPUTS: None

TEST SETTINGS: Definite Time Pickup P % (100 to 200)



■■■■■ NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the 24 Definite Time element with the lower pickup settingfirst and test the higher setting operation, since the lower setting operation can be tested withoutdisabling the higher setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 24 Voltz/Hz Definite Time settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 24 Voltz/Hz Definite Time settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.



5. The Volts per Hertz pickup level at a percentage setting at Nominal Frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is:Pickup voltage = (P% ÷ 100) x (Nominal Voltage) where the Nominal Values have beenprogrammed in the system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and are recorded onFigure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage on Phase Auntil the 24 VOLTS/Hz LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen. The voltage level of operation will equal to P volts ±1%.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Phase A voltage. The assignedOUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply approximately (P + 10 volts) volts, and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles± 25 cycles.

3. Repeat Pickup Test and Time Test for Phase B and C.


6–10

24 Volts/Hz Inverse Time



TEST SETTINGS: Inverse Time Pickup P % (100 to 200)

Inverse Time Curve C (1 to 4)

Time Dial (Curve 1) K (1 to 100)

Time Dial (Curves 2-4) (0.0 to 9.0)

Reset Rate R Seconds (1 to 999)

Programmed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8)

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 24 Voltz/Hz Inverse Time settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 24 Voltz/Hz Inverse Time settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.

3. Enter a Function 24 Voltz/Hz Definite Time Pickup #1 setting of 200%, with a Delay of 1200cycles.



6. The Volts/Hz pickup level of a percentage setting at nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is: Pickupvoltage = (P% ÷ 100) x (Nominal Voltage) where the Nominal Values have been programmed inthe system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and are recorded on Figure A-3,Functional Configuration Record Form.

7. Test levels may be chosen at any percentages of Nominal Voltage which are a minimum of 5%higher than the pickup percentage, P%. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculated inStep 6.)

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage on Phase Auntil the 24 VOLTS/Hz LED light illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen. The voltage level of operation will equal P volts ±1%.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Phase A voltage. The assignedOUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply a voltage equal to the chosen test level calculated in Step 6 to Phase A and start timing.

The operating time will be as read from the appropriate Inverse Curve Family and K (Time Dial)setting (refer to Appendix D, Inverse Time Curves). The measured time should be within the timecorresponding to 1% of the pickup value.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton.

6–11

Testing – 6

4. Reduce the applied voltage and start timing when the voltage drops below the pickup value, stoptiming when the TARGET LED extinguishes. The time should be the reset time within ±1 cycle or±1%, whichever is greater.

5. Repeat Pickup Test and Time Test for all chosen test levels. The curve portion extending to lowerthan P% V/Hz values are inactive and can be ignored. The tested points verify the operatingtimes of the function.

■■■■■ NOTE: If retesting is required, remove power from the unit or wait for the programmed reset timeperiod before the next test to assure resetting of the timer.


6–12

25D Dead Check



TEST SETTINGS: Dead V1 See Below

Dead VX

See Below

Dead V1 & VX

See Below

Dead Input Enable DIN Input (1 to 6)

Dead Time Delay DD Cycles (1 to 8160)

Dead Voltage Limit DVL Volts (0 to 60)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 25D Dead Check settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 25D Dead Check settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®



4. The 25D function requires positive sequence voltage and VX for testing. The following tests will

reference the positive sequence voltage as V1.


6. Set V1 and VX to the Nominal Voltage.

The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and shouldbe recorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Dead V1 Hot VX Test:

1. Enable Dead V1 Hot VX and disable Dead V

X Hot V1 (if enabled) utilizing either the HMI or IPScom

Communications Software..

2. Set V1 to DVL +5 V.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the voltage applied to V1until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Statusscreen. The voltage level should be equal to DVL 0.5 V or 0.5 %.

4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the voltage applied to V1. The OUTPUTLED will extinguish.

5. Set V1 to the Nominal Voltage.

6. Decrease VX to less than DVL, verify that the function does not operate.

6–13

Testing – 6

Dead VX Hot V1 Test:

1. Enable Dead VX Hot V1 and disable Dead V1 Hot V

X (if enabled) utilizing either the HMI or IPScom


2. Set V1 to the Nominal Voltage.


3. Set VX to DVL +5 V.

4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the voltage applied to VX

until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Statusscreen. The voltage level should be equal to DVL 0.5 V or 0.5 %.

5. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the voltage applied to VX. The OUTPUT

LED will extinguish.

6. Set VX to the Nominal Voltage.

7. Decrease V1 to less than DVL, verify that the function does not operate.

Dead V1 Dead VX Test:

1. Enable Dead V1 Dead VX utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

2. Disable Dead VX Hot V1 and Dead V1 Hot V

X (if enabled).

3. Set V1 and VX to DVL +5 V.

4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the voltage applied to V1and V

X until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function

Status screen. The voltage level should be equal to DVL 0.5 V or 0.5 %.

5. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the voltage applied to V1 and VX. The

OUTPUT LED will extinguish.

6. Set V1 to Nominal Voltage.

7. Decrease VX to less than DVL, then verify that the function does not operate.

8. Set VX to Nominal Voltage.

9. Decrease V1 to less than DVL, then verify that the function does not operate.

Dead Input Enable Test:

1. Select one of the Dead Inputs (DIN) and activate it.

2. Repeat the Dead VX Hot V1 Test and Dead V1 Hot V

X Test, verify that the function operates as in

Dead VX Hot V1 Test and Dead V1 Hot V

X Testing.

3. Deactivate the DIN and repeat the Dead VX Hot V1 Test and Dead V1 Hot V

X Test once more.

Verify that the function does not operate.

4. Disable Dead Input feature.

Dead Timer Test:


2. Enable Dead V1 Dead VX, utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

3. Set V1 and VX to DVL +5 V.

4. Remove V1 and VX and start timing. The contacts will close within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.


6–14

25S Sync Check



TEST SETTINGS: Phase Angle Window PA Degrees (0 to 90)

Voltage LimitsUpper Limit UL Volts (60 to 140)Lower Limit LL Volts (40 to 120)

Sync Check Time Delay SD Cycles (1 to 8160)

Delta Voltage Limit DV Volts (1.0 to 50.0)

Delta Frequency Limit DF Hz (0.001 to 0.500)

Phase Select (A, B, C)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 25S Sync Check settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 25S Sync Check settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®



4. The 25 function requires only one phase voltage and VX for testing in the Line-to-Ground

configuration. The phase voltage used for reference may be selected through the System Setupmenu. The following tests will reference the phase voltage as V1, although any phase may beused for testing. Line-to-Line testing will follow the same procedures, with V1 representing theproper Line-to-Line phase input. Each test below can be performed using any of the three phasesas a reference.


6. Set V1 and VX to the Nominal Voltage.


Phase Angle Limit Test:

1. Establish a phase angle difference of more than PA +5°.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the phase angledifference until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom®

Function Status screen. The phase angle difference should be equal to PA ±1°.

3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the phase angle difference. TheOUTPUT LED will extinguish.

6–15

Testing – 6

Upper Voltage Limit Test:

1. Apply a voltage 5 V greater than UL to V1.

2. Ensure VX voltage is less than UL but greater than LL. Slowly decrease the voltage applied to V1

until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Statusscreen. The voltage should be equal to UL 0.5 V or ±0.5 %.

3. Increase the voltage applied to V1. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. If desired, repeat this testusing V

X.

Lower Voltage Limit Test:

1. Apply a voltage 5 V less than LL to V1.

2. Ensure VX voltage is greater than LL but less than UL. Slowly increase the voltage applied to V1

until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Statusscreen. The voltage level should be equal to LL ±0.5 V or ±0.5 %.

3. Decrease the voltage applied to V1. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. If desired, repeat this testusing V

X.

Sync Check Time Delay Test:

1. Set V1 and VX to the Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay

is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration RecordForm.

2. Establish a phase angle difference of more than PA +5°.


4. Remove the phase angle difference and start timing. The contacts will close after SD cycleswithin –1 to +3 cycles or 1 %.

Delta Voltage Test:

1. Set the Upper and Lower Voltage limits to their maximum and minimum values, respectively.

2. Set VX to 140 V and V1 to 40 V.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage applied to V1until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Statusscreen. The voltage difference should be equal to DV 0.5 V.

4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the voltage applied to V1. The OUTPUTLED will extinguish. If desired, repeat the test using V

X with V1 at 140 volts.

Delta Frequency Test:

1. Set V1 and VX to the Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay

is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration RecordForm.

2. Set the frequency of V1 to 0.05 less than Nominal Frequency –DF.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the frequency of V1 untilOutput Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom® Function Statusscreen. The frequency difference value should be equal to DF 0.0007 Hz or 5 %.

4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the frequency of V1. The OUTPUT LEDwill extinguish. If desired, repeat the test using V

X with V1 at Nominal Frequency.


6–16

27 Phase Undervoltage, 3 Phase (#1, #2, #3)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)



■■■■■ NOTE: If 27 #1 and 27 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with thehigher setting first and test the lower setting operation. The higher setting operation could then betested without disabling the lower setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 27 Phase Undervoltage settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 27 Phase Undervoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.



Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the Phase A input voltageuntil the 27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen.

The voltage level should be equal to P volts ±0.5 V or ± 0.5%. When both RMS and Line-Groundto Line-Line is selected, the accuracy is 0.8V or 0.75%.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the Phase A input voltage to the nominalvoltage, the OUTPUT LEDs will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply approximately (P – 1) volts and start timing.

The contacts will close after D cycles ± 20 cycles or 1%(RMS), or 1 cycle or 0.5% (DFT),whichever is greater.

3. Repeat Pickup Test and Time Test for Phase B and C.

6–17

Testing – 6

27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral (#1 or #2)


CURRENT INPUTS: See Below

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (0.10 to 14.0)

Positive Sequence Volt Block PSV Volts (5 to 180)

Forward Power Block FP PU (0.01 to 1.00)

Reverse Power Block RP PU (–1.00 to –0.01)

Lead VAR Block –VAR PU (–1.00 to –0.01)

Lag VAR Block +VAR PU (0.01 to 1.00)

Lead Power Factor Block PFLead PU (0.01 to 1.00)

Lag Power Factor Block PFLag PU (0.01 to 1.00)

High Band Forward Power Block HFP PU (0.01 to 1.00)

Low Band Forward Power Block LFP PU (0.01 to 1.00)


Programmed Outputs Z OUT ( 1 to 8)

■■■■■ NOTE: If 27TN #1 and 27 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the onewith the higher setting first and test the lower setting operation. The higher setting operation couldthen be tested without disabling the lower setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral settings to be tested utilizingeither the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.



Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the neutral voltage inputuntil the 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates onthe IPScom Function Status screen. The voltage level should be equal to P volts ±0.1 V or ±1%.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the neutral voltage to nominal voltage.The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.

3. Press TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets.

Time Test:


2. Apply approximately (P – 1) volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within1 cycle or 1%.


6–18

Positive Sequence Voltage Block Test:

1. Decrease the neutral voltage input to less than P volts.

2. Apply a three phase voltage input greater than PSV volts.

The 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED will illuminate, then the OUTPUT LED will illuminatewhen the delay setting has timed out.

3. Enable the Positive Sequence Voltage Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom® CommunicationsSoftware.

4. Decrease the applied three phase voltage until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The voltage level should be equal to PSV volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%.

5. Disable the Positive Sequence Voltage Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom CommunicationsSoftware.

Forward/Reverse Power Block Test:

1. Apply a three phase nominal voltage input.


2. Apply a nominal current input consistent with Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1.

The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded onFigure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

■■■■■ NOTE: The POWER Real p.u. value can be obtained utilizing either the HMI (Status/Power Status) or IPScom® Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status).

3. Adjust three phase voltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Real p.u. value greater than FP.

4. Enable the Forward Power Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

5. Decrease the applied three phase current until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Real p.u. value should be equal to FP ±0.01 PU or ±2%.

6. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software disable the Forward Power Blockand then enable the Reverse Power Block.

7. Adjust three phase voltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Real p.u. value greater than RP.

8. Decrease the applied three phase current until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Real p.u. value should be equal to RP ±0.01 PU or ±2%.

9. Enable the Reverse Power Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

Lead/Lag VAr Block Test:





6–19

Testing – 6

■■■■■ NOTE: The POWER Reactive var value can be obtained utilizing either the HMI (Status/Power Status) or IPScom® Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status).

3. Adjust three phase voltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Reactive var value greater than–VAR.


4. Enable the Lead VAR Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.

5. Adjust the applied three phase current phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Reactive var value should be equal to –VAR ±0.01 PU or ±2%.

6. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software disable the Lead VAR Block andthen enable the Lag VAR Block.

7. Adjust three phase voltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Reactive var value greater than+VAR.

8. Adjust the applied three phase current phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Reactive var value should be equal to +VAR ±0.01 PU or ±2%.

9. Disable the Lag VAR Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

Lead/Lag Power Factor Block Test:





3. Adjust three phase voltages and currents to obtain a Lead Power Factor Block value greater thanPFLead.


4. Enable the Power Factor Lead Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom CommunicationsSoftware.

5. Adjust three phase voltage phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Factor Lead Block value should be equal to PFLead ± 0.01 PU or ±2%.

6. Disable the Power Factor Lead Block.

7. Enable the Power Factor Lag Block.

8. Adjust three phase voltages and currents to obtain a Lag Power Factor Block value greater thanPFLag.


9. Enable the Power Factor Lag Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

10. Adjust three phase voltage phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Factor Lag Block value should be equal to PFLag ±0.01 PU or ±2%.

11. Disable the Power Factor Lag Block.


6–20

Forward Power Block (Band) Test:





3. Enable the High/Low Band Forward Power Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom CommunicationsSoftware.

4. Adjust three phase voltages and currents to obtain a High/Low Forward Power Block value eithergreater than the Low Band Forward Power Block LFP, or less than the High Band Forward PowerBlock HFPThe 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED will illuminate, then the OUTPUT LED will illuminatewhen the delay setting has timed out.

5. Adjust the three phase current until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes.

The Power Real p.u. value should be within the High Band and Low Band setpoint band ±0.1 PUor ±2%.

6. Disable the High/Low Band Forward Power Block.

6–21

Testing – 6

32 Directional Power, 3 Phase (#1, #2, #3)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P PU (–3.000 to +3.000)



VT Configuration Line-Ground

Power Sensing (Over/Under)

#3 Directional Power Sensing (Real/Reactive)

■■■■■ NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the element with the lower pickup setting first and test thehigher setting operation, since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the highersetting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 32 Directional Power settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 32 Directional Power settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®





6. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual power setting is given bymultiplying the PU pickup value (P above) by the Nominal Current value previously input to therelay. The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should berecorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

7. Set the three phase voltages to the Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value previouslyinput to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A-3, FunctionalConfiguration Record Form.

Pickup Test, Positive/Forward Over Power Flow:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three phase currentsuntil the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen.

The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6, ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever isgreater.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton.

3. Decrease the currents. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.



6–22

Pickup Test, Negative/Reverse Over Power Flow:

1. Set the phase currents at 180 degrees from the respective phase voltages.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three phase currentsuntil the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom® Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6,±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater.


4. Decrease the three phase currents. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Pickup Test, Positive Forward Under Power Flow:

1. Set the phase currents in phase with the respective phase voltages.

2. Select Underpower sensing utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the three phase currentsuntil the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6,±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater.


4. Increase the three phase currents. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Pickup Test, Negative/Reverse Under Power Flow:

1. Set the phase currents at 180 degrees from the respective phase voltages.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the three phase currentsuntil the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6,±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater.


4. Increase the three phase currents. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Pickup Test, Reactive Over Power (Element #3 Only):

1. Set the Three phase voltages, current magnitudes and phase angles to less than the Reactivep.u. pickup level.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly swing current angles until the 32DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to the Reactive Pickup ±2% or±0.002 PU, whichever is greater.


4. Adjust phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish.


6–23

Testing – 6

Pickup Test, Reactive Under Power (Element #3 Only):

1. Set the Three phase voltages, current magnitudes and phase angles to greater than the Reactivep.u. pickup level.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly swing current angles until the 32DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom®

Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to the Reactive Pickup ±2% or±0.002 PU, whichever is greater.


4. Adjust phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply approximately 110% of the pickup current and start timing. The contacts will close after Dcycles within +16 cycles or ±1%.


6–24

40 Loss of Field (#1 or #2, VC #1 or #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Circle Diameter P Ohms (0.1 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500)

Offset O Ohms (–50 to 50)1 Amp CT Rating (–250 to 250)


Voltage Control V Volts (5 to 180)

Delay with VC Cycles (1 to 8160)

Directional Element E Degrees (0 to 20)


VT Configuration Line-Ground

■■■■■ NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (diameter minus offset)setting first (lower current) and test the lower “reach” setting operation. Since the higher settingoperation can be tested without disabling the lower setting, the 40 functions will be enabled whenthe tests are complete.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 40 Loss of Field settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 40 Loss of Field settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®





■■■■■ NOTE: For proper testing, use I ≤ 3 x CT rating.

6. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows:a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (P - O ohms) where O is usually negative.

b. Define “trip current” as I = (Selected Voltage ÷ R ohms). The voltage level may be selectedbased on the desired test current level.

c. Define “offset current” as IO = (Selected Voltage ÷ O ohms).

7. Set the three-phase voltages VA, V

B, and V

C to the Selected Voltage value from Step 6, and

set the phase angle between the voltage and current inputs to 90° (current leading voltage).

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three-phase currentsuntil the 40 LOSS OF FIELD LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen. The level will be equal to “I” calculated in Step 6 with the resultingimpedance within 0.1 ohms or 5%.

6–25

Testing – 6

2. If the offset setting is negative, continue to increase the three-phase currents until the 40 LOSSOF FIELD LED light extinguishes, or the pickup indicator extinguishes on the IPScom® FunctionStatus screen. The level will be equal to “IO” calculated in Step 6 with the resulting offsetimpedance within ±0.1 ohms or ±5%.


4. Decrease the three-phase currents. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:



B, and V

C to the Selected Voltage value from Step 6, and set

the phase angle between the voltage and current inputs to 90° (current leading voltage).

3. Apply I + 10% Amps and start timing. Contacts will close after D cycles K1 cycle or K1%.

Time Test With Voltage Control:


2. Enable the Voltage Control setting utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.


B, and V

C to a voltage where the positive sequence voltage is

less than the Voltage Control setting.

4. Set phase currents and phase angles to establish the impedance value within the mho pickup andstart timing. Contacts will close after D cycles 1 cycle or 1%.


6–26

46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time

VOLTAGE INPUTS: None

CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1 (MODIFIED)

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup Def Time P % (3 to 100)



■■■■■ NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 46 function, it is suggested thatNominal Voltage be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs foroperation.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time settings to be tested utilizingeither the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect test current inputs as shown in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1 (Modified).Modify Configuration C1 by exchanging Current Input 2 and 3 (Phase B current = Input 3 andPhase C current = Input 2).


5. The level of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is given by;Pickup current = (P% ÷ 100) x Nominal Current previously input to the relay. The NominalCurrent value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure A-3,Functional Configuration Record Form.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three-phase currentsuntil the NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT 46 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen. The level will be equal to pickup current calculated in Step 5±0.5% of 5 A.


3. Decrease the three-phase currents. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply current of at least (1.1 x pickup) amps and start timing. The contacts will close after Dcycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

6–27

Testing – 6

46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time


CURRENT INPUTS: Configuration C1 (MODIFIED)

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup Inv Time P % (3 to 100)

Time Dial Setting K (1 to 95)

Maximum Trip Time D Cycles (600 to 65,500)

Reset Time R Seconds (1 to 600)


■■■■■ NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 46 function, it is suggested thatNominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs foroperation.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time settings to be tested utilizingeither the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect test current inputs as shown in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1 (Modified).Modify Configuration C1 by exchanging Current Input 2 and 3 (Phase B current = Input 3 andPhase C current = Input 2).


5. The current pickup level at a percentage setting is: Pickup current = (P% ÷ 100) x NominalCurrent previously input to the relay.a. Test levels may be chosen at any percentages of Nominal Current which are a minimum of

5% higher than the pickup percentage, P%. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculatedin amps.)

b. The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should berecorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Time Test:


2. Apply currents equal to the chosen test levels calculated in Step 5 and start timing. The operatingtime will be as read from Figure 2-24, Negative Sequence Inverse Time Curves, negativesequence current in % of Nominal Current and appropriate K (Time Dial) setting, or the maximumtrip time (whichever is faster).

■■■■■ NOTE: If retesting is required, power should be removed from the unit or wait 4 minutes before the nexttest to assure resetting of the timer.

3. Repeat Step 2 for all test levels chosen.

Reset Time Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton.

2. Reduce the applied voltage and start timing when the voltage decreases to less than the pickupvalue, stop timing when the TARGET LED extinguishes, or the pickup indicator extinguishes onthe IPScom Function Status screen. The time should be approximately equal to the reset timesetting R.

■■■■■ NOTE: If retesting is required, power should be removed from the unit or wait for the reset time before thenext test to assure resetting of the timer.


6–28

49 Stator Overload Protection (#1, #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Time Constant τ Minutes (1.0 to 999.9)

Max Overload Current Imax

Amps (1 to 10)1 Amp CT Rating (.2 to 2)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 49 Stator Overload settings to be tested. This test requires that thevalues for the following elements (described in detail in Chapter 2, Application) be determined:

• τ = time constant

• I0 = pre-load current

• Imax = maximum allowed continuous overload current

2. Enter the Function 49 Stator Overload settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®




5. Calculate t (time to trip in minutes) for the desired test settings as follows:

Where:

��/�?��-��6��

��9��

��

�

Where: t = time to trip in minutesτ = time constantIIIIIL= relay current (applied)IIIIIPL = pre-load currentIIIIImax = maximum allowed continuous overload current

Pickup Test:1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the current until the

STATOR OVERLOAD 49 LED illuminates or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen.

The current level of operation will be (Imax) Amps 0.1 A ( 0.02 Amp for 1 A CT) or 3%.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the current. The OUTPUT LED willextinguish.

3. Press TARGET RESET button to remove targets.

6–29

Testing – 6

Time Test (Cold Start):1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close.

■■■■■ NOTE: The 49 Stator Overload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values can be obtained utilizing either the HMI(Status/Current Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status).

2. Determine the 49 Stator Overload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values. If the either value is greaterthan 0.00 A, then remove power from the relay and then reapply power to reset the current values.

3. Apply a three phase current (I) to the relay greater than (Imax) Amps and start timing.

The time to trip should be t minutes 5 %.

Time Test (Preload):1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close.

■■■■■ NOTE: The 49 Stator Overload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values can be obtained utilizing either the HMI(Status/Current Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status).

2. Determine the 49 Stator Overload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values. If the either value is greaterthan 0.00 A, then remove power from the relay and then reapply power to reset the current values.

3. Apply a three phase preload current to the relay equal to (IO) Amps and allow current readings tostabilize.

4. Apply a three phase current (I) to the relay greater than (Imax) Amps and start timing.

The time to trip should be t minutes 5 %.


6–30

50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (#1, #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.1 to 240.0)1 Amp CT Rating (0.1 to 48.0)

Delay Cycles (1 to 8160)


■■■■■ NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50 function, it is suggested that NominalVolts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either theHMI or IPScom® Communications Software.



Pickup Test:

1 Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 3 (Phase C)until the PHASE OVERCURRENT 50 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen.

The current level of operation will be (P) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%.


3. Decrease the current input. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply approximately 110% of P amps and start timing. The operating time will be 1 cycle or 1%.

3. Reduce Current Input 3, to 0 amps.

4. Test may be repeated using Current Inputs 1 (Phase A) and 2 (Phase B) individually.

6–31

Testing – 6

50BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure



TEST SETTINGS: 50BF-Ph Pickup P Amps (0.10 to 10.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.02 to 2.00)

50BF-N Pickup N Amps (0.10 to 10.00)1 Amp CT Rating (.02 to 2.00)


Breaker Failure Initiate B OUT (1 to 8)Input Initiate I IN (1 to 6)


Test Setup:


2. Connect test current inputs as shown in Figure 6-5, Current Inputs: Configuration C3. CurrentInput #2 only.

Test Setup for 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation:

1. Determine the Function 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure settings to be tested.

2. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software enter the following settings:a. Enable the 50BF-Phase Element and disable the 50BF-Neutral Elementb. 50BF-Ph Pickup Setting > P amps, Time delay setting = D cycles.

Testing 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation:

1. Externally short any ONE set of contacts (I) IN shown above.

2. Short IN1 (connect contacts 10 & 11) to simulate 52b contact closure (breaker open). Alternatively,the external contact may be operated if all connections are made.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 3 until the50BF BREAKER FAILURE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen.



5. Decrease the current input. The OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish.


Time Test 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation:


2. Apply approximately 110% of P amps and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within1 cycle or 1%.



6–32

Test Setup for 50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation:

1. Determine the Function 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure settings to be tested.

2. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software enter the following settings:a. Enable the 50BF-Neutral Element and the 50BF-Phase Elementb. 50BF-N Pickup Setting > N amps, 50BF-Ph Pickup Setting < P amps, Time delay setting =

D cycles.

Testing 50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation:,

1. Short IN1 (connect contacts 10 & 11) to simulate 52b contact closure (breaker open).

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 3 until the50BF BREAKER FAILURE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen.

The current level of operation will be (N) amps ±0.1 amps or ±2%.


5. Decrease the current input. The OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish.


Time Test 50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation:


2. Apply approximately 110% of N amps and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within1 cycle or 1%.


Test Setup for HV Breaker Failure Operation:

1. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software enter the following settings:a. Disable the 50BF-Neutral Element and 50BF-Phase Element.b. Select 1 input initiate from #2 to #6, utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications

Software.c. Time delay setting = D cyclesd. Input 1 IN breaker closed state.

Testing HV Breaker Failure Operation:


2. Initiate operation by externally shorting any ONE set of contacts (I) IN except Input 1 above.Remove short from Input (1) IN. The operating time will be D cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

6–33

Testing – 6

50/27 Inadvertent Energizing



TEST SETTINGS: 50 Pickup P Amps (0.50 to 15.00)1 Amp CT Rating (.01 to 3.00)

27 Pickup V Volts (5 to 130)

Pickup Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)

Dropout Delay T Cycles (1 to 8160)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.




50 Overcurrent Test and 27 Undervoltage Test:

1. Set Voltage inputs to zero volts, then verify the Pickup Time Delay times out after a minimum ofD cycles.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A current (Input1) until the 50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNG LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminateson the IPScom Function Status screen.

The level of operation will be (P) amps ±0.1 A or ±2%.

3. If desired, set the dropout time delay (T) to minimum setting.

4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage input in stages(waiting at least T cycles between each voltage change) until the 50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNGLED extinguishes, or the pickup indicator extinguishes on the IPScom Function Status screen..

The level of operation will be V volts ±0.5 Volts.

27 Pickup Delay and Dropout Delay Test:


2. Reduce voltage to 0 volts and start timing. The operating time to close will be D cycles within 1cycle or 1%.

3. Increase current by one (1) amp.

4. Input approximately 110% of V volts (pickup setting) and start timing. The operating time to openwill be T cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.


6–34

50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential), #1 or #2



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup A Phase A Amps (0.20 to 240.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 48.00)

Pickup B Phase B Amps (0.20 to 240.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 48.00)

Pickup C Phase C Amps (0.20 to 240.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 48.00)

Delay Cycles (1 to 8160)


■■■■■ NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50DT function, it is suggested thatNominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs foroperation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for thetest and enabled after the tests are complete.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.

3. Disable the functions listed above. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings,Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions.



B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value

previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A-3,Functional Configuration Record Form.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A Current Inputuntil the PHASE OVERCURRENT 50 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen.

The current level of operation will be (A) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%.


3. Decrease the Phase A Current Input. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply approximately 110% of A amps and start timing. The operating time will be 1 cycle or1%, whichever is greater.

3. Reduce Phase A Current Input to 0 amps.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for Phase B & C.

5. If testing is complete, enable any functions disabled for this test.

6–35

Testing – 6

50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent


CURRENT INPUTS: As described




■■■■■ NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50N function, it is suggested thatNominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs foroperation.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either theHMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input IN (terminals

53 and 52) until the NEUTRAL O/C 50N/51N LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminateson the IPScom Function Status screen.



3. Decrease Current Input IN. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply approximately 110% of P amps to Current Input IN (terminals 53 and 52) and start timing.

The operating time will be D cycles ±1 Cycle or ±1%.

3. Reduce Current Input IN to 0 amps.


6–36

51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent




Standard Inverse Time Curves:1

Curve C (1, 2, 3 or 4)

Time Dial Setting K (0.5 to 11.0)

IEC Inverse Time Curves:1

(inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse/long time inverse)

IEC Curve C (5, 6, 7 or 8)



1 Either a standard curve or an IEC curve must be selected.

■■■■■ NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 51N function, it is suggested thatNominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs foroperation.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either theHMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


4. Refer to Appendix D, Figures D5–D12, or Tables D-1A and D-1B. Test levels may be chosen interms of multiples of pickup value and associated time in seconds. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levelschosen and calculated in amps.)

Time Test:


2. Apply current equal to the chosen test level calculated in Step 6 to Current Input IN (Terminals 53

and 52) and start timing.

Operating time will be within ±3 cycles or ±3% whichever is greater.

3. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for all test levels chosen. The tested points verify the operating times of thefunction.

6–37

Testing – 6

51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.50 to 12.00)

1 Amp CT Rating (0.10 to 2.40)

Standard Inverse Time Curves:1

Curve C (1, 2, 3 or 4)


IEC Inverse Time Curves:1

(inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse/long time inverse)

IEC Curve C (5, 6, 7 or 8)



1 Either a standard curve or an IEC curve must be selected.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either theHMI or IPScom® Communications Software.



5. Connect test current inputs as shown in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1

6. Test levels may be chosen at any ampere values which are a minimum of 50% higher than thepickup amps, P Amps. It is suggested that the user select 4 or 5 test levels to verify curve.

Pickup Test:

1. If Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint is enabled, then disable 51V Voltage Control/Restraintutilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A CurrentInput until the PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminateson the IPScom Function Status screen.

The current level of operation will equal P Amps ±0.1A or ±1%.


4. Reduce the Phase A Current Input to 0 amps. The assigned OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. If Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint is enabled, then disable 51V Voltage Control/Restraintutilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.


6–38

3. Apply current equal to the chosen test level calculated in Step 6 to Phase A Current Input andstart timing. The operating time will be as read from the appropriate Inverse Curve Family and K(Time Dial) setting in Appendix D, Figures D-5 through D-8, or Tables D-1A through D-1B. Theaccuracy specified is valid for currents above 1.5 times the pickup current.

4. Reduce Phase A Current Input to 0 amps. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


6. Repeat Steps 3, 4 and 5 for all test levels chosen.

Voltage Control Test:

1. If Voltage Control is disabled, then enable 51V Voltage Control utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®


2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A (B,C) CurrentInput until the PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminateson the IPScom Function Status screen.


4. When the assigned OUTPUT LED(s) illuminates, then increase the Phase A(B,C) Input Voltageto at least 0.5 Volts greater than V Volts.

The assigned OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish at V Volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%.


6. Reduce Phase A (B,C) Current Input to 0 amps.

7. Decrease the Phase A (B,C) Input Voltage to Nominal Voltage.


Voltage Restraint Test:

1. If Voltage Restraint is disabled, then enable 51V Voltage Restraint utilizing either the HMI orIPScom Communications Software.

2. Set P Amps equal to 2 Amps utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

3. Apply current equal to 1.5 Amps to the Phase Current Input.

4. Increase the Phase A (B,C) Input Voltage to 75% of Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltagevalue previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on FigureA-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

The PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V LED will illuminate, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen.

5. Repeat Steps 2, 3 and 4 with reduced input voltage values and current reduced by the samepercentage as value (see Figure 2-38).

6–39

Testing – 6

59 Phase Overvoltage, 3-Phase (#1, #2, #3)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5 to 180)


Input Voltage Select (Phase or Positive Sequence)


■■■■■ NOTE: If 59 #1 and 59 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with thelower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could then betested without disabling the higher setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 59 RMS Overvoltage settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 59 RMS Overvoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®





B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage.


Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A Voltage Inputuntil the 59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on theIPScom Function Status screen.

The voltage level of operation should be equal to P Volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. When both RMS andLine-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the accuracy is 0.8V or 0.75%


3. Decrease the Phase A Voltage Input to Nominal Voltage. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply (P+1) Volts to the Phase A (B,C) Voltage Input and start timing. The contacts will closeafter D cycles 1 cycle or 1% (DFT) or within +20 cycles or 1% (RMS).

3. Reduce Phase A (B,C) Voltage Input to Nominal Voltage.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for Phase B & C.


6–40

59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential

VOLTAGE INPUTS: As described


TEST SETTINGS: Ratio (0.1 to 5.0)


Line Side Voltage LSV (VX or 3V

O Calculated)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential settings to be tested utilizing eitherthe HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect a voltage input to VN at 180 Hz (150 Hz for 50 Hz unit) terminal numbers 44 and 45.

Pickup Test:

■■■■■ NOTE: If 3VO is being used, then use anyone of the phase voltages or all three at zero sequence.

1. Apply a voltage greater than VN to the selected line side voltage (V

X or 3V

O) at 180 Hz (150 Hz for

50 Hz unit).

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Voltage Input VN until the

59D THIRD HARM VOLT DIFF LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen.


3. Decrease the Voltage Input (VXor 3V

0) to less than the ratio pickup level. The OUTPUT LED(s) will

extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply a voltage greater than the ratio pickup level and start timing. The contacts will close after Dcycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

6–41

Testing – 6

59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (#1, #2, #3)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5.0 to 180)



■■■■■ NOTE: If 59N #1 and 59N #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one withthe lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could thenbe tested without disabling the higher setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 59N RMS Overvoltage settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 59N RMS Overvoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect a voltage input to VNterminal numbers 44 and 45.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Voltage Input VN until the

59N NEUT/GND OVERVOLT LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen.

The voltage level of operation should be equal to P Volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%.


3. Decrease the Voltage Input VNto 0 volts. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply (P+1) Volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 1 cycle or1%.


6–42

59X Multi-purpose Overvoltage (#1 or #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Volts (5.0 to 180.0)



■■■■■ NOTE: If 59X #1 and 59X #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one withthe lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could thenbe tested without disabling the higher setting.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 59X Overvoltage settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 59X Overvoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®



4. Connect a voltage input to VXterminal numbers 64 and 65.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Voltage Input VX until the

59N NEUT/GND OVERVOLT LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScomFunction Status screen.

The voltage level of operation should be equal to P Volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%.


3. Decrease the Voltage Input VXto 0 volts. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply (P+1) Volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 1 cycle or1%.

6–43

Testing – 6

60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection



TEST SETTINGS: Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)

Seal-in Delay Cycles (1 to 30)


■■■■■ NOTE: It is necessary for “FL” to be designated as an initiating input (see Section 2.3, Setpoints andTime Settings) before this function can be tested.

■■■■■ NOTE: Refer to Figure 2-46, Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic, for single phase and three phase fuseloss.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software. (FL initiate must be selected for this test.)





B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value

previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A-3,Functional Configuration Record Form.

Time Test:


2. Disconnect the Phase A (B,C) Voltage Input and start timing. The 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS LEDand Output Z LEDs will illuminate, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom FunctionStatus screen.

The operating time will be D cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

3. Reconnect the Phase A (B,C) Voltage Input.


5. Repeat Steps 2, 3 and 4 for Phase B and C.

Time Test - Three Phase Fuse Loss:


2. Enable Three Phase Fuse Loss Detection utilizing either the HMI or IPScom CommunicationsSoftware.

3. Apply current to Phase A 1.25% greater than Nominal Current.

4. Disconnect Phase A, B and C Voltage Inputs and start timing. The 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS LEDand Output Z LEDs will illuminate, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom FunctionStatus screen. The operating time will be D cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

5. Reconnect the Phase A, B and C Voltage Inputs.



6–44

64F Field Ground Protection (#1 or #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P kOhms (5 to 100)


Injection Frequency IF Hz (0.10 to 1.00)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect an M-3921 Field Ground Coupler and decade box as described in Figure 6-7, FieldGround Coupler.

5. Set decade box resistance to 10% greater than pickup P kOhms.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the resistance on thedecade box until the FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED illuminates or the pickup indicator onthe IPScom Function Status screen illuminates.

The level of operation will be P kOhms ±1 kOhms or ±10%.


3. Increase the resistance on the decade box. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Set the resistance on the decade box to 90% of P and start timing. The operating time will beafter D cycles, within ±(2/IF + 1).

6–45

Testing – 6

When the capacitance value and the operating frequency have been determined, the actual insulationresistance can be verified by installing a variable resistor (5 to 100 KΩ) and a discrete capacitor to thecoupler module (M-3921).

88888 WARNING: When auto-calibrating, the jumper used to short pins 2 & 3 must be removed whencalibration is complete. Placing the M-3921 in service with this jumper installed will result in seriousdamage.

14+'(*7

�5��5�

8��9��0��

��: �9��

��1��

��

��

��

��;��!� ��)

��"��:��!14+-(#

0��""�/

+<

+*

+&

*

'

#

+

(

#

0��;�2��0��8��

0��"��8��=��"��

��

&$��#$$��4��2��""�/��

�:>#2�@;#0$

*The value of Cf should approximate the rotor capacitance.

Figure 6-7 Field Ground Coupler

*


6–46

64B Brush Lift-Off Detection



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P mV (0 to 5000)


Injection Frequency IF Hz (0.10 to 1.00)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect a M-3921 Field Ground Coupler and the test equipment described in Figure 6-7, FieldGround Coupler.

5. Set Rf to open (infinity) and Cf to 1 μF.

Pickup Test:

1. Access the FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT display under the VOLTAGE menu in STATUS. Set thepickup (P) to 110% of the displayed value.

Refer to Section 3.3, Status/Metering, for details that describe how to access the STATUS MENUwhich contains the FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT value in mV.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then Open the Test Switch. The FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED will illuminate or the pickup indicator on the IPScom Function Statusscreen will illuminate.

3. Close the Test Switch. The FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED will extinguish or the pickupindicator on the IPScom Function Status screen will extinguish.

Time Test:


2. Remove the capacitance connected to the decade box and start timing. The operating time will beafter D cycles, within ±(2/IF + 1) sec.

6–47

Testing – 6

64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by low frequency injection

VOLTAGE INPUTS: Adjustable 20 Hz Voltage Source (0 to 40 V)

CURRENT INPUTS: Adjustable 20 Hz Current Source (0 to 40 mA)

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P mA (2 to 40)


Undervoltage Inhibit X V (5 to 30)

Undervoltage Inhibit (Enabled/Disabled)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 64S 100% Stator Ground by injection settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 64S 100% Stator Ground settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect a variable 20 Hz voltage and current input as described in Figure 6-6, 64S TestConfiguration.

Pickup Test (Undervoltage Inhibit Disabled):

1. Adjust the 20 Hz Voltage Generator to apply 25 Volts to terminals 44 and 45.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz currentapplied to terminals 52 and 53 until the 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND LED illuminates, or thefunction status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function haspicked up.

The 20 Hz current level should be equal to P mA 1 mA or 1%.

3 Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton.



The 20 Hz current level should be equal to 0.6 P mA 1 mA or 1%.




The 20 Hz current level should be equal to 1.4 P mA 1 mA or 1%.


10. Decrease the applied 20 Hz current to 0 mA and the applied 20 Hz voltage to 0 Volts.


6–48

Pickup Test (Undervoltage Inhibit Enabled):

■■■■■ NOTE: This test assumes that the value of X is less than 25 Volts.

1. Enable the 64S Undervoltage Inhibit utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

2. Adjust the 20 Hz Voltage Generator to a value less than X.

3. Adjust the 20 Hz Current Generator to a value greater than P.

4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz voltageapplied to terminals 44 and 45 until the 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND LED illuminates, or thefunction status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function haspicked up.

The 20 Hz voltage level should be equal to X 0.5 V to 0.5%.


6. Decrease the applied 20 Hz current to 0 mA and the applied 20 Hz voltage to 0 Volts.

Timer Test:



3. Step the 20 Hz current applied to terminals 52 and 53 to a value greater than P and start timing.The contacts will close after D cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

6–49

Testing – 6

67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time

VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below


TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Amps (0.50 to 240.0)1 Amp (0.1 to 48.0)

Directional Element See Below


Max Sensitivity Angle MSA Degrees (0 to 359)

Operating Current 3IO or I

N

Polarization Type* VN, V

X, 3V

O (Calculated)


* VX cannot be selected if Function 25 (Sync) is enabled. 3V

O can only be used with Line-Ground VT.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 67NDT Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time settings to betested.

2. Enter the Function 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time settings to be testedutilizing either the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


4. Disable the Directional Element.

5. Connect inputs for the polarization type and operating current selected for testing.

Pickup Test (non-directional):

1. Apply current 10% less than pickup P to the operating current. If 3I0, use any one of I

A, I

B, or I

C, or

all three in zero sequence.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the current applied tothe selected operating current until the GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LED illuminates, or thefunction status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function haspicked up.

The level should be equal to PI3 Amps 0.1A or 3%.


4. Decrease the current applied to all phases of the selected operating current. The OUTPUT LEDwill extinguish.


6–50

Directional Test:

1. Enable the Directional Element utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.


3. Set the voltage of the selected polarization type to the Nominal Voltage (If 3V0is selected, use

any one of the phase voltages, or all three in zero sequence.) The Nominal Voltage valuepreviously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A-3,Functional Configuration Record Form.

4. Set the current angle to an angle greater than 100° from MSA.

5. Apply current 10% greater than P to the input of the selected operating current.

6. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly swing the angle of the selectedoperating current applied towards the MSA until the GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LEDilluminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates thatthe function has picked up.

The angle should be equal to A –90° or +90°, depending to which side of MSA the current hasbeen set.


8. Swing the current angle away from the MSA. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish.

Timer Test:


2. Disable the Directional Element utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

3. Apply P +10% Amps to the input of the selected operating current, and start timing. The contactswill close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or 1%.

6–51

Testing – 6

666667N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time

VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below



Directional See Below

Standard Inverse Time Curves

Definite Time\Inverse\Very Inverse\Extremely InverseTime Dial TD (0.5 to 11.0)

IEC Inverse Time Curves

IECI / IECVI / IECEI / IECLTITime Dial TD (0.05 to 1.10)

Operating Current 3IO or IN

Max Sensitivity Angle MSA Output (0 to 359)

Polarization Type VN, VX, 3VO (Calculated)


* VX cannot be selected if Function 25 (Sync) is enabled. 3V

O can only be used with Line-Ground VT.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time settings to be testedutilizing either the HMI or IPScom® Communications Software.


4. Disable Directional Element.

5. Refer to Appendix D, Inverse Time Curves, and IEC table below to calculate test times for levelsrepresented on the graphs. It is suggested that 4 or 5 test levels be chosen.

Curve 5

�6�7��81(

"�8��!�19 :

Curve 6

�6�7��1 82

"�!�19 :

Curve 7

�6�7��;�

"��!�19 :

Curve 8

�6�7��1��

"�!�19 :

IEC Class AStandard Inverse

IEC Class BVery Inverse

IEC Class CExtremely Inverse

IEC Class DLong Time Inverse

t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup

Time Delay Test:


2. Apply the input current used in the calculations from Step 5 to the input of the selected operatingcurrent, and start timing.

The operating time will be ±3 cycles or ±5% of the calculated time. Repeat this step for each testlevel chosen. The points tested verify the operation of this function.


6–52

Directional Test:

1. Enable Directional Element.


3. Apply Nominal Voltage to the input of the selected Polarization Type. If 3V0, use any one of the

phase voltages, or all three at zero sequence.


4. Set the current angle to an angle greater than 100° from MSA.

5. Apply current 10% greater than PI3, (for type 3, use P) to all three phases.

6. Press and hold the Target Reset pushbutton, then slowly swing the angle of the selectedoperating current towards the MSA until the GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LED illuminates, orthe function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the functionhas picked up.

The angle should be equal to A –90° or +90°, depending to which side of MSA the current hasbeen set.


8. Swing the current angle away from the MSA. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish.

6–53

Testing – 6

78 Out of Step



TEST SETTINGS: Circle Diameter P Ohms (0.1 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500)

Offset O Ohms (–100 to 100)1 Amp CT Rating (–500 to 500)

Impedance Angle A Degrees (0 to 90)


Blinder Impedance B Ohms (0.1 to 50.0)1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 250.0)

Pole Slip Counter (1 to 20)

Pole Slip Reset Cycles (1 to 8160)

Trip on MHO Exit See Below

Programmed Output Z OUT (1 to 8)

Test Setup:

1. An accurate stopwatch is required for this test.

2. Determine the Function 78 Out of Step settings to be tested.

3. Establish communications with the relay utilizing IPScom® Communications Software.

4. Enter the Function 78 Out of Step settings to be tested utilizing IPScom CommunicationsSoftware.





B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage.

The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should berecorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Pickup Test:

1. Disable the Function 78 Out of Step TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting, then set the delay, D, to aminimal setting (2–3 cycles).

2. Open the IPScom Out-of-Step Dialog Box, Figure 4-18 (Relay/Monitor/Out of Step Dialog Box).

3. While monitoring the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of theInput Currents to a point similar to point Z0 in Figure 2-48.

4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then sweep the current angle towards point Z1.

When the impedance passes through point Z1, verify that the 78 OUT OF STEP LED illuminates,or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the functionhas picked up.


6–54

5. Pause testing until the delay timer has time to expire, then continue to sweep the current angle topoint Z2, and verify output Z operates as point Z2 is crossed, and resets after the seal-in timedelay.

6. If testing is complete, then reduce voltages and currents to zero.

Blocking on Stable Swing Test:

1. While monitoring the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of theInput Currents to a point outside of the mho circle.

2. While monitoring the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of theInput Currents to point Z0 in Figure 2-54.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then sweep past point Z1.

When the impedance passes through point Z1, verify that the 78 OUT OF STEP LED illuminates,or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the functionhas picked up.

4. Pause testing until the delay timer has time to expire, then reverse the sweep direction and sweepthe current angle to point Z1.

As point Z1 is crossed, verify output Z does not operate and the 78 OUT OF STEP LEDextinguishes or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicatesthat the function has reset.


Pickup Test (Trip on mho Exit):

1. Enable the TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting.

2. While monitoring the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of theInput Currents to point Z0 in Figure 2-54.

3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then sweep the current angle towards point Z1.

When the impedance passes through point Z1, verify that the 78 OUT OF STEP LED illuminatesor the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the functionhas picked up.

4. Pause testing until the delay timer has time to expire, then continue to sweep the current angle tobeyond point Z2. Verify that output Z does not operate as point Z2 is crossed.

5. Sweep the impedance further towards point Z3. Verify output Z operates as point Z3 is crossed,and resets after the seal-in time delay has timed out.


6–55

Testing – 6

81 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, #4)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Hz (50.00 to 67.00)50 Hz Relay (40.00 to 57.00)

Time Delay D Cycles (3 to 65,500)50 Hz Relay


■■■■■ NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the elements with the settings nearest to nominal frequency first(testing over or underfrequency functions).

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 81 Frequency settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 81 Frequency settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®





B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage (nominal frequency). The

Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should berecorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase/decrease the InputVoltage (V

A, V

B, and V

C) Frequency until the FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED illuminates or the

function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function haspicked up.

The frequency level will be equal to P Hz ±0.02 Hz only if P is within 3 Hz of Fnom,

otherwise,0.1 Hz.

2. Increase/decrease the Input Voltage (VA, V

B, and V

C) Frequency to nominal input frequency. The

OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Time Test:


2. Apply (P + or – 0.5) Hz and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 2 cyclesor 1%, whichever is greater.


6–56

81A Frequency Accumulator (Band #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1


TEST SETTINGS: High Pickup P Hz (50.00 to 67.00)50 Hz Relay (40.00 to 57.00)

Lo Pickup (#1 only) P Hz (50.00 to 67.00)50 Hz Relay (40.00 to 57.00)

Delay D Cycles (3 to 360,000)

Acc Status Cycles (0 to 360,000)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 81A Frequency Accumulator settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 81A Frequency Accumulator settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.




B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage (nominal frequency). The

Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should berecorded on Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Output Test:


2. Set the frequency to a value between the upper and lower limits of the selected band under testand start timing.

3. Utilizing either the HMI (Status/81A Accumulator Status) or IPScom Communications Software(Relay/Monitor/Accumulator Status), verify that the Accumulator Status value for the band undertest is incrementing.

Output Contacts Z will close after D cycles within 2 cycles or 1%.

4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the remaining bands if desired.

6–57

Testing – 6

81R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P Hz/Sec (0.10 to 20.00)


Negative SequenceVoltage Inhibit N % (0 to 99)


Test Setup:

1. It is recommended that the 81 Function be used to establish a window of operation for the 81RFunction which is smaller than the actual sweep range of the frequency applied. This isaccomplished as follows:

■■■■■ NOTE: The frequencies given are suggested for testing rates below 10 Hz/Sec. Higher rates will requireconsideration of the capabilities of the test equipment involved.

a. Enable the 81#1 with a unique Output assigned, a Pickup Setting of 1 Hz greater than theminimum frequency of the ramp and a time delay and seal-in time setting at minimum (Thiswill result in an operational window that is free of erroneous Hz/Sec measurements when thevoltage source begins or ends the sweep.).

b. Enable the 81#2 with a unique Output assigned, a Pickup Setting of 1 Hz less than themaximum frequency of the ramp and a time delay and seal-in time setting at minimum (Thiswill result in an operational window that is free of erroneous Hz/Sec measurements when thevoltage source begins or ends the sweep.).

■■■■■ NOTE: Using this setup, it is important to remember that the 81 elements being used will be operating inthe 81R blocking regions, and the 81R contact operation must be distinguished from the 81contacts.

F81#1 Block 81R Active Region F81#2 Block

56.5 Hz 57.5 Hz 60 Hz 62.5 Hz 63.5 Hz

c. Utilizing a jumper, connect the 81#1 and 81#2 assigned Outputs to a unique Input.d. Set the 81R Function to block on this input.

2. Determine the Function 81R Rate of Change of Frequency settings to be tested.

3. Enter the Function 81R Rate of Change of Frequency settings to be tested utilizing either the HMIor IPScom Communications Software.

4. Disable all other functions prior to testing with the exception of Function 81. Refer to Section 3.2,Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describedisabling/enabling functions.

■ NOTE: Testing of the 81R function requires a 3-phase voltage source capable of smoothly sweeping thefrequency of all voltages at a variable rate, continuously.



B, and V

Cto the Nominal Voltage (nominal frequency).



6–58

Pickup Test:

1. Calculate the time for the pickup setting, then apply a sweep rate of 25% less than the Pickup (P)to all three phases.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the sweep time until theFREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the MonitorFunction Status screen indicates that the function has picked up.

The level should be equal to P 0.05 Hz/Sec. or 5 %.

3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the sweep time. The OUTPUT LED willextinguish.

Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit Test:


2. Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases at a sweep rate 25% above P. The Nominal Voltagevalue previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on FigureA-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.

Verify that the FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED illuminates, or the function status indicator onthe Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up.

3. Swing the phase angle of a Phase Voltage and monitor the Positive and Negative SequenceVoltage levels. The 81R OUTPUT should reset when the negative sequence voltage is N %,

0.5% of the positive sequence voltage.

Timer Test:


2. Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases at a sweep rate 25% below P. The Nominal Voltagevalue previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on FigureA-3, Functional Configuration Record Form.


4. Apply a sweep rate 25% above P and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within+20 cycles.

6–59

Testing – 6

87 Phase Differential (#1 or #2)



TEST SETTINGS: Minimum Pickup P Amps (0.20 to 3.00)1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 0.60)

Percent Slope S % (1 to 100)


CT Correction Amps (0.5 to 2.0)


■■■■■ NOTE: Although a voltage input is not required for the testing of the 87 function, it is suggested thatNominal Voltage be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs foroperation.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 87 Phase Differential settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 87 Phase Differential settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®




Minimum Pickup Test:

1. Set Current Input 1( Ia) to 0 Amps.

2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 2 (IA ) until

the PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the MonitorFunction Status screen indicates that the function has picked up.

The current level of operation will be equal to P amps ±0.1 A or ±5%.

3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Current Input 2 (IA ). The OUTPUT

LED(s) will extinguish.


5. Repeat Steps 1,2,3 and 4 for each remaining phase exchanging IA(B,C)

and Ia(b,c)

as appropriate.

Timer Test:


2. Apply a current level to Current Input 2 (IA ) at least 10% greater than the minimum current pickup

level and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within 1 cycle or ±1%. When theTime Delay is set to 1 cycle, the relay operation is less than 1-1/2 cycles.


6–60

Slope Test:

1. Define a representative number of testing points to verify the trip curve.

2. For each Ia (Current Input 1) test point defined in Step 1, calculate the expected operating

current IA(Current Input 2) as follows:

(IA-Ia) > (IA+Ia) x Slope/100 ÷2Difference in currents is greater than sum of the currents times the per unit slope ÷2

or IA = [(1+K) ÷ (1-K)] x Ia where K = S/200 and where S is % slope input above.

■■■■■ NOTE: For tests above the restraint current {(IA+I

a)/2} value of 2X Nominal Current; use a slope % value

equal to 4 times the input slope value (S) for these computations.

3. Set Current Input 1 (Ia ) and Current Input 2 (I

A ) to the values chosen in Step 1 and calculated in

Step 2 respectively.

4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase either Current Input 1 or 2until the PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on theMonitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up.

The current level of operation will be equal to IA ±0.1 A or ±2% slope calculation. The difference in

current must be greater than minimum pickup current for proper operation.

5. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the larger CURRENT. The OUTPUTLED(s) will extinguish.


6–61

Testing – 6

87GD Ground Differential





CT Ratio Correction (0.10 to 7.99)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Function 87GD Ground Differential settings to be tested.

2. Enter the Function 87GD Ground Differential settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI orIPScom® Communications Software.


4. Connect a current input to IN terminals 53 and 52.

5. Connect a current input to IA terminals 46 and 47, or I

Bterminals 48 and 49.

Non–Directional Pickup Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input IN (terminals

53 and 52) until the GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LED illuminates, or the function statusindicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up.

The current level of operation will be equal to P amps ±0.1 A or 5%.

2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Current Input IN to 0 Amps. The

OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish.


Timer Test:


2. Apply a current level to Current Input IN at least 10% greater than the minimum current pickup

level and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within ±1 cycle or ±1%.

3. Decrease the Current Input IN to 0 Amps.

Directional Time Test:


2. Apply a current of 1.0 Amp with a phase angle of 0 degrees to Current Input IN

(terminals 53 and52).

3. Apply a current of P – 0.9 amps with a phase angle of 180 degrees to either Current Input IAor I

Band start timing.

The contacts will close after D cycles within 1 cycle or 1%.

4. Decrease the applied currents to 0 Amps.


6–62


6. Set the phase angle of the Current Input selected in Step 3, to 0 degrees, the Current Inputs arenow in phase.

7. Reapply a current of 1.0 Amp to Current Input IN(terminals 53 and 52).

8. Reapply a current of P – 0.9 Amps to the Current Input selected in Step 3, and start timing.

The relay will not operate. If the IAor I

Bcurrent input value is reduced to 140 ma or less and the

difference current exceeds the pickup value, the relay will operate regardless of polarities of thecurrents.

9. Decrease the applied currents to 0 amps.

6–63

Testing – 6

BM Breaker Monitoring


CURRENT INPUTS: As Described

TEST SETTINGS: Pickup P kAmps (kA2)* (0 to 50,000)

Delay D Cycles (0.1 to 4095.5)

Timing Method ( IT or I2T)

Preset Accumulators

Phase A, B, or C kAmp (kA2) Cycles*(0 to 50,000)


Blocking Inputs (1 to 6)

Output Initiate (1 to 8)

Input Initiate (1 to 6)

* kA/kA cycles or kA2/kA2 cycles is dependent on the Timing Method that is selected.

Test Setup:

1. Determine the Breaker Monitoring Function settings to be tested (Input Initiate or Output Initiate).

2. Enter the Breaker Monitoring Function settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom®


3. Connect a current input to IA terminals 46 and 47, IB terminals 48 and 49, and IC terminals 50 and51.

4. Connect inputs for the polarization type selected for testing.

Accumulator Test:

1. Apply a current value that considers Timing Method and Pickup Setting to current input IA.

2. Place a jumper between the designated input or output contact selected as initiate.

3. Utilizing either the HMI (Status/Breaker Monitor Accumulator Status) or IPScom CommunicationsSoftware (Relay/Monitor/Accumulator Status), verify that the Accumulator Status value for PhaseA increments in D cycles 1 cycles or 1%.

4. Remove the jumper placed in Step 2.

5. Decrease applied IAcurrent to 0 amps.

6. If desired, repeat test for IB and I

C.

Pickup Test:

1. Apply a current value that considers Timing Method and Pickup Setting to current input IA.

■■■■■ NOTE: If the target pickup setting is a large value (0 to 50,000) the Preset Accumulator Settings featurecan be used to pre-set the accumulator values to just below the target setting.


6–64

2. Utilizing either the HMI (Status/Breaker Monitor Accumulator Status) or IPScom CommunicationsSoftware (Relay/Monitor/Accumulator Status) to monitor the accumulator value, place a jumperbetween the designated input or output contact selected as initiate and then remove the jumper.

Following the time out of the Delay the accumulator will increment, repeat the placement andremoval of the jumper as necessary to increment the accumulator to a point where the pickupsetting is exceeded.

3. When the accumulator value exceeds the pickup value the OUTPUT LED(s) will illuminate, or thefunction status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function haspicked up.

The output contacts Z will operate in D cycles 1 cycle or 1% from the last initiate.

4. If desired, repeat test for IB and I

C.

6–65

Testing – 6

Trip Circuit Monitoring

VOLTAGE INPUTS: As Described


TEST SETTINGS: Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)


Test Setup:

1. Determine the Trip Circuit Monitoring function settings to be tested.


3. Connect a DC voltage supply capable of supplying 24/48/125/250 V dc (marked on the rear of therelay) to terminals 1 (+) and 2 (–) on the relay.


Pickup Test:

1. Apply the applicable DC voltage (24/48/125/250 V dc marked on the rear of the relay) to terminals1 and 2.

2. Enable the Trip Circuit Monitoring function and then enter the settings to be tested utilizing eitherthe HMI or IPScom Communications Software.

3. Remove the DC voltage applied in Step 1. The OUTPUT LED will illuminate, or the function statusindicator on the Monitor Function Status screen will indicate that the Trip Circuit Monitoringfunction has actuated.


4. Simulate a 52b contact open by connecting a jumper between terminal 11 (INRTN) and terminal 10(IN1) which. The BRKR CLOSED and OUTPUT LEDs on the front of the relay should extinguish.

Also, the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen will indicate that theTrip Circuit Monitoring function has cleared and the Secondary Status screen will indicate that thebreaker is closed.

5. Remove the jumper installed in Step 4.



6–66

IPSlogicTM (#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6)

VOLTAGE INPUTS: As Needed

CURRENT INPUTS: As Needed

TEST SETTINGS: Time Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160)


Blocking Inputs (1 to 6)

Output Initiate (1 to 8)

Function Initiate Pickup (All Available Functions)

Function Initiate Time Out

Initiate by Communication

Input Initiate (1 to 6)

Block from Communication

Test Setup:

1. Refer to Figure 2-59, External Function Setup, for logic gate configurations.

2. Select gate configuration (AND/OR/NAND/NOR) for Output Initiate, Function Initiate, BlockingInputs and Inputs Main.

3. Select Initiating Inputs for each gate (if AND gate is selected, ensure at least two outputs arechosen). It will be necessary to enable and operate other functions to provide inputs for theFunction Initiate and Output Initiate gates.

Time Test:


2. Connect a jumper from IN RTN (Terminal 11) to the designated Inputs (Terminals 1–6) for theIPSlogic gates and start timing. The IPS LOGIC LED and the OUTPUT LED will illuminate, or thefunction status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function haspicked up.

The operating time will be D cycles ±1 cycle or 1%.

Blocking Input Test:

1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then place a jumper from IN RTN (terminal 11)to the designated Blocking Inputs (terminals 1-6) to be tested. The EXTERNAL #1 EXT 1 LED willextinguish.

2. Repeat Step 1 for each designated external triggering contact.

6–67

Testing – 6

6.3 Diagnostic Test Procedures

OverviewThe diagnostic test procedures perform basicfunctional relay tests to verify the operation of thefront-panel controls, inputs, outputs, andcommunication ports.

88888 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODEwhen protected equipment is in service. EnteringDIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipmentis in service removes all protective functions ofthe relay.

The diagnostic menu includes the following tests:• OUTPUT (Output Test Relay)

• INPUT (Input Test Status)

• LED (Status LED Test)

• TARGET (Target LED Test)

• EX_IO (Expanded I/O Test, Not Availableat this time)

• BUTTON (Button Test)

• DISP (Display Test)

• COM1 (COM1 Loopback Test)

• COM2 (COM2 Loopback Test)

• COM3 (COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire)

Each test is described individually in this section.

The diagnostic menu also provides access to thefollowing relay feature settings:

• CLOCK (Clock On/Off)

• LED (Relay OK LED Flash/Solid)

• CAL (Auto Calibration)

• FACTORY (Factory Use Only)

Auto Calibration is described in detail in Section6.4, Auto Calibration.

Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode88888 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODEwhen protected equipment is in service. EnteringDIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipmentis in service removes all protective functions ofthe relay.

1. Press ENTER to access the main menu.

2. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilthe following is displayed:

SETUP UNITSETUP exit


SOFTWARE VERSIONVERS sn access number

4. Press the right arrow pushbutton untilthe following is displayed:

DIAGNOSTIC MODEtime error DIAG

5. Press ENTER, the following warning willbe displayed:

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

88888 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODEwhen protected equipment is in service. EnteringDIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipmentis in service removes all protective functions ofthe relay.

6. Press ENTER, the relay will reset andDIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarilydisplayed followed by:

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)OUTPUT input led target

ex_io button disp com1 com2 com3 clock led cal factory

This marks the beginning of the diagnostic menu.The left arrow and right arrow pushbuttons are usedto navigate within the diagnostic menu. Exiting thediagnostic menu is accomplished by pressing EXIT,PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE isdisplayed, then pressing EXIT a second time.


6–68

Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–9)■■■■■ NOTE: This test does not include testing of

Output Relay #10 (Power Supply).

1. Ensure the protected equipment is in aconfiguration/state that can support relayoutput testing.

2. Confirm the positions of the outputs inthe unoperated or OFF position. Thiscan be accomplished by connecting aDMM (Digital Multimeter) across theappropriate contacts and confirming openor closed. The de-energized or OFFposition for outputs 1 through 9 are listedin Table 6-1.

YALERTUPTUOREBMUN

NEPOYLLAMRONTCATNOC

DESOLCYLLAMRON*TCATNOC

1 43-33 --

2 23-13 --

3 03-92 --

4 82-72 --

5 62-52 --

6 42-32 --

7 02-12 22-12

8 71-81 91-81

9)tseT-fleS(

41-51 61-51

01rewoP()ylppuS

-- 21-31

etats)dezigrene-ed(FFOehtotsdnopserroctcatnocehtfonoitisop"lamroN"*.yalerehtfo

Table 6-1 Output Contacts

3. If the relay is already in the DiagnosticMode, then go to Step 4.

If the relay is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the relay diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering Relay Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step 4.

4. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to OUTPUT (Upper Case).

OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)OUTPUT input led target

ex_io button disp com1 com2 com3 clock

led cal factory

If OUTPUT is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select OUTPUT.

5. Press ENTER, the relay will display thefollowing:

RELAY NUMBER1

6. Select the Output Relay (1-9) to be testedutilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons.

7. Press ENTER. The following will bedisplayed:

RELAY NUMBER 1OFF on

8. Select ON (Upper Case) utilizing theRight arrow pushbutton. The relay willrespond as follows:a. Output relay energizes (On position)b. Appropriate red OUTPUT LED

illuminates if equipped (9 and 10 donot have LEDs).

If testing all output relays, then pressEXIT to return to the output relayselection menu, then repeat Steps 6, 7and 8 for each output relay.

9. The DMM can now be used to verify thatthe output relay contact is in the operatedor ON position. The readings should bethe opposite of the initial readingdetermined in Step 2.

10. When output relay testing is completethen restore all output relays to their de-energized or OFF positions listed in Table6-1 and press EXIT to return to theDiagnostic Menu.

11. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete,then exit the diagnostic menu by pressingEXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXITDIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, thenpress EXIT a second time.

6–69

Testing – 6

Output Relay Test (Power Supply Relay 10)The power supply output relay can be tested byperforming the following:

■■■■■ NOTE: For this test the relay is not required tobe in the Diagnostic Mode.

1. Ensure the protected equipment is in aconfiguration/state that can support relayoutput testing.

2. Confirm the position of output relay 10 inthe unoperated or OFF position. Thiscan be accomplished by connecting aDMM (Digital Multimeter) across theappropriate contacts and confirming openor closed. The de-energized or OFFposition for output 10 is listed in Table6-1.

3. Remove power from the relay. The DMMcan now be used to verify that outputrelay 10 contact is in the operated or ONposition. The reading should be theopposite of the initial reading determinedin Step 2.

4. Restore power to the relay.

Input Test (Control/Status)The INPUT TEST menu enables the user todetermine the status of the individual control/statusinputs. Individual inputs can be selected by numberusing the up and down arrow pushbuttons. Thestatus of the input will then be displayed.

INPUTNUMBER

COMMONTERMINAL TERMINAL

1 (52b) 11 10

2 11 9

3 11 8

4 11 7

5 11 6

6 11 5

Table 6-2 Input Contacts

1. Ensure the protected equipment is in aconfiguration/state that can support relayinput testing.



3. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to INPUT (Upper Case).

INPUT TEST (RELAY)output INPUT led target


led cal factory

If INPUT is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select INPUT.

4. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

INPUT NUMBER1

5. Select the Input Relay (1–6) to be testedutilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons.


INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT OPEN

7. If no external control/status inputs areconnected to the relay, then place ajumper between the IN COM terminal(terminal #11) and the IN1 terminal(terminal #10). See Table 6-2 for terminalsfor inputs 2 through 6.

Alternatively, if this specific input isbeing used in this application and theexternal wiring is complete, the actualexternal control/status input contact canbe manually closed. This will test theinput contact operation and the externalwiring to the input contacts.

The following is immediately displayed:

INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT CLOSED

8. Remove the jumper between the IN COMterminal (terminal #11) and the IN1terminal (terminal #10).


6–70

The following is immediately displayed:

INPUT NUMBER 1CIRCUIT OPEN

9. If testing all inputs, press EXIT to returnto the input selection menu, then repeatSteps 5, 6, 7 and 8 for each input.

10. When input testing is complete theninsure all jumpers have been removedand press EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


Status LED TestThe STATUS LED TEST menu enables the user tocheck the front-panel LEDs individually.

��

�+��

�%��+

��

�� %�

��

��

��

�/9:2;<2��

��2��%&��'��

��

Figure 6-8 Status LED Panel



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to LED (Upper Case).

STATUS LED TESToutput input LED target


led cal factory

If LED is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select LED.

3. Press ENTER. LED #1 (RELAY OK)illuminates and the following is displayed:

STATUS LED TESTLED NUMBER 1 = ON

4. If testing all Status LEDs, press theright arrow pushbutton to toggle throughthe remaining LEDs illustrated in Figure6-8, with the exception of the PS1 &PS2 LEDs.

5. When Status LED testing is completepress EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


6–71

Testing – 6

Target LED TestThe TARGET LED TEST menu allows the user tocheck the M-3925A Target Module LEDs individually.

��

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2�

��2!

��2�

�� -'=

�! �'��2�� " �'��2�� !��-�"�-�� 2 ��"�-�"�2��- ��2��

�� 2��&��

�� '��2��

� ��2��2��

!� ��2��2��

�� %��2��

�-�!��2��

�� 2��2��

�'��2��

�'��2��

��2�-� ��-��

��2�'��2��

��2�� "

�� 2��32��

��2 ��-��'2��-�

��3��+ ��-��-��

�'��2��2�� !

��2��-��2�-��! �-�!�

��2��2��

��2��

Figure 6-9 M-3925A Target Module Panel



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to TARGET (Upper Case).

TARGET LED TESToutput input led TARGET


led cal factory

If TARGET is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select TARGET.

3. Press ENTER. Target LED #1 lights andthe following is displayed:

TARGET LED TESTLED NUMBER 1 = ON

4. If testing all Target LEDs, press the rightarrow pushbutton to toggle through theremaining Target LEDs illustrated inFigure 6-9.

5. When Target LED testing is completepress EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


Expanded Input/Output TestNot implemented at this time.

Button TestThe BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the userto check the M-3931 HMI Module buttons. As eachpushbutton is pressed, its name is displayed.

��

��

�

�

�

�

Figure 6-10 M-3931 Human-MachineInterface Module




6–72

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to BUTTON (Upper Case).

BUTTON TESToutput input led target

ex_io BUTTON disp com1 com2 com3 clock

led cal factory

If BUTTON is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select BUTTON.


BUTTON TEST0

■ NOTE: Pressing the EXIT pushbutton will exitfrom this test, and therefore should belast pushbutton tested. If it is pushedbefore this test sequence is completed,the test may be restarted by pushingENTER. Notice that the word EXIT isdisplayed temporarily before the testsequence is exited.

4. Press each pushbutton for test. As eachbutton is pressed, the display will brieflyshow the name for each key (“RIGHTARROW”, “UP ARROW”, etc).

5. When pushbutton testing is completepress EXIT to return to the DiagnosticMenu.


Display TestThe DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables theuser to check the display. This test cycles throughvarying test patterns until EXIT is pressed.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to DISPLAY TEST (UpperCase).

DISPLAY TESToutput input led target

ex_io button DISPcom1 com2 com3 clock

led cal factory

If DISP is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select DISP.

3. Press ENTER, the unit will display asequence of test characters until EXITis pushed.

4. After the test has cycled throughcompletely, press EXIT to return to theDiagnostic Menu.


COM1/COM2 Loopback TestThe COM1 LOOPBACK TEST menu allows theuser to test the front-panel RS-232 port. COM2LOOPBACK TEST menu tests the rear panel RS-232port.

A loopback plug is required for this test. The requiredloopback plug consists of a DB9P connector (male)with pin 2 (RX) connected to pin 3 (TX) and pin 7(RTS) connected to pin 8 (CTS). No otherconnections are necessary.

� ��5��;5��

4��

��

�!G�4 �

�! �5�! �

�

Figure 6-11 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug

6–73

Testing – 6



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to COM1 LOOPBACK TEST(Upper Case).

COM1 LOOPBACK TESToutput input led target

ex_io button disp COM1 com2 com3 clock

led cal factory

If COM1 is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select COM1.


COM1 LOOPBACK TESTCONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG

4. Connect the loop-back plug to COM1,the front-panel RS-232C connector.

5. Press ENTER, the relay will initiate theloopback test.

If the COM Port passes the loopbacktest the following will be displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TEST-DONE-

If the COM Port fails the loopback testthe following will be displayed:

COM1 LOOPBACK TESTRX–TX FAIL

6. Press EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTICMenu.


8. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to COM2 LOOPBACK TEST(Upper Case).

COM2 LOOPBACK TESToutput input led target

ex_io button disp com1 COM2 com3 clock

led cal factory


8. Press ENTER, then repeat Steps 3through 6 for COM2.

COM3 Test (2-Wire)The COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire allows the user to testthe RS-485 rear terminal connections for properoperation.

■■■■■ NOTE: This test requires a PC with an RS-485converter and terminal emulator softwareinstalled.


If the relay is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the relay diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering Relay Diagnostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step2.

2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE(Upper Case).

COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIREoutput input led target

ex_io button disp com1 com2 COM3 clock

led cal factory



COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIREIDLING...9600, N, 8, 1


6–74

4. From the rear of the unit, connect a PCto the relay at terminals 3(-) and 4(+)using an RS-485 converter set for 2-wireoperation. See Figure 6-12 for diagram.

$

� �

�5��/.1

0�'��/5�0�'��856�.1/.1�51�9��831:

��,�1.�

! ��5��

.

(

0�'��0�'��

Figure 6-12 RS-485 2-Wire Testing

5. Set the following PC communicationsparameters:

Baud Rate 9600

Parity None

Data Bits 8

Stop Bits 1

Duplex Half

6. Open the terminal emulator program onthe PC, then open the COM port for theRS-485 converter.

7. Press a key on the PC keyboard, thenverify the following:

a. The character pressed is displayedtemporarily on the relay display.

b. The character pressed is displayedon the PC monitor.

8. When communication has been verified,press EXIT, the following is displayed:

COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE-DONE-

9. Press EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTICMenu.

10. Close the COM port on the PC, and exitthe terminal program.


Clock ON/OFFThis feature provides the user with the ability toeither start or stop the clock.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to CLOCK ON/OFF (UpperCase).

CLOCK START/STOPoutput input led target

ex_io button disp com1 com2 com3 CLOCK

led cal factory

If CLOCK is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select CLOCK.

■■■■■ NOTE: ‘80’ will be displayed in the secondsplace when the clock is stopped.

3. Press ENTER, the following is displayed:

a. If the clock is already running thefollowing will be displayed and willcontinue to update.

CLOCK TEST01-Jan-2003 01:01:01

b. If the clock was NOT running thefollowing will be displayed:


4. To start or stop the clock press ENTER,the following is displayed:

a. If the clock is already running thefollowing will be displayed:

CLOCK TESTCLOCK STOP


6–75

Testing – 6

b. If the clock was NOT running thefollowing will be displayed:

CLOCK TESTCLOCK START


■■■■■ NOTE: To preserve battery life the clock shouldbe OFF if the unit is to be left de-energized for a long period of time.

5. The clock can be toggled ON or OFF bypressing any arrow pushbutton or ENTER.

To exit the Clock ON/OFF mode pressEXIT, the following will be displayed:

CLOCK TEST-DONE-

6. To exit the CLOCK ON/OFF DiagnosticMenu press EXIT.


Relay OK LED Flash/IlluminatedThis feature provides the user with the ability to setthe relay OK LED to either Flash or be Illuminatedwhen the relay is working properly.



2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to FLASH RELAY OK LED(Upper Case).

FLASH RELAY OK LEDoutput input led target

ex_io button disp com1 com2 com3 clock LED cal factory

If LED (to the left of cal) is not selected(Upper Case), then use the Right/Leftarrow pushbuttons to select LED.


FLASH RELAY OK LEDOFF on

4. Select (upper case) either ON (to flash)or OFF (to Illuminate) by pressing theright/left arrow pushbutton once.


FLASH RELAY OK LED-DONE-

6. To exit the FLASH RELAY OK LEDDiagnostic Menu press EXIT.


Auto CalibrationRefer to the following Section 6.4, Auto Calibration,for more information on that function.

AUTO CALIBRATION clock led CAL factory

Factory Use OnlyThis function is provided to allow access by factorypersonnel.

FACTORY USE ONLY clock led cal FACTORY


6–76

6.4 Auto Calibration

■■■■■ NOTE: The M-3425A Generator Protection Relayhas been fully calibrated at the factory.There is no need to recalibrate the unitprior to initial installation. However, in-system calibration of the 64F functionmay be needed for units purchased withthe 64F Field Ground option. Calibrationcan be initiated using the HMI or IPSutil™program.

Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibration1. If the relay is already in the Diagnostic

Mode, then go to Step 2.


2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu isselected to CAL (upper case).



led CAL factory

If CAL is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select CAL.


60 HZ CALIBRATION60_HZ field_gnd

4. Ensure that the 60 HZ Calibration Menuis selected to 60_HZ (Upper Case).

If 60_HZ is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select 60_HZ.


60 HZ CALIBRATIONNOM_F 3rdh_F 64s_f

6. Ensure that NOM_F is selected (UpperCase).

If NOM_F is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select NOM_F.


CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTSPRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE

8. Connect VA

= VB

= VC

= VN

= VX

=120.0(±0.01) V at 0° phase. (See Figure 6-14.)

9. Connect Ia=I

b=I

c=I

A=I

B=I

C=I

N=5.00**

Amps at 0° (see Figure 6-13).

** For a 1 A CT rating, use 1 A.

The calibration can be verified by reading status:

VA=VB=VC=VN=VX=120V V1=V2=0 V0=120V

IA=IB=IC=5 A** I1=I2=0 I0=5 A**

Ia=Ib=Ic=5 A**

Real=1 pu Reactive=0.0 pu

Power Factor = 1.0

Idiffa = Idiffb = Idiffc = 0

Where subscript 0, 1, and 2 represent zero, positive,and negative sequence quantities, respectively.

** For a 1 A CT rating, use 1 A.

■■■■■ NOTE: The phase angle difference betweenvoltage and current input source shouldbe 0°, ±0.05°, and an accurate low-distortion source should be used. (THDless than 1%).

10. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed while the relay is beingcalibrated:

CALIBRATINGWAIT

When the calibration is complete, thefollowing will be displayed:

CALIBRATINGDONE

11. Remove the calibration source inputs.

6–77

Testing – 6

Third Harmonic Calibration1. If it is desired to calibrate the third

harmonic only and the relay is already inthe Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.

If it is desired to calibrate the thirdharmonic only and the relay is NOT inthe Diagnostic Mode, then enter the relaydiagnostic mode by performing the stepsdescr ibed in the Enter ing RelayDaignostic Mode section of this chapter,then go to Step 2.




led CAL factory







60 HZ CALIBRATIONnom_f 3RDH_F 64s_f

6. Ensure that 3RDH_F is selected (UpperCase).

If 3RDH_F is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select 3RDH_F.


INPUT 180 HZPRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE

(150 Hz for 50 Hz units)

8. Connect VN= V

X=10.0 V, 180 Hz (150

Hz for 50 Hz units). See Figure 6-15.

9. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed while the Third Harmonic iscalibrated:

CALIBRATINGWAIT


AUTO CALIBRATIONDONE

10. Remove the voltage from VN and V

X.


64S 100% Stator Ground by Low FrequencyInjection Calibration

1. If it is desired to calibrate the 64S 100%Stator Ground by Low FrequencyInjection only and the relay is already inthe Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.

If it is desired to calibrate the 64S 100%Stator Ground by Low FrequencyInjection only and the relay is NOT in theDiagnostic Mode, then enter the relaydiagnostic mode by performing the stepsdescr ibed in the Enter ing RelayDaignostic Mode section of this chapter,then go to Step 2.




led CAL factory







6–78


60 HZ CALIBRATIONnom_f 3rdh_f 64S_F

6. Ensure that 64S_F is selected (UpperCase).

If 64S_F is not selected (Upper Case),then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttonsto select 64S_F.


INPUT 20 HZPRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE

8. Connect VN=10.0 V ( 0.01 V) 20 Hz,

IN=10.0 mA ( 0.01 mA) 20 Hz. See

Figure 6-6.

9. Press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed while the 64S is calibrated:

CALIBRATINGWAIT


CALIBRATINGDONE

10. Remove the voltage from VN and I

N.


Field Ground CalibrationField Ground Calibration only applies to unitspurchased with the 64F Field Ground option.Calibration is necessary for long cable lengths(greater than 100 feet) to compensate for cablinglosses from the M-3425A and the M-3921 Couplermodule, and therefore should be accomplished insystem, after all wiring is complete.

1. Connect the M-3921 Field Ground Couplerbox as shown in Figure 6-7, Field GroundCoupler.


If the relay is NOT in the DiagnosticMode, then enter the relay diagnosticmode by performing the steps describedin the Entering Relay Daignostic Modesection of this chapter, then go to Step 3.




led CAL factory




5. Ensure that the 60 HZ Calibration Menuis selected to FIELD_GND (Upper Case).

If FIELD_GND is not selected (UpperCase), then use the Right arrowpushbutton to select FIELD_GND.


CONNECT 1 KOHM REF.PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE

7. Set the decade box for 1 kW resistance,then press ENTER, the following will bedisplayed:

CALIBRATINGWAIT

8. When the calibration is complete thefollowing will be displayed:

CALIBRATINGDONE

9. Press ENTER, the unit will display thenext resistance in the calibrationsequence to be tested.

10. Set the decade box to the resistancespecified by the HMI, then press ENTER.When the display shows DONE pressENTER.

11. Repeat Step 10 until the calibration iscomplete for 100 kΩ.

12. Press EXIT twice to exit the DiagnosticMode.

6–79

Testing – 6

IA

55

54

57

56

59

58

53

52

Current Input

Polarity

IB

IC

IN

Ia

Ib

Ic50

51

48

49

46

47

Figure 6-13 Current Input Configuration

9��

��*�/

<�/�� <�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

<�

<5

<�

9��

��*�/

<�/��

��

��<

Figure 6-14 Voltage Input Configuration

��

��

��

��

<

<�

9��

��*�/

<�/��

9��

��*�/

Figure 6-15 Voltage Input Configuration


6–80


A–1

Appendix – A

A Appendix A – Configuration Record Forms

This Appendix contains photocopy–ready forms forrecording the configuration and setting of theM-3425A Generator Protection Relay. The formscan be supplied to field service personnel forconfiguring the relay, and kept on file for futurereference.

A copy of the Relay Configuration Table (TableA-1) is provided to define and record the blockinginputs and output configuration. For each function;check the D (disabled) column or check the outputcontacts to be operated by the function, and checkthe inputs designated to block the function operation.

Figure A-2, Communication Data & Unit SetupRecord Form reproduces the Communication andSetup unit menus. This form records definition ofthe parameters necessary for communication withthe relay, as well as access codes, user logo lines,date & time setting, and front panel display operation.

Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Formreproduces the Configure Relay menus. For eachfunction or setpoint, refer to the configuration youhave defined using the Relay Configuration Table,and circle whether it should be enabled or disabled,the output contacts it will activate, and the inputsthat will block its operation.

Figure A-4, Setpoint & Timing Record Form allowsrecording of the specific values entered for eachenabled setpoint or function. The form follows themain menu selections of the relay.

Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not bevisible within the menus. If a function is DISABLED,the input/output screens for that function will not bedisplayed.

A–2


Check each box applicable : ✓ (See page A-1 for information on using this table.)D Column = Function Disabled.OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s)fl Column = Function blocked by fuse loss.INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s)

NOITCNUFD O U T P U T S I N P U T S

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LF 6 5 4 3 2 1

12

1

2

3

421

2

52

72

1

2

3

NT721

2

23

1

2

3

041

2

64

FED

VNI

94

051

2

FB05

N05

TD051

2

72/05

N15

V15

95

1

2

3

D95

N95

1

2

3

Table A-1 Relay Configuration Table (page 1 of 2)

A–3

Appendix – A

NOITCNUFD O U T P U T S I N P U T S

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LF 6 5 4 3 2 1

X95

LF06

B46

F461

2

N76FED

VNI

S46

87

18

1

2

3

4

A18

1

2

3

4

5

6

R181

2

781

2

DG78

MB

TKCT

SPI

1

2

3

4

5

6

Table A-1 Relay Configuration Table (page 2 of 2)

Check each box applicable : ✓ (See page A-1 for information on using this table.)D Column = Function Disabled.OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s)fl Column = Function blocked by fuse loss.INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s)

A–4


KEY TO INPUT DATA RECORD FORMS

A. All bordered screens shown on forms require data inputs. Whatever is in that screenwhen ENTER button is pushed (see Figure A-1) will be installed in the relay.

B. All heavy bordered screens are either MENU screens which have horizontalchoices (made with right - left arrows) or screens displaying a result of a choice previously made.

C. Dotted boxes enclose screens which bound areas that pushbutton ENTER willmove in. In order to move out of one of the dotted boxes it is necessary to either push EXIT ormake a menu choice change using the Right - Left arrow.

D. The Up/Down arrows only adjust value or letter (lower/upper case) inputs; they do not move withinthe menus or between menu displays.

E. The Right/Left arrows are used only to make horizontally displayed choices. These can be eithermenu choices or input value digit choices. The previous choice or location in a menu is highlightedimmediately.

F. The ENTER pushbutton records the setting change and moves down within a menu. The operatorwill notice that after the last menu item, ENTER moves to the top of the same menu but does notchange menu positions.

G. Pressing EXIT at any time will exit the display screen to the last screen containing a horizontalchoice. (Return to the preceding menu).

��

��

��

�

�

Figure A-1 Human-Machine Interface Module

H. The symbol or in a screen indicates additional horizontal menu choices are available in theindicated direction. As previously described, the Right and Left arrows will move the operator tothose additional choices.

■ NOTE: Unpurchased or un-available functions will not bevisible within the menus.

A–5

Appendix – A

Figure A-2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form (page 1 of 3)

COM3 SETUPcom1 com2 COM3 com_adr

COM3 DEAD SYNC TIME________ MS

COM3 PROTOCOLbeco2200 MODBUS

COM3 PARITYNONE odd even

COM3 STOP BITS________

COMMUNICATION ADDRESScom1 com2 com3 COM_ADR

COMMUNICATION ADDRESS________

COMM ACCESS CODE ACCSS eth eth_ip

COMM ACCESS CODE________

COM1 SETUPCOM1 com2 com3 com-adr

COM1 BAUD RATE300 600 1200 baud_4800 BAUD_9600

COM2 SETUPcom1 COM2 com3 com_adr

COM2 BAUD RATE300 600 1200 baud_4800 BAUD_9600

COM2 DEAD SYNC TIME________ MS

COM2 PROTOCOLbeco2200 MODBUS

COM2 PARITYnone odd even

COM2 STOP BITS________


A–6


ETHERNET accss ETH eth_ip

ETHERNETdisable ENABLE


DHCP PROTOCOLdisable ENABLE

DHCP PROTOCOLDISABLE enable

IP ADDRESS________

NET MASK________

GATEWAY________


ETHERNET PROTOCOLtcp PROT


ETHERNET ADDRESS accss eth ETH_IP



After EXIT to Comm menu,the following will be dis-played (if any changes havebeen made in ETHERNET menu)

CONFIGURING ETH...


A–7

Appendix – ASETUP UNIT SETUP exit

SOFTWARE VERSIONVERS sn access number

SOFTWARE VERSIOND-XXXXV__.__.__

SERIAL NUMBERvers SN access number

SERIAL NUMBER________

ALTER ACCESS CODESvers sn ACCESS number

ENTER ACCESS CODELEVEL#1 level#2 level#3

LEVEL #1________

ENTER ACCESS CODElevel#1 LEVEL#2 level#3

LEVEL #2________

ENTER ACCESS CODElevel#1 level#2 LEVEL#3

LEVEL #3________

USER CONTROL NUMBERvers sn access NUMBER

USER CONTROL NUMBER________

USER LOGO LINE 1 LOGO1 logo2 out alrm

USER LOGO LINE 1

USER LOGO LINE 2 logo1 LOGO2 out alrm

USER LOGO LINE 2________

CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERS logo1 logo2 OUT alrm

CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERSPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR

CLEAR ALARM COUNTER logo1 logo2 out ALRM

CLEAR ALARM COUNTERPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR

DATE & TIMETIME error eth_ver

DATE & TIME01-Jan-2001 12:00:00

DATE & TIME________ YEAR

DATE & TIMEJAN feb mar apr may jun jul aug sep octnov dec

DATE & TIME________ DATE

DATE & TIMEsun mon tue wed thu

fri sat

DATE & TIME________ HOUR

DATE & TIME________ MINUTES

DATE & TIME________ SECONDS

CLEAR ERROR CODES time ERROR eth_ver

CLEAR ERROR CODESPRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR

ETHERNET FIRMWARE VER time error ETH_VER

ETHERNET FIRMWARE VERD-____V__.__.__

DIAGNOSTIC MODE DIAG

PROCESSOR WILL RESET!ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE


A–8


CONFIGURE RELAYVOLTAGE_RELAY

27 #1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE

27 #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

27 #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1







59 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE









27TN #1 NEUTRL UNDERVOLTdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

27TN #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

27TN #2 NEUTRL UNDERVOLTdisable ENABLE

27TN #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

27TN #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

59X #1 OVERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE

59X #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

59X #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

59X #2 OVERVOLTAGEdisable ENABLE

59X #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

59X #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (1 of 12)

CONFIGURE RELAY CONFIG sys stat

A–9

Appendix – A


CONFIGURE RELAYVOLTAGE_RELAY

59N #1 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTdisable ENABLE

59N #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

59N #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

59N #2 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTdisable enable



59N #3 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTdisable enable



59D VOLTAGE DIFF.disable ENABLE

59D BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

59D RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1


A–10


CONFIGURE RELAY CURRENT_RELAY

46DT NEG SEQ CURRENT DEFdisable ENABLE

46DT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

46DT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

46IT NEG SEQ CURRENT INVdisable ENABLE

46IT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

46IT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50 #1 INST OVERCURRENTdisable ENABLE



50 #2 INST OVERCURRENTdisable enable



50/27 INADVERTANT ENRGNGdisable ENABLE

50/27 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50/27 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50BF BREAKER FAILUREdisable ENABLE

50BF BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50BF RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50DT#1 DEF TIME OVERCURRdisable enable

50DT#1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50DT#1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50DT#2 DEF TIME OVERCURRdisable ENABLE

50DT#2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50DT#2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50N NTRL INST OVERCURRNTdisable ENABLE

50N BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50N RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

51N NTRL OVERCURRNT INVdisable ENABLE

51N BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

51N RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1



A–11

Appendix – A

87GD GND DIFFERENTIALdisable ENABLE

87GD BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

87GD RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

67NDT RES DIR OVERCURRdisable ENABLE

67NDT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

67NDT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

67NIT RES DIR OVERCURRdisable ENABLE

67NIT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

67NIT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAY CURRENT_RELAY

49#1 STATOR OVERLOADdisable ENABLE

49#1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

49#1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

49#2 STATOR OVERLOADdisable ENABLE

49#2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

49#2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

51V OVERCURRENT INVdisable ENABLE

51V BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

51V RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

87 #1 DIFF CURRENTdisable ENABLE



87 #2 DIFF CURRENTdisable ENABLE






A–12


CONFIGURE RELAY FREQUENCY_RELAY

81 #1 FREQUENCYdisable ENABLE















81R #1 RATE OF CHNG FREQdisable ENABLE

81R #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

81R #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

81R #2 RATE OF CHNG FREQdisable ENABLE

81R #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

81R #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

A–13

Appendix – A

CONFIGURE RELAYVOLTS_PER_HERTZ_RELAY

24DT #1 VOLTS/HZ DEFdisable ENABLE

24DT #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

24DT #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

24DT #2 VOLTS/HZ DEFdisable ENABLE

24DT #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

24DT #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

24IT VOLTS/HZ INVdisable ENABLE

24IT BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

24IT RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAY FREQUENCY_RELAY

81A #1 FREQ ACCUMULATORdisable ENABLE

81A #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

81A #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1


















A–14


CONFIGURE RELAYPOWER_RELAY

32 #1 DIRECTIONAL POWERdisable ENABLE










CONFIGURE RELAYLOSS_OF_FIELD_RELAY

40 #1 LOSS OF FIELDdisable ENABLE



40VC #1 LOF WITH VCdisable ENABLE

40VC #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

40VC #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

40 #2 LOSS OF FIELDdisable ENABLE



40VC #2 LOF WITH VCdisable ENABLE

40VC #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

40VC #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAYV.T._FUSE_LOSS_RELAY

60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSdisable enable

60FL BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

60FL RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1



A–15

Appendix – A

CONFIGURE RELAYFIELD_GND_RELAY

64F#1 FIELD GROUNDdisable ENABLE

64F #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

64F #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

64F #2 FIELD GROUNDdisable ENABLE

64F #2 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

64F #2 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

64B BRUSH LIFTOFFdisable ENABLE

64B BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

64B RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAYSTATOR_GND_RELAY

64S 100% STATOR GROUNDdisable ENABLE

64S BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

64S RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAYPHASE DISTANCE_RELAY

21 #1 PHASE DISTANCEdisable ENABLE









78 OUT OF STEPdisable ENABLE

78 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

78 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1




A–16


CONFIGURE RELAYTRIP_CKT_MON_RELAY

TCM TRIP CIRCUIT MONdisable ENABLE

TCM BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

TCM RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAYSYNC_CHECK_RELAY

25S SYNC CHECKdisable ENABLE

25S BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

25S RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

25D DEAD CHECKdisable ENABLE

25D BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

25D RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

CONFIGURE RELAYBREAKER_MON_RELAY

BM BREAKER MONITORdisable ENABLE

BM BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

BM RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1




A–17

Appendix – A

CONFIGURE RELAYIPS_LOGIC_RELAY

IPSL #1 IPS LOGICdisable ENABLE

IPSL #1 BLOCK INPUTfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

IPSL #1 RELAY OUTPUTo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1



















A–18


INPUT ACTIVATED PROFILESIN ap cpy volt curr vt

INPUT ACTIVATED PROFILESdisable ENABLE

ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILEin AP cpy volt curr vt

ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILE________

COPY ACTIVE PROFILEin ap CPY volt curr vt

COPY ACTIVE PROFILETO_PROFILE_1

NOMINAL VOLTAGEin ap cpy VOLT curr vt

NOMINAL VOLTAGE________ Volts

NOMINAL CURRENTin ap cpy volt CURR vt

NOMINAL CURRENT________ Amps

V.T. CONFIGURATIONin ap cpy volt curr VT

V.T. CONFIGURATIONline_line line_ground line_gnd_to_line_line

DELTA-Y TRANSFORM D_YTX rot mag splt

DELTA-Y TRANSFORMdis delta_ab delta_ac

PHASE ROTATION d_ytx ROT mag splt

PHASE ROTATIONa-c-b a-b-c

59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT d_ytx rot MAG splt

59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECTrms dft

50DT SPLIT-PHASE DIFF d_ytx rot mag SPLT

50DT SPLIT-PHASE DIFFdisable enable

PULSE RELAYPLSE latch seal in

PULSE RELAYo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

LATCHED OUTPUTSplse LATCH seal in

LATCHED OUTPUTSo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1




A–19

Appendix – A

RELAY SEAL-IN TIMEplse latch SEAL in









ACTIVE INPUT STATEplse latch seal IN

ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/closei6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1



V.T. PHASE RATIO VT vt_n vt_x ct ct_n

V.T. PHASE RATIO________ :1

V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO vt VT_N vt_x ct ct_n

V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO________ :1

V.T. VX RATIO vt vt_n VT_X ct ct_n

V.T. VX RATIO________ :1

C.T. PHASE RATIO vt vt_n vt_x CT ct_n

C.T. PHASE RATIO________ :1

C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO VT vt_n vt_x ct CT_N

C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO________ :1


A–20


59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PHASE_OVER

59 #1 INPUT VOLTAGE SELphase_volt pos_seq_volt









27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEPHASE_UNDER







Figure A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form (1 of 15)


A–21

Appendix – A

27TN NEUTRL UNDERVOLT NUTRL_UNDER vx_over

27TN #1 PICKUP________ Volts





27TN #1 REV POWER BLKdisable ENABLE






27TN #1 LEAD PF BLKdisable ENABLE


27TN #1 LAG PF BLKdisable ENABLE


27TN #1 BAND FWD PWR BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #1 LO B FWD PWR BLK________ PU

27TN #1 HI B FWD PWR BLK________ PU

27TN #1 DELAY________ CYCLES


27TN #2 PICKUP________ VOLTS





27TN #2 REV POWER BLKdisable ENABLE






27TN #2 LEAD PF BLKdisable ENABLE


27TN #2 LAG PF BLKdisable ENABLE


27TN #2 BAND FWD PWR BLKdisable ENABLE

27TN #2 LO B FWD PWR BLK________ PU

27TN #2 HI B FWD PWR BLK________ PU

27TN #2 DELAY________ CYCLES


A–22


59X OVERVOLTAGE nutrl_under VX_OVER





59N NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE NUTRL_OVER vol_diff







59D VOLT DIFF 3RD HAR nutrl_over VOL_DIFF

59D RATIO________

59D LINE SIDE VOLTAGE3vo vx

59D POS SEQ VOLT BLKdisable ENABLE

59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK________ VOLTS

59D DELAY________ Cycles



A–23

Appendix – A

50BF BREAKER FAILUREinadvtnt_eng BRK_FAIL

50BF PHASE ELEMENTdisable ENABLE

50BF PICKUP PHASE________ Amps

50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENTdisable ENABLE

50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL________ Amps

50BF INPUT INITIATE i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

50BF OUTPUT INITIATEo8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1

50BF DELAY________ Cycles

50DT DEF TIME OVERCURR P_INST n_inst n_inv

50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A________ Amps




50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE A________ Amps




46 NEG SEQ OVERCURRENTNEG_SEQ inst

46DT PICKUP________ %

46DT DELAY________ Cycles

46IT PICKUP________ %

46IT MAX DELAY________ Cycles

46IT RESET TIME________ Seconds


50 INST OVERCURRENTneg_seq INST





50/27 INADVERTANT ENRGNGINADVTNT_ENG brk_fail

50/27 PICKUP________ Amps

50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts

50/27 PICKUP DELAY________ Cycles

50/27 DROPOUT DELAY________ Cycles


CURRENT RELAYvolt CURR freq v/hz

A–24


51V INV TIME OVERCURRENT st_ovl V_INV diff

51V PICKUP________ Amps

51V CURVEdef inv vinv einv ieci iecvi iecei ieclti

51V TIME DIAL________

51V VOLTAGE CONTROLdisable V_CNTRL v_rstrnt

51V VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts

87 DIFFERENTIAL OVERCURR st_ovl v_inv DIFF


87 #1 SLOPE________ %



87 #2 SLOPE________ %

87 #2 ELEMENT ENABLED BYlow_freq 52b_contact


87 PHASE CT CORRECTION________

50N INST OVERCURRENT p_inst N_INST n_inv


50N DELAY________ Cycles

51N INV TIME OVERCURRENT p_inst n_inst N_INV


51N CURVEdef inv vinv einv ieci iecvi iecei ieclti

51N TIME DIAL________

49 STATOR OVERLOAD ST_OVL v_inv diff

49#1 TIME CONSTANT________ Min

49 #1 MAX OVERLOAD CURR________ Amps

49 #2 TIME CONSTANT________ Min

49 #2 MAX OVERLOAD CURR________ Amps




A–25

Appendix – A

87GD GND DIFF OVERCURR G_DIFF res_dir_oc

87GD PICKUP________ Amps

87GD DELAY________ Cycles

87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT________



67N RES DIR OVERCURR g_diff RES_DIR_OC

67NDT PICKUP________ Amps

67NDT DIR ELEMENTdisable ENABLE

67NDT DELAY________ Cycles

67NIT PICKUP________ Amps

67NIT DIR ELEMENTdisable ENABLE

67NIT CURVEdef inv vinv einv ieci iecvi iecei ieclti

67NIT TIME DIAL________

67N MAX SENSITIVITY ANGL________ Degrees

67N OPERATING CURRENT3io in

67N POLARIZING QUANTITY3vo vn vx


A–26


81A FREQUENCY ACCUM.freq rcfreq FREQ_ACC

81A SET FREQUENCY ACC.SET reset

81A #1 HIGH BAND PICKUP________ Cycles













81 FREQUENCYFREQ rcfreq freq_acc

81 #1 PICKUP________ Hz


81 #2 PICKUP________ Hz


81 #3 PICKUP________ Hz


81 #4 PICKUP________ Hz


81R RATE OF CHANGE FREQfreq RCFREQ freq_acc

81R #1 PICKUP________ Hz/s


81R #2 PICKUP________ Hz/s


81R NEG SEG VOLT INHIBIT________ %




A–27

Appendix – A

81A RESET ACCUMULATORSset RESET

81A #1 ACCUMULATOR RESETyes no








A–28


24 DEF TIME VOLTS/HERTZDEF_V/HZ inv_v/hz

24DT #1 PICKUP________ %


24DT #2 PICKUP________ %



VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAYvolt curr freq V/HZ

24 INV TIME VOLTS/HERTZdef_v/hz INV_V/HZ

24IT #1 PICKUP________ %

24IT CURVEcrv#1 crv#2 crv#3 crv#4


24IT RESET RATE________ Seconds

POWER RELAYPWR lof fuse dist

32 DIRECTIONAL POWERPWR

32 #1 PICKUP________ PU


32 # 1 TARGET LEDdisable enable

32 #1 UNDER/OVER POWERunder over

32 #2 PICKUP________ PU


32 # 2 TARGET LEDdisable ENABLE


32 #3 PICKUP________ PU


32 # 3 TARGET LEDdisable ENABLE


32#3 DIR POWER SENSINGreal reactive


A–29

Appendix – A



40 VOLTAGE CONTROL________ Volts

40 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT________ Degrees


LOSS OF FIELD RELAY pwr LOF fuse dist

40 LOSS OF FIELDLOF







V.T. FUSE LOSS RELAY pwr lof FUSE dist

60FL V.T. FUSE LOSSFUSE

60FL INPUT INITIATEfl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

60FL 3 PHASE DETECTdisable enable

60FL DELAY________ Cycles


A–30


21#2 OC SUPERVISIONdisable ENABLE

21#2 OC SUPERVISION________ Amps

21#2 OUT OF STEP BLOCKdisable enable


21#3 DIAMETER________ Ohms

21#3 OFFSET________ Ohms

21#3 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees


21#3 LOAD ENCR ANGLE________ Degrees

21#3 LOAD ENCR R REACH________ Ohms





21#3 OUT OF STEP DELAY________ Cycles

21 PHASE DISTANCEDIST ostp




















A–31

Appendix – A

78 OUT OF STEPdist OSTP

78 DIAMETER________ Ohms

78 OFFSET________ Ohms

78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE________ Ohms

78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE________ Degrees

78 DELAY________ CYCLES



78 TRIP ON MHO EXITdisable ENABLE

78 POLE SLIP COUNT________ Slips

78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME________ Cycles

FIELD GROUND RELAYFIELD stator sync

64B/F FIELD GROUNDFIELD



64F # 2 PICKUP________ kOhm

64F # 2 DELAY________ Cycles

64B PICKUP________ mV

64B DELAY________ Cycles

64B/F FREQUENCY________ Hz


A–32




SYNC CHECK RELAY field stator SYNC

25S SYNC CHECKSYNC dead

25S PHASE LIMIT________ Degrees

25S UPPER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25S LOWER VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25S SYNC CHECK DELAY________ Cycles

25S DELTA VOLTdisable ENABLE

25S DELTA VOLT LIMIT________ Volts

25S DELTA FREQUENCYdisable ENABLE

25S DELTA FREQ LIMIT________ Hz

25S SYNC-CHECK PHASEab bc ca

25D DEAD VOLTsync DEAD

25D DEAD VOLT LIMIT________ VOLTS

25D DEAD V1 HOT VXdisable ENABLE

25D DEAD VX HOT V1disable ENABLE

25D DEAD V1 & VXdisable ENABLE

25D DEAD INPUT ENABLEi6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

25D DEAD DELAY________ Cycles

STATOR GROUND RELAY field STATOR sync

64S 100% STATOR GROUNDSTATOR

64S PICKUPmAmps

64S VOLT INHIBITdisable ENABLE

64S VOLT INHIBIT________ Volts

64S DELAY________ Cycles

A–33

Appendix – A


SET BREAKER MONITORINGBRKR prst clr

BM PICKUP________ kA-cycles

BM INPUT INITIATEi6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1

BM OUTPUT INITIATEO8 O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1

BM DELAY________ Cycles

BM TIMING METHODit i2t

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITORTRIPCKT

TCM DELAY________ Cycles


BREAKER MONITOR BRKR trpckt ipslog

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR brkr TRPCKT ipslog

PRESET ACCUMULATORSbrkr PRST clr

ACC. PHASE A SETPH_A ph_b ph_c

BRKR. ACCUMULATOR________ kA-cycles

ACC. PHASE B SETph_A PH_B ph_c


ACC. PHASE C SETph_A ph_b PH_C


CLEAR ACCUMULATORSbrkr prst CLR

ACC. PHASE A CLEARPH_A ph_b ph_c

ACC. PHASE B CLEARph_a PH_B ph_c

ACC. PHASE C CLEARph_a ph_b PH_C

A–34



IPS LOGIC brkr trpckt IPSLOG

IPS LOGICUSE IPSCOM TO CONFIGURE

Communications: Appendix – B

B–1

B Appendix B–Communications

The M-3425A Generator Protection Relayincorporates three serial ports and an optional RJ45Ethernet port for intelligent, digital communicationwith external devices. Equipment such as RTU's,data concentrators, modems, or computers can beinterfaced for direct, on-line, real time data acquisitionand control. Generally, all data available to theoperator through the front panel of the relay with theoptional M-3931 Human-Machine Interface moduleis accessible remotely through the BECO 2200 orMODBUS data exchange protocol. These protocoldocuments and the database-specific protocoldocument are available from the factory or from ourwebsite at www.beckwithelectric.com.

The M-3820D IPScom® Communication Softwarepackage has been supplied for communication toany IBM compatible computer running underMicrosoft® Windows 95 or higher.

The communication protocols implement serial, byteoriented, asynchronous communication and can beused to fulfill the following communications functions:

• Real time monitoring of line status.

• Interrogation and modification of setpoints.

• Downloading of recorded oscillograph data.

• Reconfiguration of relay functions.

■■■■■ NOTE: The following restrictions apply forMODBUS protocol use:

1. MODBUS protocol is not supported onCOM1.

2. Parity is supported on COM2 and COM3;valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1; 8,E,1;8,N,1; 8,O,2 or 8,E,2.

3. ASCII mode is not supported (RTU only).

4. Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600are supported.

5. Only the following MODBUS commandsare supported:

a. read holding register (function 03)

b. read input register (function 04)

c. force single coil (function 05)

d. preset single register (function 06)

For detailed information on IPScom communications,refer to Chapter 4, Remote Operation.

Serial PortsThe relay has both front and rear panel RS-232 portsand a rear RS-485 port. The front and rear panelRS-232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connector configuredas DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) per the EIA-232D standard. Signals are defined in Table B-1,Communication Port Signals .

The 2-wire RS-485 port is assigned to the rear panelterminal block pins 3 (–) and 4 (+).

Each communication port may be configured tooperate at any of the standard baud rates (300,600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS-485port shares the same baud rate with COM 2 (forCOM1 see Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches andJumpers).

A null modem cable is also shown in Figure B-1, NullModem Cable: M-0423, if direct connection to a PC(personal computer) is desired.

Optional Ethernet PortThe M-3425A, when equipped with the optionalEthernet port can be accessed from a local network.When the ethernet port is enabled, the COM2 serialport (RS-232) is unavailable for use. Although theethernet connection speed is faster than the RS-232port (can be up to 10 Mbps), the ethernet moduleconnects internally through the COM2 serialconnection and is therefore limited to connectionspeeds up to 9600 bps.

Either port COM2 (Ethernet) or COM3 may be usedto remotely set and interrogate the relay using alocal area network, modem or other direct serialconnection.

B–2


Signal COM1 COM2

RX Receive Data Pin 2 Pin 2

TX Transmit Data Pin 3 Pin 3

RTS Request to Send Pin 7 Pin 7

CTS Clear to Send Pin 8

DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 4

DCD Data Carrier Detect Pin 1*

GND Signal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5

+15 V Pin 1*

-15 V Pin 9*

TTL IRIG-B (+) Pin 6*

* Optional: See Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches andJumpers, 15V ( 15%) @100 mA maximum.

Table B-1 Communication Port Signals

■ NOTE: Also see Tables 5-1, 5-2 and Figure 5-10.

�

�

�

#

"

!

�

(

�

�

�

#

"

!

�

(

�54B��

� ��5��;5��

4B��

�

�G�4

��

5��

�

�G�4

��

5��

454

4�

4�

�

Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423

Communications: Appendix – B

B–3

RS-232

TR

T R

TR TR

REPOFF

DCEDTE

DCEDTE

REPOFF

DCEDTE

REPOFF

DCEDTE

REPOFF

RS-232 RS-232

Echo Cancel On

25 pin or9-25 pin Straight-Through Cable

FOC

FOC

FOC

FOC

DYMEC Fiber OpticLink / Repeater

Slave #1Address 1

Slave #2Address 2

Slave #3Address 3

9-25 pin "Straight-Through" Cables

PC Master

Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network

B–4


RS-232 to RS-485 2-wireconverter or RS-485 PC Card

PC Master- + - +

RS-485 2-Wire Network

B(-)

A(+)

Twisted

200 Ω*

Slave #1Address 6

Slave #2Address 8

Slave #3Address 1

▲▲▲▲▲ CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, all units should bemounted in the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber optics with the appropriate converters should be usedfor isolation.

■■■■■ NOTE: Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave on the network shouldhave the termination resistor installed. This may be completed externally or using a jumper internalto the unit. See Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.

Figure B-3 RS-485 Network

�� (��2�E6A0:

��;<2�

�;<2�

Figure B-4 COM Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal

Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C

C–1

C Appendix C–Self-test Error Codes

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes

1

2 Battery backed RAM test fail

3 EEPROM write power-up fail

4 EEPROM read back power-up fail

5 Dual port RAM test fail

6 EEPROM write calibration checksum fail

7 EEPROM write setpoint checksum failloss of power

8 EEPROM write setpoint checksum failloss of battery backed RAM

9 DMA checksum/physical block fail

10 Oscillograph Memory Test fail

11 DSP external program RAM fail

12 DSP A/D convert fail

13 DSP ground channel fail

14 DSP reference channel fail

15 DSP PGA gain fail

16 DSP DSP<-> HOST interrupt 1 fail

17 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 set fail

18 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 reset fail

19 DSP program load fail

20 DSP not running run mode code

21 DSP not running secondary boot code

22 DSP DPRAM pattern test fail

23 EEPROM write verify error

26 WARNING calibration checksum mis-match warning

27 WARNING setpoint checksum mismatchwarning

28 WARNING low battery (BBRAM) warning

29 Supply/mux PGA running test fail

30 External DSP RAM test fail

31 Unrecognized INT1 code

32 Values update watchdog fail

33 Abort Error

34 Restart Error

35 Interrupt Error

36 Trap Error

37 Calibration running check fail

38

39

40 Interrupt noise INT2

41 Interrupt noise INT1

42

43

44 Oscillograph buffer overflow

45 Oscillograph buffer underflow

46 Failure of DSP to calculate calibrationphasors

47 Unable to calibrate input (gain)

48 Unable to calibrate input (phase)

49

50 Stack Overflow

51 Setpoint Write Overflow

52 Field Ground Error


C–2

edoCrorrE noitpircseD

kcoLlennahCmmoCsihtnitluserlliwlortnocehtotdeilppusdrowssaptcerrocninA

.egassem

edoMlacoLnilortnoCyllacoldetarepogniebsilortnocehttahtsetacidniegassemsihT

.dednepsussinoitacinummoclairesdna

tuoemiTohcEnoitacinummocehthtiwsmelborperaerehtfistluserrorresihT

.yltcerrocnidesusinoitcnuflecnacohceehtfiroknil

ataDdilavnI .deretnesiatadegnar-fo-tuorotcerrocnifistluserrorresihT

DIdilavnIahtiwetacinummocotgnitpmettanehwdeyalpsidsiegassemsihT

.5243-Mehtnahtrehtoecived

forebmuNdilavnIstnioP

sierawtfosmocSPIfonoisrevelbitapmocninafistluserrorresihThtiwkceBatcatnoC.rorrelocotorpnoitacinummocasisihT.desu

.evitatneserperyrotcaf.oCcirtcelE

rebmuNtnioPdilavnIsierawtfosmocSPIfonoisrevelbitapmocninafistluserrorresihThtiwkceBatcatnoC.rorrelocotorpnoitacinummocasisihT.desu

.evitatneserperyrotcaf.oCcirtcelE

muskcehCdilavnIdaeRnoitacinummocehthtiwsmelborperaerehtfistluserrorresihT


tuoemiTtekcaPdaeRtsolsilortnocehthtiwnoitacinummocnehwstluserrorresihT

.lortnocehtotataddaerotgnitpmettaelihw

tuoemiTesnopseRtsolsilortnocehthtiwnoitacinummocnehwstluserrorresihT

.lortnocehtmorfataddaerotgnitpmettaelihw

rorrEmetsySnwonknU .lortnocehtfonoitcnuflamaybdesuacebdluocrorresihT

lecnaCresU .desserpsiyek)CSE(epacseehtnehwsyalpsidegassemsihT

muskcehCdilavnIetirWnoitacinummocehthtiwsmelborperaerehtfistluserrorresihT


tuoemiTtekcaPetirWtsolsilortnocehthtiwnoitacinummocnehwstluserrorresihT

.lortnocehtotatadetirwotgnitpmettaelihw

Table C-2 IPScom® Error Messages

Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D

D–1

D Appendix D – Inverse Time Curves

This Appendix contains two sets of Inverse Time Curve Families. The first set is used for Volts per Hertzfunctions (Figures D-1 through D-4), and the second set is for the M-3425A functions which utilize the InverseTime Overcurrent curves (Figures D-5 through D-12).

■■■■■ NOTE: Table D-1A and D-1B on pages D–6 and D–7 contains a list of the data that characterizes DefiniteTime, Inverse Time, Very Inverse Time, and Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves.

D–2


Figure D-1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square)


D–3

Figure D-2 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Family Curve #2

D–4


Figure D-3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Curve Family #3


D–5

Figure D-4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Curve Family #4

D–6


■■■■■ NOTE: The abovetimes are in secondsand are given for atime dial of 1.0. Forother time dial values,multiply the above bythe time dial value.

gnitteSpaTfoelpitluM emiTetinifeD emiTesrevnI emiTesrevnIyreV emiTesrevnIylemertxE

05.1 99896.0 45935.4 87564.3 02538.4

55.1 26846.0 33551.4 30211.3 74782.4

06.1 93506.0 30918.3 82218.2 26538.3

56.1 30865.0 56225.3 45655.2 60754.3

07.1 85535.0 78952.3 70633.2 37531.3

57.1 52705.0 85520.3 13441.2 49958.2

08.1 54284.0 66518.2 02679.1 49026.2

58.1 86064.0 37626.2 97728.1 80214.2

09.1 65144.0 99554.2 79596.1 22822.2

59.1 77424.0 11103.2 32875.1 92560.2

00.2 60014.0 31061.2 45274.1 60029.1

50.2 12793.0 93130.2 32773.1 49987.1

01.2 60683.0 84319.1 39092.1 87276.1

51.2 84673.0 91508.1 94212.1 68665.1

02.2 45563.0 75227.1 21821.1 02874.1

03.2 39253.0 49045.1 62610.1 86223.1

04.2 51143.0 40193.1 70229.0 05291.1

05.2 81033.0 16562.1 09148.0 12280.1

06.2 99913.0 54951.1 10377.0 08789.0

07.2 75013.0 17860.1 43317.0 62609.0

08.2 98103.0 94099.0 72166.0 72538.0

09.2 29392.0 85229.0 45516.0 30377.0

00.3 66682.0 52368.0 51575.0 11817.0

01.3 70082.0 31118.0 03935.0 93966.0

02.3 51472.0 41567.0 33705.0 39526.0

03.3 98862.0 93427.0 07874.0 00785.0

04.3 72462.0 81886.0 79254.0 69155.0

05.3 03062.0 19556.0 77924.0 23025.0

06.3 79652.0 01726.0 97804.0 36194.0

07.3 92452.0 53106.0 77983.0 45564.0

08.3 92252.0 23875.0 84273.0 57144.0

00.4 57942.0 40935.0 20143.0 92104.0

02.4 27542.0 14605.0 82513.0 46563.0

04.4 79142.0 64774.0 23392.0 06433.0

06.4 25832.0 67154.0 35472.0 14703.0

08.4 14532.0 49824.0 14852.0 64382.0

Table D-1A M-3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves (1 of 2)


D–7

gnitteSpaTfoelpitluM emiTetinifeD emiTesrevnI emiTesrevnIyreV emiTesrevnIylemertxE

00.5 66232.0 17804.0 65442.0 72262.0

02.5 92032.0 87093.0 96232.0 34342.0

04.5 43822.0 59473.0 45222.0 06622.0

06.5 48622.0 20163.0 49312.0 15112.0

08.5 38522.0 48843.0 37602.0 39791.0

00.6 43522.0 82833.0 18002.0 76581.0

02.6 62522.0 17723.0 11591.0 13571.0

04.6 29422.0 93913.0 44091.0 68561.0

06.6 06322.0 05113.0 20681.0 13751.0

08.6 03222.0 20403.0 78181.0 75941.0

00.7 20122.0 59692.0 79771.0 35241.0

02.7 77912.0 72092.0 13471.0 11631.0

04.7 55812.0 89382.0 09071.0 72031.0

06.7 63712.0 70872.0 37761.0 29421.0

08.7 12612.0 35272.0 97461.0 30021.0

00.8 01512.0 43762.0 90261.0 55511.0

02.8 30412.0 15262.0 16951.0 44111.0

04.8 00312.0 30852.0 63751.0 86701.0

06.8 30212.0 88352.0 43551.0 22401.0

08.8 11112.0 70052.0 45351.0 50101.0

00.9 52012.0 06642.0 79151.0 41890.0

05.9 31802.0 53932.0 07741.0 07090.0

00.01 04702.0 22432.0 37441.0 47480.0

05.01 76602.0 32922.0 08141.0 34970.0

00.11 49502.0 24422.0 49831.0 96470.0

05.11 12502.0 97912.0 51631.0 64070.0

00.21 94402.0 63512.0 54331.0 76660.0

05.21 87302.0 51112.0 48031.0 92360.0

00.31 01302.0 61702.0 33821.0 62060.0

05.31 34202.0 14302.0 39521.0 55750.0

00.41 97102.0 19991.0 46321.0 31550.0

05.41 91102.0 66691.0 64121.0 79250.0

00.51 26002.0 76391.0 14911.0 40150.0

05.51 90002.0 59091.0 74711.0 43940.0

00.61 16991.0 15881.0 66511.0 48740.0

05.61 81991.0 53681.0 89311.0 25640.0

00.71 18891.0 94481.0 34211.0 93540.0

05.71 15891.0 49281.0 20111.0 24440.0

00.81 72891.0 17181.0 47901.0 26340.0

05.81 11891.0 28081.0 16801.0 89240.0

00.91 30891.0 92081.0 26701.0 05240.0

05.91 30891.0 41081.0 97601.0 91240.0

00.02 30891.0 41081.0 11601.0 50240.0

Table D-1B M-3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves (2 of 2)

■■■■■ NOTE: The abovetimes are in secondsand are given for atime dial of 1.0. Forother time dial values,multiply the above bythe time dial value.

D–8


Figure D-5 Definite Time Overcurrent Curve


D–9

Figure D-6 Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve

D–10


Figure D-7 Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve


D–11

Figure D-8 Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve

D–12


0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20Multiple of Pickup

Tim

e in

Sec

onds

1.11

0.9

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

.05

Figure D-9 IEC Curve #1 Inverse

�6�7��81(

"�8��!�19 :


D–13

Figure D-10 IEC Curve #2 Very Inverse

0.01

0.1

1

10

100


Tim

e in

Sec

onds

1.11

0.9

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

.05

K

�6�7��1 82

"�!�19 :

D–14


Figure D-11 IEC Curve #3 Extremely Inverse

0.01

0.1

1

10

100


Tim

e in

Sec

onds

1.11

0.90.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

.05

K

�6�7��;�

"��!�19 :


D–15

Figure D-12 IEC Curve #4 Long-Time Inverse

0.1

1

10

100

1000


��

Sec

on

ds

1.11

0.90.80.6

0.4

0.2

K

.05

�6�7��1��

"�!�19 :

D–16


This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Legal Information

PatentThe units described in this manual are covered byU.S. Patents, with other patents pending.

Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller,its directors, officers, agents, and employees fromany and all costs and expense, damage or loss,resulting from any alleged infringementof UnitedStates Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform ortrademarks, whether federal, state, or common law,arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’sdesigns, specifications, or instructions.

WarrantySeller hereby warrants that the goods which are thesubject matter of this contract will be manufacturedin a good workmanlike manner and all materialsused herein will be new and reasonably suitable forthe equipment. Seller warrants that if, during aperiod of five years from date of shipment of theequipment, the equipment rendered shall be foundby the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform inaccordance with Seller’s specifications of theproduct, Seller shall at his expense correct thesame, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship theequipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’sresponsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace-ment value of the equipment furnished under thiscontract.

Seller makes no warranties expressed or impliedother than those set out above. Seller specificallyexcludes the implied warranties of merchantibilityand fitness for a particular purpose. There are nowarranties which extend beyond the descriptioncontained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable forconsequential, exemplary, or punitive damages ofwhatever nature.

Any equipment returned for repair must be sentwith transportation charges prepaid. The equipmentmust remain the property of the Buyer. The afore-mentioned warranties are void if the value of theunit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return.

IndemnificationThe Seller shall not be liable for any propertydamages whatsoever or for any loss or damagearising out of, connected with, or resulting fromthis contract, or from the performance or breachthereof, or from all services covered by or furnishedunder this contract.

In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,including but not limited to, loss of profits orrevenue, loss of use of the equipment or anyassociated equipment, cost of capital, cost ofpurchased power, cost of substitute equipment,facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims ordamages of customers or employees of the Buyerfor such damages, regardless of whether said claimor damages is based on contract, warranty, tortincluding negligence, or otherwise.

Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liablefor any personal injury whatsoever.

It is agreed that when the equipment furnishedhereunder are to be used or performed in connec-tion with any nuclear installation, facility, oractivity, Seller shall have no liability for anynuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,or nuclear contamination to any property located ator near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agreesto indemnify and hold harmless the Seller againstany and all liability associated therewith whatso-ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclearreactor and includes the site on which any of theforegoing is located, all operations conducted onsuch site, and all premises used for such opera-tions.

Notice:Any illustrations and descriptions by BeckwithElectric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose ofidentification.

The drawings and/or specifications enclosed hereinare the proprietary property of Beckwith ElectricCo., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-tion of the apparatus described therein withoutwritten permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.

No illustration or description contained hereinshall be construed as an express warranty ofaffirmation, promise, description, or sample, andany and all such express warranties are specificallyexcluded nor shall such illustration or descriptionimply a warranty that the product is merchantableor fit for a particular purpose. There shall be nowarranties which extend beyond those contained inthe Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.

All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approvalof the Company.

��

��

��

�

��

��

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.

PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121E-MAIL [email protected] PAGE www.beckwithelectric.com

© 1998 Beckwith Electric Co.Printed in USA 800-3425A-IB-00 12/03

beckwith 3425

Documents